1. home and garden
2. home improvement and repair
3. plumbing

St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Project Manual Title Page
Section 00 01 01
Page 1
March 4, 2014
A
PROJECT MANUAL
Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
Issued for Tender
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
Kindergarten Addition
5 Redcar Avenue, Etobicoke, Ontario
Project No. 1307
Tender No. P-025-14
March 4, 2014
St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Table of Contents
Section 00 01 05
Page 1
March 4, 2014
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 10)
Document Identification
DR Pgs
Issued
PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 1
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00 01 01 Project Manual Title Page ................................................ A
00 01 05 Table of Contents ............................................................ A
00 01 10 Document Responsibility and Project Directory................ A
1
4
3
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders .................................................... O 15
00 31 00 Information Available for Review...................................... A 1
00 41 13 Base Bid Form ................................................................ O 3
00 43 36 Supplementary Bid Form – List of Subcontractors .......... O 1
Amendments to CCDC2-2008 Supplementary
Conditions....................................................................... O 33
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
June 2009
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00
01 21 00
01 25 00
01 26 00
01 31 13
01 31 19
01 32 16
01 32 33
01 33 00
01 35 13
01 45 00
01 50 00
01 56 23
01 60 00
01 73 00
01 73 29
01 74 13
01 77 00
01 78 36
General Instructions......................................................... A
Allowances ...................................................................... A
Product Substitution Procedures ..................................... A
Requests for Interpretation............................................... A
RFI Form ......................................................................... A
Coordination ................................................................... A
Project Meetings .............................................................. A
Construction Progress Documentation............................. A
Photographic Documentation........................................... A
Submittals........................................................................ A
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings......... A
Quality Control ................................................................. A
Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................... A
Hoarding ......................................................................... A
Products and Workmanship ............................................ A
Site Layout....................................................................... L
Cutting and Patching ....................................................... A
Progressive Cleaning ...................................................... A
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals ................ A
Warranties ....................................................................... A
8
2
2
2
1
2
5
2
1
8
7
4
7
2
6
2
2
2
8
1
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
not dated
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
not dated
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
5
2
March 4, 2014
October 5, 2013
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 16
02 41 19
Demolition........................................................................ A
Structural Alterations........................................................ S
St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Table of Contents
Section 00 01 05
Page 2
March 4, 2014
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 10)
Document Identification
02 41 20
02 41 21
DR Pgs
Shrub and Tree Preservation ........................................... L
Site Demolition and Removals ......................................... L
Issued
1
2
not dated
not dated
Concrete Formwork ......................................................... S 6
Concrete Reinforcement .................................................. S 6
Cast-in-Place Concrete.................................................... S 11
Concrete Floor Finishing ................................................. A 4
Precast Concrete Slabs ................................................... S 7
Architectural Precast Concrete Fabrications .................... A 4
October 5, 2013
October 5, 2013
October 5, 2013
March 4, 2014
October 5, 2013
March 4, 2014
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 10 00
03 20 00
03 30 00
03 35 00
03 41 00
03 48 00
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 05 00
04 05 13
04 05 19
04 05 23
04 21 00
04 22 00
04 43 24
Masonry Procedures ....................................................... A
Mortar and Grout for Masonry ......................................... A
Masonry Reinforcement and Connectors ........................ A
Masonry Accessories ...................................................... A
Brick Masonry Units ........................................................ A
Concrete Masonry Units ................................................. A
Stone Work...................................................................... L
9
3
3
4
1
2
1
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
not dated
9
5
7
1
October 5, 2013
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
not dated
3
2
9
March 4, 2014
not dated
March 4, 2014
Thermal Insulation .......................................................... A 4
Sprayed-Applied Foamed-in-Place Air Barrier Insulation . A 5
Below-Grade Vapour Barrier............................................ A 3
Air Barrier Systems.......................................................... A 4
Glass Fibre Concrete Panel Cladding ............................. A 6
Built-Up Asphalt Roofing.................................................. A 13
Metal Flashing ................................................................ A 6
Firestopping and Smoke Seals ....................................... A 6
Joint Sealants ................................................................. A 8
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00
05 41 13
05 50 00
05 52 14
Structural Steel ................................................................ S
Wind Load-Bearing Metal Studs ...................................... A
Metal Fabrications ........................................................... A
Steel Bollard .................................................................... L
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 53
06 10 63
06 40 00
Rough Carpentry ............................................................ A
Timber and Wood Work ................................................... L
Architectural Woodwork .................................................. A
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00
07 21 29
07 26 16
07 27 00
07 46 46
07 51 13
07 62 00
07 84 00
07 92 00
St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Table of Contents
Section 00 01 05
Page 3
March 4, 2014
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 10)
Document Identification
DR Pgs
Issued
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13
08 14 00
08 46 00
08 71 00
08 80 00
Steel Doors and Frames .................................................. A
Flush Wood Doors ........................................................... A
Aluminum Window-Wall and Window Systems ................ A
Door Hardware ................................................................H
Schedule of Finishing Hardware ......................................H
Hardware Product Data Sheets........................................H
Glass and Glazing .......................................................... A
11
5
16
10
11
38
10
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
not dated
December 2, 2013
not dated
March 4, 2014
Metal Supports for Gypsum and Cement Board............... A 7
Gypsum Board................................................................. A 12
Tiling ............................................................................... A 8
Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems ....................................... A 5
Specialty Acoustic Components....................................... A 3
Resilient Base.................................................................. A 3
Linoleum Tile Flooring ..................................................... A 5
Epoxy Floor Coating ........................................................ A 7
Painting............................................................................ A 8
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 00
09 29 00
09 31 00
09 51 23
09 54 40
09 65 13
09 65 16
09 67 00
09 91 00
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 11 00
10 14 24
10 28 00
Visual Display Surfaces .................................................. A
Chalkboard Art Wall ......................................................... L
Washroom Accessories .................................................. A
4
1
3
March 4, 2014
not dated
March 4, 2014
4
March 4, 2014
Preparation of Subgrade..................................................C 9
Site Grading.....................................................................C 6
Excavation and Backfill .................................................... A 4
Shoring and Timbering.....................................................C 2
Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling..............................C 12
not dated
not dated
March 4, 2014
not dated
not dated
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 24 13
Roller Window Shades..................................................... A
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 13 10
31 22 13
31 23 00
31 23 31
31 23 33
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16
32 13 13
32 31 13
32 91 13
32 91 21
32 92 23
32 93 00
Asphalt Paving................................................................. L
Exterior Concrete............................................................. L
Chain Link Fencing .......................................................... L
Soil Preparation for Planting Areas .................................. L
Topsoil and Finish Grading .............................................. L
Sodding ........................................................................... L
Trees, Shrubs and Grasses ............................................. L
4
2
2
1
2
2
4
not dated
not dated
not dated
not dated
not dated
not dated
not dated
St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Table of Contents
Section 00 01 05
Page 4
March 4, 2014
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 10)
Document Identification
DR Pgs
Issued
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 05 14
33 31 13
33 46 00
33 46 13
Manholes and Catchbasins..............................................C
Pipe Sewers ....................................................................C
Sub-Drainage................................................................... L
Foundation Drainage ...................................................... A
2
4
2
3
not dated
not dated
not dated
March 4, 2014
Schedule A – Scope of Work Selected Asbestos Abatement .......... AC 5
Asbestos Abatement Type 1 – Minimum Precautions ... AC 7
Asbestos Abatement Type 2 – Intermediate
Precautions................................................................... AC 11
Asbestos Abatement Type 3 – Maximum Precautions .. AC 14
October 2013
October 2013
ATTACHMENTS
October 2013
October 2013
PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 2
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00 01 01 Project Manual Title Page ................................................ A
00 01 05 Table of Contents ............................................................ A
00 01 10 Document Responsibility and Project Directory................ A
1
4
2
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
March 4, 2014
Refer to Mechanical Specification for Index ...................................... M299
March 3, 2014
DIVISIONS 21, 22, AND 23 FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING AND HVAC
DIVISIONS 26, 27, AND 28 – ELECTRICAL, COMMUNICATIONS, AND ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Refer to Electrical Specification for Index ........................................... E204
END OF SECTION
March 3, 2014
St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Document Responsibility and Project Directory
1.1
.1
.2
Document Responsibility
Refer to Project Manual, Section 00 01 05 - Table of Contents, for indication of
document responsibility (DR). Abbreviations for entity responsible for document
preparation are as follows:
.1
A - Denotes documents prepared by Architect.
.2
AC - Denotes documents prepared by Abatement Consultant
.3
E - Denotes documents prepared by Electrical Engineer.
.4
H - Denotes documents prepared by Architectural Hardware Consultant.
.5
L - Denotes documents prepared by Landscape/Civil Architect.
.6
M - Denotes documents prepared by Mechanical Engineer.
.7
O - Denotes documents prepared by Owner.
.8
S - Denotes documents prepared by Structural Engineer.
Professional seals if applied next to company names in the project directory (below)
govern only those specification sections and schedules identified by the corresponding
document responsibility (DR) abbreviation in Section 00 01 10.
.1
1.2
.1
With regard to Section 00 31 00: The architect’s seal governs only Section
00 31 00 proper, and not the documents listed therein.
Project Directory
Owner:
Toronto Catholic District School Board
80 Sheppard Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario
M2N 6E8
Tel: 416-222-8282 ext. 2476
.2
Section 00 01 10
Page 1
March 4, 2014
Architect (the Consultant):
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
317 Adelaide Street West, Suite 1004
Toronto, Ontario
M5V 1P9
Tel: 416-363-8877
Fax: 416-363-4029
St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Document Responsibility and Project Directory
1.3
.1
Project Directory – Sub Consultant’s Employed by Architect (the Consultant):
Structural Engineer:
Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited
19 Duncan Street, Suite 405
Toronto, Ontario
M5H 3H1
Tel: 416-593-5300
Fax: 416-593-4840
.2
Mechanical Engineer:
Enso Systems Inc.
5700 Yonge Street, Suite 200
Toronto, Ontario
M2M 4K2
Tel: 416-410-9865
.3
Electrical Engineer:
Enso Systems Inc.
5700 Yonge Street, Suite 200
Toronto, Ontario
M2M 4K2
Tel: 416-410-9865
.4
Landscape/Civil Architect:
JSW+ Associates
20 Mural Street, Unit 10
Richmond Hill, Ontario
L4B 1K3
.5
Section 00 01 10
Page 2
March 4, 2014
Tel: 905-889-8100 ext. 237
Architectural Hardware Consultant:
Trillium Architectural Products Ltd.
52 Prince Andrew Place
Toronto, Ontario
M3C 2H4
Tel: 647-529-1288
Fax: 416-391-5065
M: 416-200-6643
smcrae@trilliumarchitectural.com
St. Elizabeth Catholic School - Kindergarten Addition
Baird Sampson Neuert
Project No. 1307
Document Responsibility and Project Directory
1.4
.1
Project Directory – Sub Consultant’s Employed by Owner:
Abatement Consultant:
Golder Associates Ltd.
6925 Century Avenue
Mississauga, Ontario
L5N 7K2
Tel: 1-905-567-4444
END OF SECTION
Section 00 01 10
Page 3
March 4, 2014
Mechanical Specifications
for
Addition to
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
5 Redcar Avenue,
Toronto, Ontario
ENSO Systems Inc.
5700 Yonge Street, Suite 200
Toronto, Ontario, M2M 4K2
Tel/Fax: (416) 410-9865
Email: ensosystems@rogers.com
March 3, 2014
Project: 865
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 1
INDEX FOR DIVISION 21
Section
Title
210000
210001
083113
104413
104416
210513
210517
210518
210523
210529
220548
Index
General Conditions
Access Door and Frames
Fire Protection Cabinets
Fire Extinguishers
Common Motor Requirements for Fire Pumps
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire Protection Piping
Escutcheons for Fire Protection Piping
General-Duty Valves for Water-based Fire-Suppression Piping
Hangers and Supports for Fire Protection Piping & Equipment
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Protection
Piping & Equipment
Identification for Fire Protection Piping & Equipment
Fire Department Connections
Fire-Suppression Standpipes
Fire-Suppression Hoses and Nozzles
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
210553
211119
211200
211213
211313
Page
END OF INDEX
March 3, 2014
ESI# 865
1
2
2
6
7
8
9
12
13
16
22
32
34
34
41
42
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 2
SECTION 210001 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
General
1.1
1.2
Comply with the drawings, all specification sections including Division 00, 01, 02, 21, 22,
23 and 26, and all documents referred to therein.
The Mechanical work is divided into Divisions and Subsections as follows:


1.3
1.4
Division 22 – Plumbing Systems, and
Division 23 – HVAC Systems.
Subsections are in order, but may not be numbered consecutively. Refer to the Index at
each Division and page numbers.
Refer specifically to Division 22, Section 220001 for General Conditions applying to this
Division.
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
2.
Floor access doors and frames.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
D.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and
profiles, and finishes.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of
substrate.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 75x125mm (3x5’’) in size, in specified
finish, when requested.
Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with CAN/ULC S101, OBC
specified edition, that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for firetest-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed
and labeled by ULC or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source
from single manufacturer.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with
gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
5.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineralfiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic
closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for
concealed flange installation in ceilings and exposed flange for drywall partitions
unless concealed flanges are requested by the Architect.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of construction assembly into which
the door is being inserted to a minimum of 2 hours.
Temperature-Rise Rating: 450OF (250OC) at the end of 30 minutes.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Finish: No. 2b.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Hardware:
1.
2.
A.
B.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
2.3
Finish: No. 2b.
Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges FAP:
1.
D.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
6.
7.
8.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 3
Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.
Lock: Mortise cylinder.
MATERIALS
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with coldrolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel
(CS), exposed.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove
tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
FABRICATION
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to
types of supports indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath
attached to door panel.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
1.
2.
F.
For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board or
gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide
zinc-coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter
of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood
framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of
applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1.
E.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 4
For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating
on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
E.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 5
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromatefree, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for
topcoat.
Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Supply architectural style recessed frame and flange type access panels for locations
where mechanical equipment or any other device requiring maintenance or adjustment is
"built-in"; such as valves, junction boxes, relays, etc. Include cost of installation by
qualified tradesmen.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
Do not provide access panels in removable panel type ceilings. Indicate location of
equipment with acceptable markers.
Size and locate access panels in applied tile, or in glazed or unglazed structural tile to
suit block patterns.
ADJUSTING
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 6
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a.
b.
c.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
Portable fire extinguishers.
Fire hose valves.
Fire hoses and racks.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style,
and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed, semirecessed, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding
construction.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers, fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
Cabinet Type: (Drawing Symbol FHC), for hose, rack, valve, and fire extinguisher.
1.
B.
Standard of Acceptance: CEB, National Fire Equipment, Wilson & Cousins
2. Fully recessed Cabinet: 750 x 750 x 200 (30" x 30" x 8") deep, for two valves, the
hose and 2.27kg fire extinguisher.18gauge baked white enamel corrosion
protected steel tubs. Full 14 gauge stainless steel door (no glass) and door latch.
Front section to have 51mm adjustment to wall surface and complete with 13mm
turn back frame. Provide sign with lettering “FIRE HOSE & FIRE
EXTINGUISHER” as required by governing authorities.
Cabinet Type: (Drawing Symbol FEC) for portable extinguishers.
1. Standard of Acceptance: CEB, National Fire Equipment, Wilson & Cousins
2. Recessed cabinet: Tub 18 gauge steel construction with black enamel interior. Front
to be adjustable with black enamel trim and 18 gauge 304 stainless steel door, as
manufactured by Wilson and Cousins model IE-100, National Fire Protection model
CTE-300.
C.
Accessories:
1.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, size, spacing, and location.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
EXAMINATION
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth.
INSTALLATION
General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall
thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fireprotection cabinets.
Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
END OF SECTION 104413
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for
fire extinguishers.
Owner-Furnished Material: None.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire
extinguisher.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance
manuals.
COORDINATION
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to
ensure fit and function.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire Extinguishers: (Drawing Symbol FE) mounted on acceptable wall bracket. Dry
Chemical Type, capacity 2.27 kg with a 3A10BC ULC rating with discharge hose.
Standard of
Acceptance: National Fire Protection model Diamond or equal Wilson and Cousins.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 8
Fire Extinguishers: (Drawing Symbol FEC) mounted in an acceptable recessed wall
cabinet. Dry Chemical Type, capacity 2.27 kg with a 3A10BC ULC rating with
discharge hose.
Standard of Acceptance: National Fire Protection model Diamond or equal Wilson
and Cousins.
2.3
A.
B.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher
to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated baked-enamel finish.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words
EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a.
"FIRE
Orientation: Horizontal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in
compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
B.
Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire
extinguisher.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at
locations indicated.
END OF SECTION 104416
SECTION 210513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, generalpurpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac
power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or
shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
CSA or ULC Listed and marked for intended location and application.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 9
Efficiency: Energy efficient in Compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2010.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40OC and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate
connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to
motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating
of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Not Applicable.
END OF SECTION 210513
SECTION 210517 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
Sleeves.
Stack-sleeve fittings.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
A.
SLEEVES
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductileiron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and
welded steel collar; zinc coated.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,
zinc coated, with plain ends.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round
tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.3
A.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling
annular space between piping and sleeve.
2.
3.
A.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
1.
2.4
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 10
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for
imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with
center opening to match piping OD.
GROUT
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and
walls.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm)] annular clear space between piping and concrete
slabs and walls.
1.
C.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes except holes in mechanical service
space floors.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs
and walls are constructed.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
D.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeveseal system.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
2.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
E.
3.2
A.
STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint
sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
1.
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 11
Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above
finished floor level.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping
ring if ring is specified.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations.
Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
service piping entries into building.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size
and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in
penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space
between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs
and walls. Position water stop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
2.
Piping: Cast-iron wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a.
Piping: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steelpipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1)
3.
Piping: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steelpipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
5.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
4.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 12
Piping: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves, Stack-sleeve fittings
Interior Partitions:
a.
Piping: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
END OF SECTION 210517
SECTION 210518 – ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Escutcheons.
Floor plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
A.
B.
ESCUTCHEONS
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and finish and setscrew
fastener.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated
finish and spring-clip fasteners.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and finish and with concealed
hinge and setscrew.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and
spring-clip fasteners.
FLOOR PLATES
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated
piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
C.
D.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 13
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stampedsteel type, chrome plated finish with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated finish
with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated finish
with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or splitcasting brass type, rough-brass finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
or split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated with concealed hinge or
split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated with exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or splitplate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel
type, chrome plated with exposed-rivet hinge.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
2.
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
END OF SECTION 210518
SECTION 210523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
Supervised valves.
Wet sprinkler alarm check valves.
Valve accessories.
Trim and drain valves.
DEFINITIONS
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
NRS: Non-rising stem.
OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.
Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 14
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.
If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
Valves and Accessories UL and ULC Listed and FM approved.
1.
Supervised Valves:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Wet Sprinkler Alarm Check Valves:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Standard of Acceptance: Tyco model BFV-N with internally supervised
devices.
Wafer style butterfly. Maximum working pressure 250 psi (17.2 bar)
Material of Construction: Body: ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.
Disc: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, nickel plated. Seat material
grade EPDM “E” rubber conforming to ASTM D-2000. Upper stem type 416
stainless steel conforming to ASTM 582. Operator: Gear operator with iron
housing.
Standard of Acceptance: Tyco model AV-1 300.
Working pressure range: 20 to 300 psi (1.4 to 20.7 bar).
Material of Construction: Body: ductile iron; handhole cover: ductile iron or
cast iron; seat ring: bronze. Clapper for 21/2” (DN65) or smaller valve size:
stainless steel, for larger sizes cast or ductile iron. All valve sizes to have
EPDM clapper facing.
Valve Accessories
a.
Water Flow Detector: Dedicated UL and ULC listed and FM approved
containing two sets of SPDT (Form C) contacts, with an electrical rating of
10A @125/250 VAC/2.5 A @ 24 VDC.
Standard of Acceptance: Tyco, Reliable.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
b.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 15
Pressure Loss Detector: Pressure type water flow switch installed
downstream of the sprinkler check valve and/or sprinkler supervised valve.
Switch to be bellows activated type. Maximum service pressure rating of
250 psi adjustable from 10 to 200 psi. One or two SPDT contacts rated at
10A @125/250 VAC and 2.5A @ 6/12/24 VDC.
Standard of Acceptance: Tyco, Systems Sensor EPS series.
B.
C.
D.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain valves for each valve type from single
manufacturer.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.
Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher
as required by system pressures.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.
Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and
drain valves.
Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves.
Handlever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
Ball Valves:
1.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
Body Design: Two piece.
Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.
Port size: Full or standard.
Seats: PTFE.
Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Actuator: Handlever.
End Connections for Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) through NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65):
Threaded ends.
End Connections for Valves NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 32 and DN 65):
Grooved ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE INSTALLATION
Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve installation
requirements and applications:
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources
of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent
identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 16
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead
of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment
arranged to allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without
system shutdown. Provide separate support where necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 210553 "Identification for FireSuppression Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules and signs on
surfaces concealing valves; and the NFPA standard applying to the piping system in
which valves are installed. Install permanent identification signs indicating the portion
of system controlled by each valve.
END OF SECTION 210523
SECTION 210529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections
1.
1.2
A.
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe positioning systems.
Equipment supports.
Section 210548.13 "Vibration Controls for Fire Protection Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
DEFINITIONS
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion
to support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factoryfabricated components.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 17
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated
steel.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862kPa) minimum compressive strength.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of
pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating
below ambient air temperature.
FASTENER SYSTEMS
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use
in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping
from the building structure.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on fieldfabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
2.
C.
D.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for
individual pipe hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
Fastener System Installation:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 18
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's
operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and
waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not
exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
6.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
B.
3.5
A.
B.
Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicateinsulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc
welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding
work; and with the following:
2.
3.
4.
A.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and
0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075
inch (1.91 mm) thick.
NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
1.
3.4
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 19
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
mm).
PAINTING
Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal
framing systems and attachments for general service applications.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper
piping and tubing.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated
or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
K.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 20
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
5.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C)
piping installations.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
L.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
M.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
N.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 21
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 22
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger
with springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications
not specified in piping system Sections.
Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications
not specified in piping system Sections.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of
attachments where required in concrete construction.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to
supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
that are
that are
building
support
END OF SECTION 210529
SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
C.
Elastomeric isolation pads.
Elastomeric isolation mounts.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
Open-spring isolators.
Restrained-spring isolators.
Elastomeric hangers.
Spring hangers.
Snubbers.
Restraint channel bracings.
Restraint cables.
Seismic-restraint accessories.
Mechanical anchor bolts.
Adhesive anchor bolts.
Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Systems" for
devices for HVAC equipment and systems.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
b.
D.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance
with requirements.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying
with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Contact Mr. Sean Cochrane at HTS Engineering (representing Kinetics
Noise Control), tel. (416) 661-3400 for information.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment
weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select seismic restraints and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
a.
3.
b.
c.
d.
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections
for equipment mounted outdoors.
Seismic Restraint Details:
a.
1.2
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 23
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of
seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear
loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths,
and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure
during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with windrestraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with
requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: Submit for review to an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components
with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic
restraints.
Welding certificates when requested.
Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and
damping test data
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the OBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis.
They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval,
showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to
ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 24
and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by
a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - GENERAL
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
3.
Site Class as Defined in the OBC: D.
Building Classification Category: High - for Schools and Normal for Offices.
Building Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.24
(Toronto).
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.056 (Toronto).
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform
loading over pad area.
Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.
a.
b.
2.3
A.
Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
Mounting Plates:
a.
b.
2.
A.
Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
1.
2.4
Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
Component Factor: 1.0
Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0.
Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.
Peak Ground Acceleration: 0.150 for Toronto.
Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and
threaded with threaded studs or bolts.
Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for
anchoring to support structure.
Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material.
RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and
opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and
attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
a.
b.
2.5
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric
isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500
psig (3447 kPa).
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
1.
Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.7
A.
Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.
Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other
elastomeric material.
OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
1.
2.6
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 25
Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
Top plate with threaded mounting holes
Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
1.
2.
Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and
an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular
lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to
steel contact.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.8
A.
SPRING HANGERS
Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in
Compression:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.9
A.
Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor
bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
2.
3.
A.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
B.
C.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washerreinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
SNUBBERS
1.
2.10
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 26
Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and studwedge or female-wedge type.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient
cushion.
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel
channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to
building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosionresistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
RESTRAINT CABLES
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized (or ASTM A 492 stainless where noted in
this document or on the drawings) -steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching
hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for
rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
2.13
A.
2.14
A.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 27
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to
type and size of attachment devices used.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinccoated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select
anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or
urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid
mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior
applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - GENERAL
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COORDINATION AND EXECUTION
Coordinate size, shape, reinforcement and attachment of all housekeeping pads supporting vibration/seismically rated equipment. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi or as specified by the project engineer. Coordinate size,
thickness, doweling, and reinforcing of concrete equipment housekeeping pads and
piers with vibration isolation and seismic restraint device manufacturer to ensure adequate space, embedment and prevent edge breakout failures. Pads and piers must be
adequately doweled in to structural slab.
Housekeeping Pads must be adequately reinforced and adequately sized for proper installation of equipment anchors. Refer seismic restraint manufacturer’s written instructions.
Coordinate with vibration/seismic restraint manufacturer and the structural engineer of
record to locate and size structural supports underneath vibration/seismically restrained
equipment. Installation of all seismic restraint materials specified in this section shall be
accomplished as per the manufacturer’s written instructions. Adjust isolators and restraints after piping or wiring systems have been filled and equipment is at its operating
weight, following the manufacturer’s written instructions.
Attach piping to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer’s design. Install cables
so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structures.
Do not brace or support equipment to separate portions of the structure that may act
differently in response to an earthquake. For example, do not connect a Transverse restraint to a wall and then a Longitudinal restraint to either a floor/ceiling/roof at the
same braced location.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
F.
3.3
A.
Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint
manufacturer’s design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply
equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to hanger rods.
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS APPLICATION
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
All equipment and piping shall be restrained to resist seismic forces per the applicable Building Code(s) as a minimum; listed herein. Additional requirements
specified herein are included specifically for this project; as needed basis.
Install seismic restraint devices per the manufacturer’s submittals. Any deviation
from the manufacturer’s instructions shall be reviewed and approved by the manufacturer.
Attachment to structure for suspended equipment and pipe: If specific attachment
is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss
chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
Provide hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or as required to prevent buckling
of rods due to seismic forces.
Where rigid restraints are used on equipment or piping, the support rods for the
equipment or piping at restraint locations must be supported by anchors rated for
seismic use. Post-installed concrete anchors must be in accordance with ACI
355.2.
Concrete Anchor Bolts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 28
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre- or posttensioned tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Mechanical Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust per
manufactures instructions prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in
holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface
in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
2.
3.
Seismically restrain the following equipment: fire pumps. Install fasteners,
straps and brackets as required to secure the equipment.
Install neoprene grommet washers or fill the gap with epoxy on equipment anchor
bolts where clearance between anchor and equipment support hole exceeds 3.2
mm (0.125 inch).
Suspended Equipment: All suspended equipment that meets any of the following
conditions requires seismic restraints as specified by the supplier:
a.
b.
Rigidly attached to pipe that is 75 lbs. and greater,
Items hung independently or with flexible connections greater than 20 lbs..
For importance factors greater than 1.0 all suspended equipment requires
seismic restraints regardless of the above notes.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
c.
d.
4.
b.
Anchor floor and wall mounted equipment to the structure as per the
stamped seismic certifications / drawings.
Suspended equipment shall be restrained using seismic cable restraints, or
struts, and hanger rods as per the stamped seismic certifications / drawings.
Vibration Isolated Equipment:
a.
b.
D.
Wall mounted equipment weighing more than 20 lbs. with an importance
factor of 1.0.
The 300mm (12”) rule does not apply to suspended equipment.
Rigid Mounted Equipment:
a.
5.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 29
Seismic control shall not compromise the performance of noise control, vibration isolation or fire stopping systems.
Equipment supported by vibration-isolation hangers shall be detailed and
installed with approximately a 1/8” gap between the isolation hangers and
the structure. Isolators at restraint locations must be fitted with uplift limit
stops.
Piping Systems: Provide seismic control measures with spacing and anchorage engineered for the specific project.
1.
All piping is to be restrained to meet code requirements.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Restraint Spacing For Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
All piping associated with “Life Safety Systems” shall always have an importance factor of 1.5. Seismic restraint requirements / exemptions vary
with code and seismic acceleration – see specific code and comply with
applicable restraint requirements.
Seismically restrain / brace all pipes 65 mm (2 ½”) in nominal diameter and
larger.
Seismically restrain / brace all piping in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms
and refrigeration mechanical rooms 32 mm (1 ¼”) in nominal diameter and
larger.
Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines.
For ductile piping: Transverse supports a maximum of 12 m (40’) o.c.
For ductile piping: Longitudinal supports a maximum of 24 m (80’) o.c.
For non-ductile piping (e.g., cast iron, PVC) space Transverse supports a
maximum of 6 m (20’) o.c., and Longitudinal supports a maximum of 12 m
(40’) o.c. Differential spacing can be designed depending upon pipe size
and length(s) of run (design will be indicated on drawings of approved
method).
For piping with hazardous material inside (e.g., natural gas, medical gas)
space Transverse supports a maximum of 6 m (20’) o.c., and Longitudinal
supports a maximum of 12 m (40’) o.c.
For pipe risers, restrain the piping at floor penetrations using the same
spacing requirements as above.
Brace a change of direction longer than 3.7 m (12’).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
3.4
A.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 30
This specification does not allow the use of the 300mm (12’’) rule where the piping may be exempted from seismic restraint based on the length of the support
rods provided that the rods are not subjected to bending moments.
Install restraint cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment
or building structure. Tie back to structure at 45 degrees to the structure.
Longitudinal restraints for single pipe supports shall be attached rigidly to the
pipe, not to the pipe hanger.
For supports with multiple pipes (trapezes), secure pipes to trapeze member with
clamps approved for application.
Install flexible metal hose loops in piping which crosses building seismic joints,
sized for the anticipated amount of movement.
Install flexible piping connectors where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with
connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from
the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment.
Where pipe sizes reduce below required dimensions noted above in Section
3.2.E, the final restraint shall be installed at the transition location.
Longitudinal restraints for single conduit supports shall be attached rigidly to the
pipe, not to the pipe/conduit hanger.
For supports with multiple conduits (trapezes), secure conduit to trapeze member
with clamps approved for application.
Where conduits reduce below required dimensions noted above in Section 3.2.F,
the final restraint shall be installed at the transition location.
Rod Stiffener Clamps are required where the hanger rod exceeds the maximum
length shown in the seismic calculation sheets. They are only required at restraint
locations.
Seismically Rated Beam Clamps are required where welding to or penetrations to
steel beams are not approved.
Adjust restraint cables so that they are not visibly slack. Cable not to support
weight during normal operation.
Seismic systems are to be compatible with requirements for anchoring and guiding of systems.
Drilled or power driven anchors or fasteners shall not be permitted for use with
seismic control measures.
Friction due to gravity does not constitute a seismic attachment.
Seismic restraint connections are not to be connected to the bottom chord of
steel joists or the bottom flange of steel beams.
Standard beam clamps can be used to support restrained components; they cannot be used to connect the seismic restraint to the structure – only for the hanger
rods.
Brace remaining piping, ductwork, electrical components to code requirements
(OBC & NBCC or TI-809-04)) or in conformance with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.) “Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”, 2ND edition or 3RD edition depending on
Code or EOR.
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent
sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the
connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different
structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 31
equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for
piping flexible connections.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer prior to installing any seismic restraint devices. The contractor shall seek
the representative’s guidance in any installation procedures with which he/she is unfamiliar.
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer mid-way through the listed project for an inspection all vibration and
seismic restraint devices already installed. A written report of any installation errors,
improperly selected devices, or other fault in the system which could affect the performance of the system shall be documented and the contractor shall perform all steps
that are required from this written report to properly complete the vibration and seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Upon completion of the installation, arrange for the design Engineer to visit the site to
verify the proper installation of all seismic restraint devices herein specified. A written
report citing any installation errors, improperly selected devices, or other fault in the
system which could affect the performance of the system should be generated by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall verify that isolators are adjusted, with spring’s perpendicular to bases or housing, adjustment bolts are tightened up on equipment mountings,
and hangers are not cocked. Upon completion of the Work, the Engineer shall provide
a sealed letter addressed to the local authorities having jurisdiction confirming that the
Seismic Design and Installation is in general conformance with the design documents
and the Ontario and National Building Codes.
The installing contractor shall take all steps required to properly complete the seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Perform the following tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
A.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Consultant, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Consultant's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Consultant.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
ADJUSTING
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
END OF SECTION 210548
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 32
SECTION 210553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
Pipe labels.
Valve tags.
Pump and cabinet lamacoids
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
Valve numbering scheme.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
PIPE LABELS
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with
lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
backing.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1.
2.
2.2
A.
VALVE TAGS
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1.
2.
B.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to
accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping At least 1/2 inch
(13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm) and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances].
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having
predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.
Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag),
location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or
modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and
similar special uses.
1.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.3
A.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 33
LAMACOID LABELS FOR PUMPS AND CABINETS
Engraved Lamacoid Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. Black letters on a
white background. Minimum thickness 3mm (0.12’’) and letter height shall be 10mm
(3/8’’).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
PREPARATION
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible
ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as
shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.4
A.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes,
including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
EQUIPMENT LAMACOID LABELS
Install lamacoid labels on all pumps, cabinets or equipment. Mechanically fasten
lamacoid labels to equipment where possible (avoid adhesives) or strap with stainless
steel bands.
END OF SECTION 210553
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 34
SECTION 211119 - FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
Exposed-type fire-department connections.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
EXPOSED-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
Standard: ULC.
Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.
Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department
sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections,
and check devices or clappers.
Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.
Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.
Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.
Number of Inlets: To fire department standard.
Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR."
Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Outlet Size: NPS 4 (DN 100) or fire department standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Install wall-type fire-department connections.
Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection.
END OF SECTION 211119
SECTION 211200 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
Fire-protection specialty valves.
Hose connections.
Alarm devices.
Pressure gages.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 35
DEFINITIONS
Standard-Pressure Standpipe Piping: Fire-suppression standpipe piping designed to
operate at working pressure 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping and design criteria. Ensure
that pipes are adequately sized so that a fire pump is not necessary.
2. Successful tenderer will be required to produce shop drawings complete with all
necessary hydraulic pipe sizing and system design calculations where required by the
local authorities. Submit these drawings and calculation as specified.
3. System design and calculation procedures shall be in accordance with the
requirements of governing codes and authorities. The design and drawings must be
certified by a Professional Engineer.
C.
D.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Approved Standpipe Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 14, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations
if applicable.
Fire-hydrant flow test report.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-suppression standpipes specialties to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing firesuppression standpipes and providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant
flow test.
a.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
A.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and
field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties, accessories,
installation, and testing shall comply with NFPA 14.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Standpipe Service: Do not interrupt firesuppression standpipe service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary fire-suppression standpipe service according to requirements indicated:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 36
Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
fire-suppression standpipe service.
Do not proceed with interruption of fire-suppression standpipe service without
Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
2.2
A.
B.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Automatic Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose
connections. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of
supplying water demand.
Automatic Wet-Type, Class II Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose
stations. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of
supplying water demand.
Automatic Wet-Type, Class III Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose
stations and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections. Has open water-supply valve with
pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Standard-Pressure, Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 175psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure.
Fire-suppression standpipe design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is as follows:
As per NFPA 14.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
and fitting materials and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and
pipe sizes.
BLACK STEEL PIPE AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS
Schedule 40: ASTM A 135/A 135M, Grade A; with factory- or field-formed ends to
accommodate joining method.
Schedule 40: ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E, Grade A; with factory- or field-formed
ends to accommodate joining method.
Schedule 10: ASTM A 135/A 135M or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5
(DN 125) and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10
(DN 150 to DN 250), plain end.
Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M, threaded.
Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1.
2.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting
or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
2.5
A.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid
pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
SPECIALTY VALVES
General Requirements:
1.
2.
Standard: ULC's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or FM Global's
"Approval Guide."
Pressure Rating:
a.
3.
4.
5.
B.
A.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
Size: Same as connected piping.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Standard: ULC.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
End Connections: Threaded.
HOSE CONNECTIONS
Valve Hose Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 37
Standard: ULC hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting
pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum.
Material: Brass or bronze.
Size: NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 40 or DN 65), as indicated.
Inlet: Female pipe threads.
Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose valve
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.
Pattern: To suit installation.
Pressure-Control Device Type: As required.
Design Outlet Pressure Setting: As per NFPA 14.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated in cabinets with glass window installed in finished
areas, rough brass or bronze in cabinets without glass window and mechanical
service spaces.
Water-Flow Indicators:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Standard: ULC.
Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm
and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factoryset, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof
cover that sends signal if removed.
Type: Paddle operated.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa).
Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 38
PRESSURE GAGES
Standard: UL 393.
Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
Pressure Gage Range: Zero to 250 psig (Zero to 1725 kPa) minimum.
Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
PREPARATION
Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 14 and NFPA 291. Use results for
system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Report test results promptly and in writing.
EXAMINATION
Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and
stations are to be installed.
WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to building's interior water-distribution
piping.
Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories at connection to
water-distribution piping. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at
connection to water supply.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Consultant before
deviating from approved working plans.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of firesuppression standpipe piping.
Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building or as
shown on plans.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department
connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft-metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages
to permit removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
K.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special
fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure
rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable
for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
H.
I.
J.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
A.
B.
C.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints
for galvanized-steel pipe.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials
of both piping systems.
VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead
of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
Specialty Valves:
1.
3.7
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel
pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according
to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join
steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved
joints.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified
processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.
K.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 39
General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in
main supply to system.
HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes.
Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
3.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.9
A.
B.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by DN 40) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device.
Install wall-mounted-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with
finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet.
Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Comply with requirements
for cabinets in Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."
HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION
Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-station valves with flow-restricting device unless
otherwise indicated.
Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by DN 40) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device unless
otherwise indicated.
Install wall-mounted, rack hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with
finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet.
Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Comply with requirements
for cabinets in Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."
Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket.
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Reconnect to existing wall-type fire-department connection.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection.
IDENTIFICATION
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 14.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
B.
3.12
A.
B.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized,
standard-weight steel pipe with cast-iron threaded fittings or grooved joints.
Standard-pressure, wet-type fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 3 (DN 75)
and smaller, shall be the following:
1.
C.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 40
Schedule 10 black steel, joined with ULC listed combination of grooved fittings,
gaskets, and grooves conforming to NFPA-13 & 14 requirements. Grooves cut or
rolled on pipe shall be dimensionally compatible with fittings.
Standard-pressure, wet-type fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 4 (DN 100)
and larger, shall be the following:
1.
Schedule 40, black-steel pipe CSA B63, Grade A black steel, joined by welding.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.13
A.
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 41
TEST AND CERTIFICATES
Upon completion furnish and pay for a certificates of approval certifying compliance with
the rules and regulations of governing authorities. Include pressure test results, material
test sheets, etc., as required by the authorities having jurisdiction, OBC and NFPA.
Submit sealed final review letter from design Engineer certifying that all work has been
designed and installed in accordance with the OBC, NFPA 14 and the detailed design
documents.
END OF SECTION 211200
SECTION 211213 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION HOSES AND NOZZLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
A.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings:
1.
1.3
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) rack-type hose stations.
NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 2-1/2 (DN 40 by DN 65) rack-type hose stations.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each product type to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
RACK-TYPE HOSE STATIONS
Standard of Acceptance: National Fire Protection, Wilson and Cousins
Hose Stations (Drawing Symbol FHC); Standpipe Valves,
Accessories:
Hoses
and
1. ULC listed semi-automatic hose rack, chromed moving parts, positive water stop, as
manufactured by Wilson and Cousins model IE-75 CP or National Fire Protection
model HR.
2. 40mm all purpose single jacket hose, 23m length, abrasion resistant polyester
filament jacket with polyurethane lining as manufactured by National Fire Protection
model paragon.
C.
D.
E.
Chrome plate exposed parts (valves, couplings, hose rack, etc.) Fire hose cabinets,
hose racks, hose and fittings shall be by one supplier
Provide fire extinguisher in fire hose cabinet.
The following identification symbols indicate specific requirements for the hose
cabinets:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 42
FHC: Surface or recessed mounted as shown on the drawings with 40mm/65mm
valves and hose rack assembly to Building Standard.
Provide Owner with one set of hose wrenches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
fire hoses, reels, racks, and monitors.
HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION
Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-station valves with flow-restricting device unless
otherwise indicated.
Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by DN 40) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device unless
otherwise indicated.
Install wall-mounted, rack hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with
finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet.
Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Install hose-reel hose
stations on wall with bracket.
END OF SECTION 211213
SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
Sprinklers.
Excess Pressure Pump and Pressure gages.
DEFINITIONS
Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to
operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa)
minimum working pressure.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping and design criteria. Ensure
that pipes are adequately sized so that a fire pump is not necessary.
2. Successful tenderer will be required to produce shop drawings complete with all
necessary hydraulic pipe sizing and system design calculations where required by the
local authorities. Submit these drawings and calculation as specified.
3. System design and calculation procedures shall be in accordance with the
requirements of governing codes and authorities. The design and drawings must be
sealed by a Professional Engineer.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
Approved Sprinkler Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations
if applicable.
Fire-hydrant flow test report.
Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications:
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler
systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test
where require.
a.
C.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
In accordance with NFPA 13.
SUBMITTALS
1.
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 43
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and
field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: ULC listed where required by Code
and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and
with space for spare sprinklers of each type of sprinklers used on the project plus
sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations,
and pipe sizes.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Standard Weight, Black - Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,. Pipe ends may be factory or
field formed to match joining method.
Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in
NPS 5 (DN 125) and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to
NPS 10 (DN 150 to DN 250), plain end.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1.
2.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
A.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick
or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise
indicated.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
Sprinkler Guards:
Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:
A.
Standard: ULC.
Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
Outlet: NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connection.
Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Standard: ULC.
Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
ALARM DEVICES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid
pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
1.
2.
2.5
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 44
Standard: ULC.
Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.
Size: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum- diameter.
Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
PRESSURE GAGES AND EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP
Gauges:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 45
Standard: ULC
Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum.
Excess Pressure Pump.
1.
Provide an excess pressure pump with automatic control for each wet sprinkler
system including all necessary piping, starter, controls and wiring from
designated circuit as shown on the Electrical Drawings to maintain system
pressure. Electric supply: 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 cycle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating
from approved working plans.
Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff
valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install
drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply
with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages
to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special
fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure
rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
E.
F.
G.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable
for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
H.
I.
J.
L.
M.
N.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources
of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent
identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead
of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
Specialty Valves:
2.
A.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints
for galvanized-steel pipe.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel
pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according
to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join
steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved
joints.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressureseal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials
of both piping systems.
1.
3.4
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged.
Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate
retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal
fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified
processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.
K.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 46
General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in
main supply to system.
Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical
ceiling panels.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
B.
Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent
or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
IDENTIFICATION
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.7
A.
B.
3.8
A.
B.
C.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 47
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
CLEANING
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized,
standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of
specified fittings.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 3 (DN 75) and smaller shall
be the following:
1.
Schedule 10, black-steel pipe joined with ULC listed combination of grooved
fittings, gaskets and grooves.
Grooves cut or rolled on pipe shall be
dimensionally compatible with the fittings.
Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic
D.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger shall
be the following:
1.
3.9
A.
Schedule 40, black-steel joined by welding. Welding methods shall comply with
all of the requirements of AWSI D10.9 Specification for Qualification of Welding
Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing Level AR3.
SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1.
Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers or pendent type as required. Regular
brass finish.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
3.10
A.
B.
Fire Protection Specifications
Page 48
Rooms with Suspended T-bar and Drywall Ceilings and Bulkheads: Pendent
semi-recessed type with chrome plated finish and one piece chrome plated
escutcheon with centre hole diameters to suit sprinkler head.
Side-wall type, chrome plated with escutcheon and deflector to give necessary
area coverage in all areas required by NFPA-13 (around large skylight openings,
along mezzanine perimeters, etc.
Concealed type in all areas where shown on the drawings. Finish to Architect’s
approval and subject to shop drawing review.
TEST AND CERTIFICATES
Upon completion furnish and pay for a certificates of approval certifying compliance with
the rules and regulations of governing authorities. Include pressure test results, material
test sheets, etc., as required by the authorities having jurisdiction, OBC and NFPA.
Submit sealed final review letter from design Engineer certifying that all work has been
designed and installed in accordance with the OBC, NFPA 13 and the detailed design
documents.
END OF SECTION 211313
End of Division 21
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 1
INDEX FOR DIVISION 22
Section
Title
220000
220001
083113
220516
220517
220518
220523.12
220523.14
220529
Index
General Conditions
Access Door and Frames
Expansion Fittings and Loops for Pluming Piping
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping
Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping
Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping
Check Valves for Plumbing Piping
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping & Equipment
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing
Piping & Equipment
Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment
Plumbing Piping Insulation
Domestic Water Piping
Domestic Water Piping Specialties
Sanitary and Vent Piping
Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
Facility Storm Drainage Piping
Storm Drainage Piping Specialties
Commercial Water Closets
Commercial Lavatories
Commercial Sinks
Drinking Fountain
Earth Moving
220548
220553
220719
221116
221119
221316
221319
221413
221423
224213.13
224216.13
224216.16
224216.17
312000
Page
END OF INDEX
March 3, 2014
ESI# 865
1
2
12
15
17
20
21
23
26
32
42
44
48
54
61
72
75
82
85
87
88
91
92
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 2
SECTION 220001 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
General
1.1
Comply with the drawings, all specification sections including Division 00, 01, 02, 21, 22,
23 and 26, and all documents referred to therein.
The work of these Divisions – Plumbing and Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) is divided into Divisions and Subsections.
1.2


Division 22 – Plumbing Systems, and
Division 23 – HVAC Systems.
1.3
Subsections are in order, but may not be numbered consecutively. Refer to the Index at
each Division and page numbers.
2
Definitions and Interpretations
2.1
The term "provide" shall be understood to include labour, materials, and services
necessary to supply and install item or work referred to.
The term "approved", "approval", etc., shall be understood to mean approved by
authorities having jurisdiction as conforming to Codes, Standards, By-laws, etc.
The term “accessible” shall be understood to mean readily accessible by a person using
necessary tools but without cutting or breaking out material.
The term “exposed” shall be understood to mean within the line of sight of any person
standing, sitting in or using the occupied space, unless defined otherwise in the Sections
of Division 22 and 23.
The term “listed” shall be understood to mean that the materials or equipment have been
tested in accordance with applicable standards, and have been approved and listed for
their intended use by a testing company approved by the Authorities having jurisdiction.
The term “subject to review” shall be understood to mean work or materials shall be laid
out for review. No work shall proceed until instructions have been obtained. Submit further
information, shop drawings, samples, etc., as specified and as may be reasonably
requested.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
Laws and Regulations
Work provided under this Division shall conform to Section 014200, the standards and
codes, current by-laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. In case of
conflict, the codes, by-laws and regulations take precedence over the Contract
Documents. Do not reduce the standard established by the drawings and specifications
by applying codes, by-laws and regulations.
4
Permits and Fees
Give notices, obtain and pay for permits including Electrical Safety Authority Inspection
and pay all fees necessary to complete the work of this Division. Include for all testing and
demonstration to authorities having jurisdiction required to obtain final approvals.
5
Drawings
The drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate
general arrangement and approximate location of equipment, fixtures, piping and ductwork
runs. Take information involving accurate dimensions of the building by site
measurements.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 3
6
Examination
6.1
6.2
Refer to Section 017123.
Examine existing buildings, building site and local conditions affecting the work together
with drawings and specifications of other Divisions forming part of the Tender Documents,
before Tendering. Submit notice of omissions, discrepancies, defects or interferences
affecting the work before submitting Tender.
7
Co-ordination
7.1
7.2
Refer to Section 013100.
Lay out work so that it does not conflict with work of other Trades. Prepare field drawings
showing size and location of equipment bases, sleepers, inserts, sleeves and openings
required for passage of ducts, pipes, conduits, cables, etc., through walls, partitions, roofs,
ceilings, floors and structural members. Submit field drawings as specified under Shop
Drawings.
No extra cost or credit shall be incurred for any change in location of equipment, providing
distance does not exceed 3 m (10') and information is given before installation of said
equipment.
Coordinate work with all other trades and notify consultant of any conflicts or
discrepancies prior to rough-in.
7.3
7.4
8
Standard of Materials and Equipment
8.1
8.2
Refer also to Section 014000 and 016000.
Material required for performance of work shall be new and of uniform pattern throughout
work. Identical units or equipment shall be of same manufacture.
All material and equipment shall be of the type subject to Factory Mutual, Underwriters'
Laboratories of Canada or Canadian Standards Association inspection and approval and
shall bear ULC or CSA labels.
8.3
9
Protection of Work and Materials
Protect materials and equipment from damage, inclement weather and/or extreme temperatures. Provide enclosures, tarpaulins, or special protection as required under the
circumstances. Be responsible for the protection and maintenance of the work of this
Division until the work has been completed and accepted.
10
Warranty
10.1
Warrant equipment and work against defects, deficiencies in design and workmanship
for a period of one year after date of substantial completion.
Provide extended warranties where called for. Submit (1) copy of warranty certificates with
Operating and Maintenance manuals.
10.2
11
Trial Usage
Allow for use of electrical systems to be thoroughly tested before final completion and
acceptance of the work. Supply labour and equipment for such tests.
12
Superintendence
Maintain at the job site for the full duration of the project, qualified personnel with proven
experience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable nature
and complexity.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 4
13
Data Books, Operating and Maintenance Instructions
13.1
13.2
Refer to Section 017823.
Submit three copies of final reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's maintenance and
operating instruction for each piece of major equipment and system. Include the names
and addresses of spare parts suppliers and service organizations.
Compile copies in sets in hard cover three-ring data books, with index page and indexing
tabs.
Provide the services of qualified personnel to instruct and familiarize the Owner's
operating and maintenance staff with the correct procedures of operating and maintaining
systems and equipment.
13.3
13.4
14
Base Bid and Supplementary Mechanical Tender Form
14.1
Products names and/or model numbers shown are for the purpose of establishing a
standard of quality, performance, serviceability, appearance and capacity. Base tenders
on the materials, equipment and methods specifically named in the specifications or
indicated on the drawings. Submit proposed substitutions or alternatives in accordance
with the following procedures:
.1
.2
14.2
Where products, materials, methods and services are specifically named or identified
as "Base Bid" items, submit proposed substitutions and/or alternatives as required by
the Supplementary or Mechanical Tender Form.
Where products, materials and methods are not specifically named or identified as
"Base Bid" items, include one of the listed acceptable equipment manufacturers,
methods and/or services (where applicable) in the tender and show the product and/or
service on which the tender is based as required by the Supplementary or
Mechanical Tender Form.
14.3
The tenderer is encouraged to offer products and materials by manufacturers not included
in the specification. Do not include these items in the tender sum, but show items
separately as substitutes complete with changes in price.
Ensure that offered substitutions and/or alternatives meet space, weight, connection,
power and wiring requirements, etc. All costs incurred for additional components, changes
to services, structural or space requirements, layouts and plans, etc., necessary to
accommodate the alternative or substitute items shall be borne by this Division.
15
Shop Drawings and Samples
15.1
Submit shop drawings for review in accordance with the requirements of Section 013300
and furnish shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction for review where applicable.
Submit shop drawings showing details of construction, weights, accurate dimensions,
capacities, performances and wiring diagrams for each piece of major equipment and for
each piece of equipment listed under "Submittals" article in the Sub-Sections of Division
22 and 23.
Indicate the following information:
15.2
15.3
 Manufacturer's and Supplier's name, catalogue model number
 Name of trade supplying item, project numbers
 Number identifying item in the contract documents such as equipment, fan and pump
numbers, diffuser & grille identification symbols, etc.
15.4
Check for pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make, performance,
electrical characteristics before submittal. Be responsible for accuracy of equipment
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 5
dimensions related to available space, accessibility for maintenance and compliance with
Codes and Regulations.
Review of the drawings shall be construed to apply to general arrangement only and shall
not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings and
specifications, unless he has submitted written notice of such deviations at the time of
submission of drawings and samples.
Furnish prints of the reviewed shop drawing details to other parties for co-ordination.
Submit samples of material and equipment where specified or as instructed for review
before ordering same. Samples may be retained until the completion of the contract.
Complete all work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. All materials and
workmanship shall be equal to reviewed samples.
16
Record Drawings and Demonstration
16.1
16.2
Refer to Section 017839.
Obtain and pay for one set of black line record drawings relating to the work of this
Division and keep at the job site. Note clearly, accurately and promptly revisions to the
work and deviations from the Contract Documents. Dimension the location, depth, size
and type of underground services from convenient reference points.
Submit three sets of prints and one disk with record drawings (in AutoCAD 2004) upon
completion of work. Construction drawing files will be made available for contractor’s use.
16.3
17
Accessibility
Install work so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repairs by
access panels or other acceptable means.
18
Concealment
18.1
Conceal piping, ductwork, conduit and cables except in unfinished areas such as service
rooms or as noted on the drawings, in partitions, walls, between floors and ceilings etc.
Install services that are to be concealed as close to the building structure as possible so
that furrings, ceiling spaces and other enclosures can be of minimum size. Run exposed
services parallel to building lines.
Identify locations and submit notice where installation of work interferes with interior
treatment and use of space. Await instructions before proceeding with the work
18.2
18.3
19
Final Inspection
19.1
Submit a written request to arrange for a final inspection of all electrical systems when:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
Systems have been tested and reports submitted. Obtain and submit unconditional
final inspection certificate to Owner upon completion of work.
Operating and maintenance manuals have been submitted.
Tags are in place and equipment identified.
Owner's operating personnel have been given operating and maintenance
instructions.
19.2
Obtain and submit unconditional final inspection certificate from local Authorities having
jurisdiction to Owner upon completion of work.
20
Cutting, Patching and Firestopping
20.1
20.2
Refer to Sections 017329, 078500 and 079200.
Advise other Trades of the location of openings required for the installation of this
Division's work. Provide and set sleeves, inserts, anchors, etc., when requested in
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
21
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 6
advance of concrete pouring or similar work. Pay for and employ the Trades whose work
is involved for cutting and patching of completed work. Lay out such work for review. Do
not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
Unless noted otherwise, perform and pay for cutting and patching in existing construction
required for installation of work under this Division. Sleeve as specified elsewhere in this
Specification.
Do not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
Provide fire stopping and smoke sealant where required for work by this Division. Refer
to general sections for material specifications.
Make good openings in walls and floors where demolished equipment, conduit, etc., are
removed.
Site Visit
Site visits are strongly suggested to all bidders in order to review existing conditions that
may affect the work. Advise the Owner’s representative 72 hours in advance of planned
site visit and make all necessary arrangements to gain access to the areas affected by
the work of the Contract.
22
Applicable Codes, Standards and Authorities
22.1
Codes, standards and authorities governing the work of this Division shall include but not
be limited to the following and as noted in Section 014200:
22.1.1 Ontario Building Code and all Regulations referred to therein.
22.1.2 National Building Code and all Regulations referred to therein.
22.1.3 Ontario Electrical Safety Code
22.1.4 Ontario Gas Utilization Code
22.1.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.
22.1.6 NFPA No. 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
22.1.7 NFPA No. 14 – Installation of Standpipe Systems
22.1.8 Fire Protection: Insurance Underwriters (Agency).
22.1.9 Department of Labour Regulations.
22.1.10
Department of Consumer and Commercial Affairs - Pressure Vessel and
Pressure Piping Regulations.
22.2
Authorities:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Municipal Building Department
Municipal Fire Prevention Authorities
Ontario Ministry of Health and Longterm Care
Electrical Safety Authority
Ontario Ministry of Energy and Environment
Ontario Fire Marshal’s Office
23
Abbreviations
23.1
Abbreviations used in these documents shall be as shown in the Table 1 at the end of this
section.
Other abbreviations may be used and shall be interpreted as referred to in the ASHRAE
Guide and Data Books.
23.2
24
English/Metric Conversion
Metric Units of measurement used in this specification are based on the International
System of Units (SI) contained in "The Canadian Metric Practice Guide" prepared by the
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 7
Canadian Standards Association, Publication Number CAN3-Z234.1. Motor and pipe size
conversions used are as in Table 2 at the end of this section.
25
List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods and Services
See a complete list at the end of this section in Table 3.
26
Hoisting Apparatus
26.1
Unless noted otherwise, provide all apparatus necessary for the hoisting and placing of
materials or equipment forming part of this Division.
Ensure that all equipment and materials can be hoisted and set in place. Include for the
cost of dismantling and reassembling equipment where required.
26.2
27
Work In Existing Building
27.1
General
27.1.1 Refer to 015000 and 017400.
27.1.2 Route new services to avoid interference with existing construction.
27.1.3 Cut back and terminate existing services to present a neat appearance.
27.1.4 Remove and dispose of existing abandoned piping, ductwork, conduit, wiring, devices,
equipment, fixtures, hangers and supports. All wiring and cable to be removed to source
panel. All unused outlet boxes (where it is not practical to remove same) shall be
blanked with coverplates.
27.1.5 Hand over to the Owner existing devices and equipment to be removed such as
thermostats, pneumatic control valves, etc., when requested by the Owner.
27.1.6 Refer also to Demolition Section in the Contract Documents.
27.1.7 Conceal all piping, ductwork and conduit except in unfinished areas such as service
rooms or as noted on the drawings. Walls shall be chased where necessary.
27.1.8 It shall be the responsibility of any contractor, who while working on this project may
disturb the wiring or produce heat, smoke, or dust that may activate the fire alarm
system, to arrange to have the fire detectors in the area isolated before commencing
such work. Failure to comply may result in false alarms. Subsequent charges and fines
by the local municipality for attending to a false alarm shall be borne by this contractor.
27.1.9 All water and gas supply interruptions (including system shut down, drain & refill water
system for all new connections to existing services) shall be arranged with the Owner’s
representative at least 10 working days in advance and performed after hours as
directed by the Owner’s representative. Obtain written approval 48 hours prior to each
shut down.
27.2
Work Schedule
Carry out Owner/user disturbing work after hours or on weekends. For further details refer
to Instructions to Bidders and Section 013213.
27.3
X-ray and Scanning
Before core drilling any concrete floors or walls, x-ray and/or scan the area in question.
Include for premium time to perform this work.
28
Continuity of Existing Services
Keep time for interruption of existing services to a minimum and arrange shut down
periods with the Owner's authorized representative. Obtain written approval 72 hours prior
to each shut down. Include in tender price for overtime work that may be required to tie-in
services and wiring at night or weekends.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
29
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 8
Testing
Perform tests on each system and submit test results for approval prior to the final
acceptance of the work. Repair or correct deficiencies and re-test system as directed.
Table 1 - Abbreviations
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
AFF or A.F.F.
Above Finished Floor
AFG or A.F.G.
Above Finished Grade
AMCA
Air Moving and Conditioning Assoc. Inc.
ANSI or A.N.S.I.
American National Safety Institute
ARI or A.R.I.
American Refrigeration Institute
ASA or A.S.A.
American Standards Association
ASHRAE -
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning
ASTM -
American Society For Testing Materials
BOD or B.O.D.
By Other Division
CGA
Canadian Gas Association
CGSB
Canadian Government Specification Board
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CUA
Canadian Underwriter’s Association
CI or C.I.
Cast Iron
CO or C.O.
Clean-out
C/W or c/w
Complete With
CW or C.W.
Domestic Cold Water
CBM/S or cbm/s or m3/s
Cubic Meters Per Second
DBT or D.B.T.
Dry Bulb Temperature
EEMAC or E.E.M.A.C.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer’s Association Of Canada
EDR
Equivalent Direct Radiation
ESA
Electrical Safety Authority
FA(P) or FAAP
Fire Alarm (Panel) or Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel
HP or hp
High Pressure Or Horsepower
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 9
Table 1 – Abbreviations Continued
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
KG or kg
Kilograms
KPA or kpa
Kilopascals
KW or kw
Kilowatts
L or l
Litres
L/S or l/s
Litres Per Second
LV or lv
Low voltage
M or m
Meters
MM or mm
Millimeters
M/S or m/s
Meters Per Second
MG or mg
Milligrams
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NC, NO or nc, no
NormallyOpen,NormallyClosed Position When Power Is Off or Control
Signal Output Is Zero
NRCC or N.R.C.C.
National Research Council Of Canada
NTS or N.T.S.
Not To Scale
PDI or P.D.I.
Plumbers Design Institute
RH or R.H.
Relative Humidity
PPM or ppm
Parts Per Million
RPM or rpm
Revolutions Per Minute
SMACNA
SheetMetal And AirConditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
SS or S.S.
Stainless Steel
SP or S.P.
Static Pressure
TSSA
Technical Standards and Safety Authority
ULC
Underwriter's Laboratory of Canada
WBT or W.B.T.
Wet Bulb Temperature
WP or wp
Working Pressure
WG or wg
Water Gauge
WOG or wog
Water Oil And Gas
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 10
Table 2 - Motor and Pipe Size Conversions
English System
Motor Size
HP
.5
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
KW
.37
English System
Pipe Size
Inches (“)
1/2
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
MM
12 or 15
.75
.56
3/4
20
1
.75
1
25
1.5
1.1
1-1/4
32
2
1.5
1-1/2
40
3
2.2
2
50
5
3.7
2-1/2
65
7.5
5.5
3
75
10
7.5
3-1/2
90
15
10.5
4
100
20
15
5
125
25
19
6
150
30
22
8
200
40
30
10
250
Table 3 - List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods & Services
The following is a list of acceptable equipment manufacturer, methods and services. Any
deviation from the following list must be identified at the time of Tender closing on the
Supplementary Tender Form.
Item
Base Bid
Acceptable Alternatives
Vibration Isolation
Silencers
-
Vibro-Acoustics, Kinetics Noise Control
Kinetics, Price, VibroAcoustics
Mech’l Grooved Joints
for Fire Protection System
Only
Gate, Globe & Butterfly Valves
Victaulic
-
Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
Check Valves
-
Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
Ball Valves
Balancing (CBV) Valves
Unions
Strainers
-
Crane, Jenkins, Watts, Kitz
Armstrong, Bell and Gossett
Crane, Grinell
Braukmann,Crane, Morrison, Brass, McAvity,
Sarco
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 11
Table 3 - List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods & Services
continued
Item
Base Bid
Acceptable Alternatives
Automatic Air Vents
-
Amtrol, Sarco, S.A. Armstrong, Trerice
Backflow Preventers
-
Watts
Gauges, Thermometers
-
Weiss, Ashcroft, Trerice
Thermal Insulation
-
Manson, Knauf
Roof Drains & Vent Stack
Floor Drains, Cleanouts, Drain
Specialties
Stainless Steel Sinks
-
J.R. Smith, Zurn, Watts, Thaler
As specified
Kindred, Franke
Vitreous China Fixtures
As specified
American Standard, Kohler
Faucets
As Specified
American Standard, Moen, Delta
Flush Valves
As specified
Powers, Sloan
Tempering Valves
As specified
Powers, Leonard, Watts, Zurn
Pumps & Circulators (except
as noted)
Fire dampers & Smoke
Dampers
-
ITT, Taco, Peerless, S.A. Armstrong,
Worthington
Air Balance, Canadian Advanced Air, Controlled
Air, Ruskin, EH Price
Hot Water Unit Heaters &
Cabinet Heaters, Wallfin
Washroom Exhaust Fans
-
Engineered Air, Rosemex
-
Broan, Nutone
Air Intake/Relief Hoods
-
Greenheck, Cook
Air Terminal Devices
(Diffusers, Registers)
Air handling unit
McQuay
EH Price, Nailor, Titus (Philip Air), Krueger,
Metalaire
Trane, Carrier, Johnson Controls
-
Refer to specification 239994
Automatic Temperature
Control
END OF SECTION 15010
-
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 12
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
D.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and
profiles, and finishes.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of
substrate.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 75x125mm (3”x5’’) in size, in specified
finish, when requested.
Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with CAN/ULC S101, OBC
specified edition, that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for firetest-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed
and labeled by ULC or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source
from single manufacturer.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with
gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
5.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
6.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Finish: No. 2b.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
7.
8.
C.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges FAP:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineralfiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic
closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for
concealed flange installation in ceilings and exposed flange for drywall partitions
unless concealed flanges are requested by the Architect.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of construction assembly into which
the door is being inserted to a minimum of 2 hours.
Temperature-Rise Rating: 450OF (250OC) at the end of 30 minutes.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
7.
8.
9.
10.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.4
A.
Finish: No. 2b.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Hardware:
1.
2.
2.3
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 13
Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.
Lock: Mortise cylinder.
MATERIALS
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with coldrolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel
(CS), exposed.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove
tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
FABRICATION
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to
types of supports indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating
on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
E.
For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath
attached to door panel.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
1.
2.
F.
For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board or
gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide
zinc-coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter
of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood
framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of
applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 14
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromatefree, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for
topcoat.
Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 15
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Supply architectural style recessed frame and flange type access panels for locations
where mechanical equipment or any other device requiring maintenance or adjustment is
"built-in"; such as valves, junction boxes, relays, etc. Include cost of installation by
qualified tradesmen.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
Do not provide access panels in removable panel type ceilings. Indicate location of
equipment with acceptable markers.
Size and locate access panels in applied tile, or in glazed or unglazed structural tile to
suit block patterns.
ADJUSTING
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
SECTION 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
B.
Pipe loops and swing connections.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working
pressures, and temperatures.
Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between
anchors.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS
Alignment Guides:
1.
B.
Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section
outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider
for bolting to pipe.
Anchor Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for
use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including
tee in main.
Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings
including tee in riser.
Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings
including tee in main.
ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION
Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional
stress.
Install guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest
to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.
Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.
Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
Anchor Attachments:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with
ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding
and Brazing Qualifications."
Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use
MSS SP-69, Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor.
Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP69, Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.
Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply
with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
G.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 17
Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow
fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.
END OF SECTION 220516
SECTION 220517 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
Sleeves.
Stack-sleeve fittings.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
A.
SLEEVES
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductileiron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and
welded steel collar; zinc coated.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,
zinc coated, with plain ends.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round
tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
2.3
A.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling
annular space between piping and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 18
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for
imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with
center opening to match piping OD.
GROUT
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and
walls.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm)] annular clear space between piping and concrete
slabs and walls.
1.
C.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes except holes in mechanical service
space floors.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs
and walls are constructed.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
D.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.2
A.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeveseal system.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint
sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1.
Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 19
Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above
finished floor level.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping
ring if ring is specified.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations.
Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
service piping entries into building.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size
and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in
penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space
between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs
and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
2.
Piping: Cast-iron wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a.
Piping: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steelpipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
3.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
Piping: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steelpipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
4.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
Piping: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves, Stack-sleeve fittings
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 20
Interior Partitions:
a.
Piping: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
END OF SECTION 220517
SECTION 220518 – ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Escutcheons.
Floor plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
A.
B.
ESCUTCHEONS
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and finish and setscrew
fastener.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated
finish and spring-clip fasteners.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and finish and with concealed
hinge and setscrew.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and
spring-clip fasteners.
FLOOR PLATES
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated
piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stampedsteel type, chrome plated finish with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
C.
D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 21
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated finish
with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated finish
with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or splitcasting brass type, rough-brass finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
or split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated with concealed hinge or
split-plate, stamped-steel type, chrome plated with exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or splitplate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel
type, chrome plated with exposed-rivet hinge.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
2.
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
END OF SECTION 220518
SECTION 220523.12 – BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
DEFINITIONS
CWP: Cold working pressure.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve.
1.
1.4
A.
Certification that products comply with NSF 61.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Ball valves.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends.
Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
Maintain valve end protection.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 22
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in
watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.
Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves
made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
2.
H.
3.
A.
Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 200mm (8”) and larger.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 150mm (6”).
Valves in Insulated Piping:
1.
2.
2.2
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.
ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
criteria.
ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
Include 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions.
Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective
sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing
insulation.
Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
ISOLATION VALVES – EXPOSED WATER PIPING
65mm (2.5”) and smaller.
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo, Kitz
Description:
a.
2.3
A.
Ball type, Mss SP-72, SP110, Type II, Class 125, Style 1, three-piece or
double unioun end construction, full ported, full flow, with solder end
connections, 2750 kpa (400 psi) WOG, MSS-SP-67.
BALANCING VALVES - DHW RECIRCULATION
50mm (2”) diameter and less.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 23
Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo, Kitz.
Description:
a.
Combination type, calibrated, bronze with bronze disc, equipped with
readout valves with integral check valve, indexing position pointer and
calibrated name plate, internal EPT O ring seals and factory moulded
insulating enclosures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXAMINATION
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement
during shipping and handling.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
END OF SECTION 220523.12
SECTION 220523.14 – CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
Bronze lift check valves.
Bronze swing check valves.
DEFINITIONS
CWP: Cold working pressure.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve.
1.
Certification that products comply with NSF 61.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.4
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set check valves in either closed or open position.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 24
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in
watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.2
A.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.
ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
criteria.
ASME B16.18 for solder joint.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves
made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES
Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
Body Design: Vertical flow.
Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.
Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.
Disc: Bronze.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.3
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 25
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.
Disc: Bronze.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement
during shipping and handling.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1.
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2.
Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
ADJUSTING
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking
occurs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or
nonmetallic disc.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
b.
c.
B.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 26
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check
valves with lever and weight or spring; or iron, center-guided, metal-seat or
resilient-seat check valves.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage:
Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with
higher CWP ratings may be substituted.
End Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded or soldered.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged or
threaded.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged or threaded.
For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged.
For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Grooved.
END OF SECTION 220523.14
SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections
1.
1.2
A.
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe positioning systems.
Equipment supports.
Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
DEFINITIONS
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion
to support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
2.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 27
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factoryfabricated components.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated
steel.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862kPa) minimum compressive strength.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of
pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating
below ambient air temperature.
FASTENER SYSTEMS
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use
in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping
from the building structure.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on fieldfabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for
individual pipe hangers.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
C.
D.
2.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 28
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's
operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and
waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not
exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
4.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
B.
Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicateinsulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc
welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding
work; and with the following:
2.
3.
4.
A.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and
0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075
inch (1.91 mm) thick.
NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
1.
3.4
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
5.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 29
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
mm).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
PAINTING
Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal
framing systems and attachments for general service applications.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper
piping and tubing.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated
or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
K.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 30
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C)
piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
M.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 31
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
N.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 32
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger
with springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications
not specified in piping system Sections.
Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications
not specified in piping system Sections.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of
attachments where required in concrete construction.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to
supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
that are
that are
building
support
END OF SECTION 220529
SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
B.
Elastomeric isolation pads.
Elastomeric isolation mounts.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
Open-spring isolators.
Housed-spring isolators.
Restrained-spring isolators.
Housed-restrained-spring isolators.
Elastomeric hangers.
Spring hangers.
Snubbers.
Restraint channel bracings.
Restraint cables.
Seismic-restraint accessories.
Mechanical anchor bolts.
Adhesive anchor bolts.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and
Equipment" for devices for fire-suppression equipment and systems.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
C.
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for devices for HVAC
equipment and systems.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
b.
D.
2.
Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying
with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Contact Mr. Sean Cochrane at HTS Engineering (representing Kinetics
Noise Control), tel. (416) 661-3400 for information.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment
weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select seismic restraints and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
a.
3.
b.
c.
d.
B.
C.
D.
Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections
for equipment mounted outdoors.
Seismic Restraint Details:
a.
A.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance
with requirements.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.
1.
1.2
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 33
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of
seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear
loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths,
and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure
during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with windrestraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with
requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: Submit for review to an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components
with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic
restraints.
Welding certificates when requested.
Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and
damping test data
Field quality-control reports.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.3
A.
B.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 34
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the OBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis.
They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval,
showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to
ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by
a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - GENERAL
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Wind-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Basic Wind Speed: 28.4m/s (0.52kPa).
Building Classification Category: High - for Schools and Normal for Offices.
Minimum 48.8 kg/sqm (10 lb/sqft.) multiplied by maximum area of HVAC
component projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees
either side of normal.
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
3.
Site Class as Defined in the OBC: D.
Building Classification Category: High - for Schools and Normal for Offices.
Building Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
Component Factor: 1.0
Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0.
Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.
Peak Ground Acceleration: 0.150 for Toronto.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.24
(Toronto).
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.056 (Toronto).
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform
loading over pad area.
Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
6.
7.
Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.
a.
b.
2.3
A.
Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
Mounting Plates:
a.
b.
2.
A.
Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material.
Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and
opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and
attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
a.
b.
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.
Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other
elastomeric material.
OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
1.
2.6
Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and
threaded with threaded studs or bolts.
Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for
anchoring to support structure.
RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
1.
2.5
Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
1.
2.4
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 35
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric
isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500
psig (3447 kPa).
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping
Housing:
1.
2.
3.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.
a.
b.
2.7
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped
with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A.
Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
Top plate with threaded mounting holes
Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
1.
2.9
Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
Top housing with threaded mounting holes and internal leveling device.
RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
1.
2.8
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 36
Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and
level equipment.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
2.10
A.
Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in
Compression:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A.
Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor
bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
2.
3.
A.
2.13
A.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washerreinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
SNUBBERS
1.
2.12
Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and
an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular
lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to
steel contact.
SPRING HANGERS
1.
2.11
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 37
Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and studwedge or female-wedge type.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient
cushion.
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel
channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to
building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosionresistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
RESTRAINT CABLES
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized (or ASTM A 492 stainless where noted in
this document or on the drawings) -steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.14
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.15
A.
2.16
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 38
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching
hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for
rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to
type and size of attachment devices used.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinccoated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select
anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or
urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid
mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior
applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - GENERAL
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COORDINATION AND EXECUTION
Coordinate size, shape, reinforcement and attachment of all housekeeping pads supporting vibration/seismically rated equipment. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi or as specified by the project engineer. Coordinate size,
thickness, doweling, and reinforcing of concrete equipment housekeeping pads and
piers with vibration isolation and seismic restraint device manufacturer to ensure adequate space, embedment and prevent edge breakout failures. Pads and piers must be
adequately doweled in to structural slab.
Housekeeping Pads must be adequately reinforced and adequately sized for proper installation of equipment anchors. Refer seismic restraint manufacturer’s written instructions.
Coordinate with vibration/seismic restraint manufacturer and the structural engineer of
record to locate and size structural supports underneath vibration/seismically restrained
equipment. Installation of all seismic restraint materials specified in this section shall be
accomplished as per the manufacturer’s written instructions. Adjust isolators and re-
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
A.
straints after piping or wiring systems have been filled and equipment is at its operating
weight, following the manufacturer’s written instructions.
Isolated and restrained equipment, duct and piping located on roofs must be attached
to the structure. Supports (e.g., sleepers) that are not attached to the structure will not
be acceptable.
Attach piping to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer’s design. Install cables
so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structures.
Do not brace or support equipment to separate portions of the structure that may act
differently in response to an earthquake. For example, do not connect a Transverse restraint to a wall and then a Longitudinal restraint to either a floor/ceiling/roof at the
same braced location.
Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint
manufacturer’s design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply
equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to hanger rods.
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS APPLICATION
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 39
All equipment and piping shall be restrained to resist seismic forces per the applicable Building Code(s) as a minimum; listed herein. Additional requirements
specified herein are included specifically for this project; as needed basis.
Install seismic restraint devices per the manufacturer’s submittals. Any deviation
from the manufacturer’s instructions shall be reviewed and approved by the manufacturer.
Attachment to structure for suspended equipment and pipe: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper
truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
Provide hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or as required to prevent buckling
of rods due to seismic forces.
Where rigid restraints are used on equipment or piping, the support rods for the
equipment or piping at restraint locations must be supported by anchors rated for
seismic use. Post-installed concrete anchors must be in accordance with ACI
355.2.
Ensure housekeeping pads have adequate space to mount equipment and seismic restraint devices and shall also be large enough and thick enough to ensure
adequate edge distance and embedment depth for restraint anchor bolts to avoid
housekeeping pad breakout failure.
Concrete Anchor Bolts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre- or posttensioned tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Mechanical Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust per
manufactures instructions prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in
holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface
in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 40
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Piping Systems: Provide seismic control measures with spacing and anchorage engineered for the specific project.
1.
All piping is to be restrained to meet code requirements.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Restraint Spacing For Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
All piping associated with “Life Safety Systems” shall always have an importance factor of 1.5. Seismic restraint requirements / exemptions vary
with code and seismic acceleration – see specific code and comply with
applicable restraint requirements.
Seismically restrain / brace all pipes 65 mm (2 ½”) in nominal diameter and
larger.
Seismically restrain / brace all piping in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms
and refrigeration mechanical rooms 32 mm (1 ¼”) in nominal diameter and
larger.
Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines.
For ductile piping: Transverse supports a maximum of 12 m (40’) o.c.
For ductile piping: Longitudinal supports a maximum of 24 m (80’) o.c.
For non-ductile piping (e.g., cast iron, PVC) space Transverse supports a
maximum of 6 m (20’) o.c., and Longitudinal supports a maximum of 12 m
(40’) o.c. Differential spacing can be designed depending upon pipe size
and length(s) of run (design will be indicated on drawings of approved
method).
For piping with hazardous material inside (e.g., natural gas, medical gas)
space Transverse supports a maximum of 6 m (20’) o.c., and Longitudinal
supports a maximum of 12 m (40’) o.c.
For pipe risers, restrain the piping at floor penetrations using the same
spacing requirements as above.
Brace a change of direction longer than 3.7 m (12’).
This specification does not allow the use of the 300mm (12’’) rule where the piping may be exempted from seismic restraint based on the length of the support
rods provided that the rods are not subjected to bending moments.
Install restraint cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment
or building structure. Tie back to structure at 45 degrees to the structure.
Longitudinal restraints for single pipe supports shall be attached rigidly to the
pipe, not to the pipe hanger.
For supports with multiple pipes (trapezes), secure pipes to trapeze member with
clamps approved for application.
Install flexible metal hose loops in piping which crosses building seismic joints,
sized for the anticipated amount of movement.
Install flexible piping connectors where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with
connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from
the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment.
Where pipe sizes reduce below required dimensions noted above in Section
3.2.E, the final restraint shall be installed at the transition location.
Longitudinal restraints for single conduit supports shall be attached rigidly to the
pipe, not to the pipe/conduit hanger.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 41
For supports with multiple conduits (trapezes), secure conduit to trapeze member
with clamps approved for application.
Where conduits reduce below required dimensions noted above in Section 3.2.F,
the final restraint shall be installed at the transition location.
Rod Stiffener Clamps are required where the hanger rod exceeds the maximum
length shown in the seismic calculation sheets. They are only required at restraint
locations.
Seismically Rated Beam Clamps are required where welding to or penetrations to
steel beams are not approved.
Adjust restraint cables so that they are not visibly slack. Cable not to support
weight during normal operation.
Seismic systems are to be compatible with requirements for anchoring and guiding of systems.
Drilled or power driven anchors or fasteners shall not be permitted for use with
seismic control measures.
Friction due to gravity does not constitute a seismic attachment.
Seismic restraint connections are not to be connected to the bottom chord of
steel joists or the bottom flange of steel beams.
Standard beam clamps can be used to support restrained components; they cannot be used to connect the seismic restraint to the structure – only for the hanger
rods.
Brace remaining piping, ductwork, electrical components to code requirements
(OBC & NBCC or TI-809-04)) or in conformance with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.) “Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”, 2ND edition or 3RD edition depending on
Code or EOR.
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent
sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the
connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different
structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach
equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for
piping flexible connections.
INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer prior to installing any seismic restraint devices. The contractor shall seek
the representative’s guidance in any installation procedures with which he/she is unfamiliar.
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer mid-way through the listed project for an inspection all vibration and
seismic restraint devices already installed. A written report of any installation errors,
improperly selected devices, or other fault in the system which could affect the performance of the system shall be documented and the contractor shall perform all steps
that are required from this written report to properly complete the vibration and seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Upon completion of the installation, arrange for the design Engineer to visit the site to
verify the proper installation of all seismic restraint devices herein specified. A written
report citing any installation errors, improperly selected devices, or other fault in the
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
system which could affect the performance of the system should be generated by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall verify that isolators are adjusted, with spring’s perpendicular to bases or housing, adjustment bolts are tightened up on equipment mountings,
and hangers are not cocked. Upon completion of the Work, the Engineer shall provide
a sealed letter addressed to the local authorities having jurisdiction confirming that the
Seismic Design and Installation is in general conformance with the design documents
and the Ontario and National Building Codes.
The installing contractor shall take all steps required to properly complete the seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Perform the following tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 42
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
ADJUSTING
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
END OF SECTION 220548
SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
Pipe labels.
Valve tags.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
Valve numbering scheme.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
PIPE LABELS
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with
lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
backing.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1.
2.
2.2
A.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to
accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping At least 1/2 inch
(13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm) and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances].
VALVE TAGS
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1.
2.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 43
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having
predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.
Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag),
location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or
modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and
similar special uses.
1.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
PREPARATION
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible
ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as
shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.4
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 44
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes,
including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience
and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
END OF SECTION 220553
SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
C.
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete the
insulation work of the Piping Insulation in accordance with the specifications and/or
drawings.
Submit sample of insulating materials and a report from an approved testing
laboratory confirming fire hazard ratings if requested Pipe labels.
DEFINITIONS
1.
Exposed piping and exposed pipe insulation includes all piping and pipe insulation
installed in equipment rooms, service spaces and areas of building not provided
with suspension type acoustic tile, drywall or plaster ceilings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL
Thermal insulating materials shall be non-combustible. Adhesive shall be waterproof and
flame resistant. Combustible wrappings or vapour barriers used in conjunction with
thermal insulating materials shall be treated to reduce their combustibility so that flame
spread classification of entire assembly, as determined according to Method of Fire
Hazard Classification for Building Materials ASTM E-84-76a shall not exceed 25 and
smoke developed number shall not exceed 50.
Insulation thickness shall be as specified under the "Work Included Article" of this
Section.
1.
Pipework Insulation Types.
a.
Type ‘A’
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
.1
b.
Preformed type mineral insulation of minimum 104 kg/m3 density
with canvas or multi service jacket having longitudinal and traverse
laps.
Type ‘B’
.1
2.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 45
Preformed type mineral insulation of minimum 104 kg/m3 density
with factory applied vapour barrier jacket or glass fibre reinforced
kraft or aluminum foil laminate having a maximum vapour
transmission rate of .03 perms.
Insulation Covering
a.
Close weave fire retarding canvas of the following weights:
 Exposed pipe and equipment insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
 Exposed fitting, valve body, etc., insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
 Except for steam piping, factory premoulded PVC fitting covers and jacketing
approved by authorities having jurisdiction. For steam piping systems use
canvas covering.
3.
Insulation Accessories.
a.
b.
c.
(14 gauge) pins with 32mm (1.25") square plated type clips.
Fibrous glass twine to local authorities approval.
Unless noted wire used to secure insulation shall be minimum 16 gauge
galvanized annealed wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
EXECUTION
This work shall be performed only by tradesmen experienced in insulation work.
Install insulation material and adhesive in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Provide covering material which is to be finish painted by other Division, in condition to
receive the paint.
Surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry.
Do not apply insulation until leakage tests have been completed.
Install insulation in a neat workmanlike manner with smooth and even surfaces. Locate
longitudinal seams where least visible.
Keep insulation clear of all instruments, controls, dampers, components, etc., so that it
will not hinder or interfere with removal, setting, reading of, or access to same.
Install insulation continuous through walls, floors and similar surfaces.
Do not break continuity of insulation, vapour barrier and canvas finish by supports or
rods. Remove supports and rods temporarily to facilitate installation of insulation, vapour
barrier and canvas finish where required.
Install 100mm long, 20 gauge polished aluminum pipe insulation protectors at all points,
where exposed pipe insulation terminates at floor.
Unless noted otherwise, do not insulate the following items:
1.
2.
3.
Discharge from safety and relief valves, overflow and equipment drain pipes.
Closed type hot water heating and chilled water expansion tanks.
Exposed chrome plated piping.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
L.
Insulation Types:
1.
Pipework Insulation Type ‘A’
a.
b.
c.
2.
b.
Overlap vapour barrier jacket at least 50mm on longitudinal joints. Wrap butt
joints with a minimum 100mm wide band of vapour barrier jacket. Seal laps
and bands with pressure sensitive, vapour proof adhesive or vapour proof
mastic applied to the complete surface of the laps.
Insulate all fittings, screwed and flanged unions and valve bodies with
segments of preformed pipe insulation or by wrapping with strips of fibrous
glass blanket type insulation to the same thickness of the adjoining pipe
insulation. Insulation shall be held in place with wire or fibrous glass twine.
Coat the insulation with vapour proof mastic and wrap with glass fabric.
Embed the glass fabric in the mastic and seal the fabric with vapour proof
mastic. Finish insulation by applying a coat of vapour proof adhesive.
Alternatively factory premoulded one piece PVC fitting covers and jacketing
may be applied over insulation, in lieu of mastic and glass fabric. Install the
covers to provide a complete vapour seal. Insulate expansion joints and
flexible hose connectors to allow for movement and flexing of joints.
Insulation Covering:
1.
N.
Secure insulation with approved type staples and/or cement laps down with
adhesive.
Insulate fittings, flanged unions and valve bodies with segments of
preformed block or pipe insulation of by wrapping with strips of fibrous glass
blanket type insulation to the same thickness of the adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulation shall be held in place with wire of fibrous glass twine. Finish
insulation with a coat of cement recovered with canvas or factory
premoulded one piece PVC fitting covers and jacketing.
Do not insulate screwed unions and piping inside air handling unit casing.
Pipework Insulation Type ‘B’
a.
M.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 46
Unless noted cover exposed pipe and equipment insulation with canvas. PVC
jacketing may be used for piping in mechanical rooms. Adhere canvas to insulation
surfaces with full coating of lagging adhesive. Finish and seal canvas with a full
brush coat of lagging adhesive. Install canvas over any vapour barrier jacket or
coating specified.
Hangers and Insulation Shields
1.
Insulate and vapour seal hangers directly supporting insulated piping as part of
adjoining pipe for the following services:
a.
Domestic Cold Water and Rain Water Piping
.1
.2
.3
Insulate hanger rods to length of 4 times the pipe insulation
thickness.
Use curved metal insulation shields wherever pipe is supported by
hanger of type which cannot effectively be insulated to prevent
condensation, eg. roller hangers.
Insulation shields shall consist of segment high density insulation and
12 gauge galvanized sheet steel protective shield complete with
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 47
vapour barrier, designed to suit adjacent insulation thickness and pipe
weight.
O.
Hot Equipment
1.
2.
3.
Insulate hot equipment with fibrous glass metal mesh blanket. Hold metal mesh
blankets in place with 20mm metal bands on maximum 300mm centres. Lace
metal edges butting together with wire. On large flat or irregular surfaces, impale
metal mesh blankets over suitable welded fasteners on maximum 300mm centres.
Alternatively hot equipment may be insulated with calcium silicate insulation blocks
applied and secured as specified above.
Finish the insulation with two coats of asbestos free cement, 6mm thick troweled
smooth. Cover insulation with canvas.
Insulation thickness shall be as follows:



4.
5.
6.
Inspection and manholes on tanks and equipment.
Cold Equipment
1.
2.
3.
Q.
Insulation Thickness
25 mm
40 mm
50 mm
Insulation shall have maximum 'K' value of 0.068 W/M/oC at 150oC mean
temperature.
Hot equipment shall include all equipment as specified under the "Application
Article" of this Section.
Do not insulate the following:
a.
P.
Equipment Temperature
up to 95oC
96oC to 150oC
150oC and over
Insulate cold surfaces of equipment as specified for pipework insulation Type 'B'.
Cold equipment shall include all equipment as specified under the "Application
Article" of this Section.
Provide slip-on type insulated enclosures for flanges on strainers.
Application
1.
Domestic Cold Water Piping Systems:
a.
b.
2.
Sanitary Drain Piping
a.
b.
3.
Insulate with Type 'B' pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 25mm.
Insulate all concealed and exposed drain piping including fittings receiving
flow from water closets, urinals, etc. up to the main vertical drain stacks and
including the vertical portion of the stack fittings forming the first bend of
horizontal take-offs with Type ‘B’ pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 25mm.
Rainwater Piping Systems
a.
b.
Insulate all concealed and exposed piping including fittings with Type ‘B’
pipework insulation. Extend insulation on roof drains to cover the complete
drain body with Type ‘D’ pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 25mm.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Recirculating Piping Systems
a.
b.
5.
Insulate with Type 'A' pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 25 mm for pipe size 25mm or larger; 12mm for pipe size
20mm or smaller.
Hot Equipment
a.
Insulate as specified. Equipment includes the following:
.1
6.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 48
Equipment, pipes, etc., exposed to human contact having surface
temperatures exceeding 70oC.
Cold Equipment
a.
Insulate as specified. Equipment includes the following:
.1
Bodies of strainers, water meters, valve body, back-flow preventer
assemblies installed in piping systems and/or services to be
insulated with type ‘B’ pipework insulation.
END OF SECTION 220719
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings
inside buildings.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
water service.
Do not interrupt water service without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe
sizes.
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn
temper.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) water tube, annealed
temper.
Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure
fittings.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
Copper Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
2.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
A.
C.
2.5
A.
B.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
General Requirements:
Same size as pipes to be joined.
Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping
system fitting.
Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
2.
3.
C.
AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise
indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
MSS SP-123.
Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
Solder-joint or threaded ends.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
1.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 49
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180OF (82OC).
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180OF (82OC)
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
D.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 50
Non-conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
Dielectric Nipples:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225OF (107OC).
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.2
A.
B.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Install domestic water piping level with without pitch and plumb.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service
areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or
higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise
indicated.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine,
and specialty.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged.
Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of
tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1.
2.
C.
Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
b.
3.
4.
B.
C.
D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 51
100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8
inch (10 mm).
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
6.
E.
F.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service
and maintenance.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and
connect to the following:
2.
3.
A.
3.8
A.
NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.7
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 52
Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than that required by plumbing code.
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.
Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Piping Inspections:
a.
b.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been
inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day
before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence
of authorities having jurisdiction:
1)
2)
c.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before
concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure
compliance with requirements.
Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass
tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Piping Tests:
a.
b.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are
not air bound and that piping is full of water.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
c.
d.
e.
3.9
A.
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate
flow.
a.
b.
2.
3.
A.
segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
portion of piping tested.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping
uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose
work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system
materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
ADJUSTING
1.
3.10
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return
piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
Remove and clean strainer screens.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and
operation.
CLEANING
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended,
or repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either
AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
2)
c.
d.
3.11
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 53
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand
for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three
hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming
from system after the standing time.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may
be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise
indicated.
Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the
following:
1.
D.
A.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast or wrought-copper, solder-joint
fittings.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) , shall be
the following:
1.
3.12
Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
brazed joints.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller , shall be following:
1.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 54
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L, cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint
fittings; soldered joints.
VALVE SCHEDULE
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated,
the following requirements apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball,
or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
END OF SECTION 221116
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Vacuum breakers.
Backflow preventers.
Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.
Strainers.
Wall hydrants.
Drain valves.
Water-hammer arresters.
Air vents.
Trap-seal primer valves.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
10.
1.3
A.
B.
A.
Trap-seal primer systems.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.
1.
1.4
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 55
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa)
unless otherwise indicated.
VACUUM BREAKERS
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
A.
B.
Standard: ASSE 1011.
Body: Bronze, non-removable, with manual drain.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Standard of Acceptance: Zurn, Watts, Conbraco
Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Standard: ASSE 1013.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle third of flow range.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; steel with interior lining that
complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged type> for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet
and outlet.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type
with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies
1.
Standard: ASSE 1015.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Loss: [5 psig (35 kPa)] maximum, through middle third of flow range.
Size: See floor plans.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; steel with interior lining that
complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Configuration: To suit installation.
Accessories:
a.
b.
D.
6.
7.
8.
Standard: ASSE 1047 and is FM Global approved or UL listed.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle third of flow range.
Size: See plans..
Body: Cast iron or steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that
is FDA approved.
End Connections: Flanged.
Configuration: To suit installation.
Accessories:
a.
b.
Valves: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and
outlet.
Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Standard: ASSE 1048 and is FM Global approved or UL listed.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle third of flow range.
Size: See plans.
Body: Cast iron or steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that
is FDA approved.
End Connections: Flanged.
Configuration: To suit installation.
Accessories:
a.
b.
F.
ValvesNPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet
and outlet.
ValvesNPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type
with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
Reduced-Pressure-Detector, Fire-Protection, Backflow-Preventer Assemblies:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 56
Valves: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and
outlet.
Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reducedpressure backflow preventer.
Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:
1.
2.
3.
Standard: ASSE 1052.
Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
5.
2.5
A.
Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:
7.
8.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
A.
Standard: ASSE 1017.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Type: Exposed-mounted or Cabinet-type as shown on plans, thermostatically
controlled, water mixing valve.
Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
Connections: Threaded or union inlets and outlet.
Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water
supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle.
Tempered-Water Setting: As per Code.
Valve Finish: Chrome plated if exposed, Rough bronze if concealed.
Piping Finish: Chrome plated if exposed, Copper if concealed.
Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed or surface as shown on
plans mounting and with hinged, stainless-steel door.
Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6
Standard: ASSE 1017.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.
Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
Connections: Threaded or union inlets and outlet.
Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable,
temperature-control handle.
Tempered-Water Setting: As per Code.
Valve Finish: Chrome plated if exposed, Rough bronze if concealed.
Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.
TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES (NOTE: SPECIFIED UNDER
EACH PLUMBING FIXTURE TYPE)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 57
Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
Temperature Control: Adjustable.
Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.
Tempered-Water Setting: As per Code.
STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that
complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.7
A.
5.
Perforation Size:
a.
Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
b.
Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm).
c.
Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm).
6.
Drain: Hose-end drain valve.
WALL HYDRANTS
Nonfreeze Wall Hydrant - Drawing Symbol WH1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.8
A.
A.
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
A.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
Body: Copper alloy.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS
Water-Hammer Arresters:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
Operation: Loose key.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include
wall clamp.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25).
Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread
complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.
Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread
complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.
DRAIN VALVES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.9
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 58
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston.
Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
AIR VENTS
Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1.
2.
Body: Bronze.
Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating
at 140 deg F (60 deg C).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.11
A.
Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:
2.
3.
A.
Standard: ASSE 1018.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.
Body: Bronze.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:
1.
2.12
Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet.
Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap
makeup connection.
Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum.
Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
Trap-Seal Primer Systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard: ASSE 1044.
Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper,
water tubing.
Cabinet: Recessed or surface mounted as shown on plans steel box with
stainless-steel cover.
Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac
power.
a.
5.
6.
7.
2.13
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
Number Outlets: As required.
Size Outlets: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid
covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 59
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa).
End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plainend copper tube.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with
stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 60
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa).
End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems
and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.
Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
B.
C.
D.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on
inlet and outlet.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on
inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.2
A.
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with
air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at
least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap
device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are
unacceptable for this application.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water
pressure-reducing valve, and pump.
Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain
trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
Adjust valve for proper flow.
Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched
down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap,
or inlet fitting.
Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust
system for proper flow.
This Division to include cost for Division 16 to provide power to electric primer tanks.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment
nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Backflow preventers.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
Calibrated balancing valves.
Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
Primary water tempering valves.
Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
Trap-seal primer systems.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.3
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
2.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 61
Test each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer according to authorities
having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADJUSTING
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing
valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
SECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum
working pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1.
B.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
Specialty pipe fittings.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall
withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to OBC.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related
Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic
drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
sanitary waste service.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 62
Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Architect's
written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe
sizes.
HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
Solvent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and
deaerator drainage fittings.
CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1.
2.
D.
Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1.
2.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought
copper, solder-joint fittings.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type B and
Type C), water tube, drawn temper.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed
temper.
Copper Pressure Fittings:
2.
2.
2.4
A.
Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wroughtcopper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
1.
G.
Standard: ASTM C 1277.
Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel
bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
1.
F.
Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and
tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe
stop.
Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestosfree, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material
is indicated.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
2.5
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 63
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
2.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with
separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections
compatible with pipes to be joined.
Dielectric Unions:
a.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
3.
Dielectric Flanges:
a.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
4)
4.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82
deg C).
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82
deg C).
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;
threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Nipples:
a.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Standard: IAPMO PS 66
Electroplated steel nipple.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
EARTH MOVING
Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
PIPING INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using
appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep
1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from
horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two
fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight
tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow
more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of
different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is
prohibited.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true
to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends
of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written
instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
M.
N.
O.
P.
2.
R.
S.
Building Sanitary Drain: As per Code.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: As per COde
Vent Piping: As per Code, down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1.
Q.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 64
Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection
to sanitary sewer piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or
floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
2.
Install backwater valves in sanitary waste, gravity-flow piping where shown on
the drawings.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to
building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
T.
U.
V.
W.
3.3
A.
B.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
2.
D.
E.
2.
A.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use
ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.
Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and
thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.
Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1.
3.4
fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping.
Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary
Waste Piping Specialties."
Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Plumbing Piping."
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
1.
C.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
Transition Couplings:
1.
Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.
a.
b.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 65
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
2.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and
tubing.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
3.5
A.
B.
D.
General valve installation requirements are specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves
for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping,"
Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate
Valves for Plumbing Piping."
Shutoff Valves:
2.
3.
A.
Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
Install full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each
sewage pump discharge.
Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping where shown on the drawings.
1.
3.6
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric
flanges.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
VALVE INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
C.
Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless
otherwise indicated.
Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater
valve.
Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation
specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive
environments.
Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive
environments.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a.
b.
5.
6.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 66
100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting[, valve,]
and coupling.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
minimum rods.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
F.
G.
3.
4.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
2.
A.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by plumbing code.
Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with
cover flush with floor.
Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor.
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if
indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for
connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and
maintenance of equipment.
Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
3.8
NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
NPS 3 and NPS 5 (DN 80 and DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
D.
NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16mm) rod.
NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19mm) rod.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
H.
I.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 67
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and
at final connection to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.9
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
B.
C.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 68
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage
and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except
outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system
and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30
kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water
level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and
traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and
watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave
building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa).
Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this
pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air
throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and
water leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced forcemain piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test
pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.10
A.
B.
C.
3.11
A.
B.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise
indicated.
Aboveground, Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping NPS 21/2” (DN 65) and smaller
shall be any of the following unless noted on the drawings:
1.
Type DWV to:




C.
Service class, hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings to:



Minimum NPS 3.
CAN/CSA B70 – Latest edition.
Mechanical joints: Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets to ASTM
C564-70 (latest edition), stainless steel clamps.
Underground, Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping within Foundation Walls shall be
the following:
1.
Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints to:



E.
ASTM B30- latest addition for copper tube
ASME B16.23 – Latest edition for cast copper alloy joint drainage fittings –
DWV.
ANSI B16.29 – Latest edition for wrought copper fittings – DWV.
Solder: Lead-free copper alloy SXR9999.
Aboveground, Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping NPS 3” (DN 75) and larger shall
be any of the following:
1.
D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 69
CAN/CSA B181.2 – Latest edition for PVC DWV.
Joints: Solvent weld for PVC to ASTM D2564 – latest edition.
Conversion from cast iron/copper (above ground) to buried PVC shall be
downstream of where cast iron/copper drain penetrates concrete slab.
Underground, Sanitary Waste Piping outside of Foundation Walls shall be the
following:
1.
PVC pipe, DR28 STM-3034 with integral bell and spigot utilizing flexible
elastomeric seals. Where connecting to piping provided by the site services
contractor match material specified under site services contract.
END OF SECTION 221316
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 70
SECTION 22319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
B.
Backwater valves.
Cleanouts.
Floor drains.
Air-admittance valves.
Roof flashing assemblies.
Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
Flashing materials.
DEFINITIONS
HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
sanitary piping specialty components.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
BACKWATER VALVES
Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Standard: ASME A112.14.1.
Size: Same as connected piping.
Body: Cast iron.
Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
End Connections: hubless.
Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field
modified to hang to authorities approval. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class;
full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-installed cleanout at floor; replaces
backwater valve cover.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.2
A.
CLEANOUTS
Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
2.3
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 71
ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee cleanout as required to match
connected piping.
Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout
size.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cast-iron soil pipe with castiron ferrule threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.
Size: Same as connected branch.
Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
Outlet Connection: Spigot or Threaded.
Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze or Polished bronze.
Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy, Heavy, Light, Medium Duty as required
for application.
Riser: ASTM A 74, class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
Wall Access: Flat, stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
Drywall Wall Access: Square, stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover.
FLOOR DRAINS
Cast-Iron Floor Drains Drawing Symbols:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
Pattern: Area, (AD1); Floor, (FD1); Funnel floor, (FFD1) sanitary drain.
Body Material: Gray iron.
Seepage Flange: As required for application.
Anchor Flange: As required for application.
Clamping Device: As required for application.
Outlet: Bottom or Side.
Backwater Valve: Integral, ASME A112.14.1, swing-check type where shown on
the drawings.
Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.
Sediment Bucket: Where called for on the drawings.
Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze (FD1 and FD2).
Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
Top Shape: Round.
Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 12mm.
Top Loading Classification: Light Duty (FD1), Heavy Duty (FD2).
Funnel: 75mm x 225mm required for FFD1 (cast iron funnel strainer) and FFD2
(nickel bronze funnel strainer).
Inlet Fitting: As required for the application, trap-seal primer valve connection.
Trap Material: Cast iron.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
19.
2.4
A.
Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
Roof Flashing Assemblies:
1.
Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches
(150 mm) from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and
counterflashing fitting.
a.
2.5
A.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
4.
A.
Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
2.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms
sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel
pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch (25 mm) above finished
floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend
through floor slab.
Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
Stack Flashing Fittings:
1.
2.
E.
Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap
between installed inlet and outlet piping.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
Inlet: Opening in top of body.
Outlet: Larger than inlet.
Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated
indirect waste piping.
Sleeve Flashing Device:
1.
D.
Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trapseal primer valve connection.
Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
Air-Gap Fittings:
1.
C.
Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with
neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include
PVC protective cap for plug.
Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
1.
B.
Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 72
Description: Counter-flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
Vent Caps:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
F.
A.
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
C.
Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.
Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
End Connections: Matching connected piping.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
FLASHING MATERIALS
1.
2.
3.
B.
Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.
Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 73
General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).
Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and
0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90
(Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil
(1.01-mm) minimum thickness.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being
installed.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide
cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of
adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for
larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and
smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush
with finished floor.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains
flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area
radii:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
F.
G.
H.
I.
K.
L.
M.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but
not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain
and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where
penetrated.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend
through roof.
Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal
primer connection.
1.
2.
J.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 74
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for
easy access and maintenance.
CONNECTIONS
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
FLASHING INSTALLATION
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1.
2.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch
(2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded
in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
A.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 75
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10
inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around pipe.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200
mm) around sleeve.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches (200 mm) around specialty.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially
made flashing fittings.
Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
PROTECTION
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or
debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum
working pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
Specialty pipe fittings.
Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall
withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to OBC.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related
Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic
drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.4
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 76
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Interruption of Existing Storm-Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
storm-drainage service.
Do not proceed with interruption of storm-drainage service without Architect's
written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe
sizes.
HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1.
2.
C.
Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:
1.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast-copper fittings or ASME B16.29,
wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn
temper.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed
temper.
Copper Pressure Fittings:
2.
Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy fittings or ASME B16.22,
wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
1.
2.
G.
Standard: ASTM C 1277.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
1.
F.
Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.
Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and
tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe
stop.
Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestosfree, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material
is indicated.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
B.
C.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1.
D.
A.
Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1.
2.5
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 77
PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
Transition Couplings:
1.
B.
General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences
in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and
compatible with pipes to be joined.
2.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specifiedpiping-system fitting.
3.
Unshielded, Non-pressure Transition Couplings:
a.
Standard: ASTM C 1173.
b.
Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern.
Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
c.
Sleeve Materials:
1)
For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with
separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections
compatible with pipes to be joined.
2.
Dielectric Unions:
a.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
3.
Dielectric Flanges:
a.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
4)
C.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 180OF (82OC).
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;
threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 78
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a.
Description:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
Washers: Phenolic with steel-backing washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
EARTH MOVING
Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
PIPING INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination
drawings.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches,
bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.
Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are
connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install
true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub
ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written
instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
2.
L.
Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: As per Code downward in direction of flow.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
M.
N.
O.
Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
2.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
3.3
A.
B.
D.
E.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and
CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
2.
A.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure.
Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder.
Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and
thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.
Plastic, Non-pressure-Piping, Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining
surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1.
3.4
Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to
building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting
with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Plumbing Piping."
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
1.
C.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 79
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
Transition Couplings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.
In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, non-pressure transition couplings.
In Aboveground Force-Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.
In Underground Force-Main Piping:
a.
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
b.
B.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow where shown
on the drawings.
2.
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and
tubing.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric
flanges or flange kits.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
VALVE INSTALLATION
1.
3.6
Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless
otherwise indicated.
Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation
specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive
environments.
Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive
environments.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
b.
5.
6.
B.
C.
D.
E.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
3.5
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 80
100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, valve,
and coupling.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
minimum rods.
Install hangers for cast-iron storm piping with the following maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) rod.
NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16mm) rod.
NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19mm) rod.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
F.
G.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron storm piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
CONNECTIONS
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
1.
D.
F.
2.
A.
3.9
A.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and
at final connection to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
B.
Storm Sewer: As shown on the drawings.
Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and
maintenance of equipment.
Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
3.8
Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor where
shown on the drawings.
Connect force-main piping to the following:
1.
2.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 81
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,
in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm
drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on
completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to
point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
3.11
A.
B.
minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must
not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained.
CLEANING
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise
indicated.
Aboveground, Storm Drainage Piping NPS 3” (DN 75) and larger shall be of the
following:
1.
Service class, hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings to:



C.
Minimum NPS 3.
CAN/CSA B70 – Latest edition.
Mechanical joints: Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets to ASTM
C564-70 (latest edition), stainless steel clamps.
Underground, Storm Drainage Piping within Foundation Walls shall be the
following:
1.
Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints to:



D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 82
CAN/CSA B181.2 – Latest edition for PVC DWV.
Joints: Solvent weld for PVC to ASTM D2564 – latest edition.
Conversion from cast iron/copper (above ground) to buried PVC shall be
downstream of where cast iron/copper drain penetrates concrete slab.
Underground, Storm Drainage Piping outside of Foundation Walls shall be the
following:
1.
PVC pipe, DR28 STM-3034 with integral bell and spigot utilizing flexible
elastomeric seals. Where connecting to piping provided by the site services
contractor match material specified under site services contract.
END OF SECTION 221413
SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Roof drains.
Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
Cleanouts.
Backwater valves.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 83
Flashing materials.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL ROOF DRAINS
Cast-Iron, General-Purpose Roof Drains (Conventional Roof): (Drawing Symbol RD1)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.2
Standard of Acceptance: Thaler RD Series (No Substitutions)
Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.
Body Material: Duco Cast iron.
Dimension of Body: Minimum 12-inch (300-mm) diameter.
Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop.
Flow-Control Weirs: Required for controlled flow type (Drawing Symbol RD2).
Sediment collar; Outlet: Bottom, MJ connection.
Adjustable extension sleeve, reversible collar. Underdeck Clamp: Cast
aluminum.
Dome: Vandal proof, cast aluminum dome with hinged access lid.
Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel.
CLEANOUTS
A. Stack Cleanouts in base of cast iron stacks shall be cast iron body with gasketed
screwed cover.
B. Line cleanouts in cast iron pipe shall be with gasketed cover screwed to body. Line
cleanouts in copper pipes shall be cast bronze tube with wedge type gasket and
bronze plug secured to body by bronze cap screws.
C. Floor cleanouts in unfinished and outside areas shall be with gasket bonded to plug,
and scoriated cast iron cover secured with stainless steel screws and adjustable top.
D. Floor cleanouts in tiled, finished concrete, terrazzo and carpeted areas shall be with
gasket bonded to plug with nickel bronze cover and appropriate recess for the
application.
2.3
A.
BACKWATER VALVES
Cast-Iron, Horizontal Backwater Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Standard: ASME A112.14.1, for backwater valves.
Size: Same as connected piping.
Body Material: Cast iron.
Cover: Cast iron with bolted access check valve.
End Connections: hubless.
Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field
modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition.
Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron soil-pipe extension to
field-installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 84
FLASHING MATERIALS
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M,12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).
Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil
(1.01-mm) minimum thickness.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being
installed.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following instructions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.2
A.
Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use
NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping or as required by
Code.
Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush
with finished floor.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor.
Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains
flush with finished surface unless otherwise indicated.
Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
FLASHING INSTALLATION
Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other
drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1.
2.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m) lead sheets, 0.0938-inch
(2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m) lead
sheets, 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded
in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 85
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10
inches (250 mm) and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around pipe.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200
mm) around sleeve.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches (200 mm) around specialty.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
PROTECTION
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or
debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
END OF SECTION 221423
SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Water closets.
Flushometer valves.
Toilet seats.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for water closets.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to
include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS (Drawing Symbol W1, barrier free design W1H).
1.
2.
Closet: Toto CT708E, 17.5’’ high, vitreous china, wall hung, 6Lpf, high efficiency,
powerful direct-fed siphon jet closet bowl with elongated rim, and 40mm (1 1/2")
top spud.
Seat (for W1): Toto #SC534 elongated heavy duty solid white plastic open front
toilet seat less cover with check hinges and stainless steel posts, washers and
nuts. Seat for W1H: Toto #SC134 elongated heavy duty solid white plastic open
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 86
front toilet seat with cover with check hinges and stainless steel posts, washers
and nuts.
Flush Valve: "Sloan” Royal model 111-YO quiet, 6Lpf, exposed, diaphragm type,
chrome plate closet flush valve complete with following features: van dal
Resistant stop cap, adjustable tailpiece, 25mm (1") I.P.S screwdriver Bak-Chek
angle stop, spud coupling and spud flange for 49mm top spud, seat solder
adapter with cover tube and cast wall flange, high copper, low zinc brass casting
for dezincification resistance , non-hold-open handle and no external volume
adjustment to ensure water conservation, handle packing, stop seat and vacuum
breaker molded form PERMEXTM rubber compound for chloramine resistance.
Carrier: To suit the application
Mount height to suit barrier free or regular application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Water-Closet Installation:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Support Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water
closet.
Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle
mounted on open side of water closet.
Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:
1.
2.
F.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water
closets.
Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.
Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor
substrate, onto waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.
Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting
assembly and waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.
Flushometer-Valve Installation:
1.
D.
E.
Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting
attachments to piping or building substrate.
Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for
handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed,
finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.
Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Joint Sealing:
1.
Match sealant color to water-closet color.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 87
Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, onepart, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.
ADJUSTING
Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials.
END OF SECTION 224213.13
SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Lavatories.
2.
Faucets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic
faucets.
1.3
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation
and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES
Lavatory: Vitreous china, wall mounted (Drawing Symbol L1, barrier free design
L1H).
1. Lavatory: American Standard, Murro wall-hung lavatory, 0958.000, (203mm)
centres, 21.25" x 22" (559 x 540mm) vitreous china basin, rear overflow, faucet
ledge, barrier-free complete with 0059.020 semi-china pedestal to cover exposed
piping.
2. Carrier: Jay R Smith 0700-Z-M to suit concealed arms support application.
3. Faucet: American Standard faucet, Monterrey, 6530.170.002, C.P. 8’’ (203mm)
C.C., cast brass lead-free body, washerless, ¼ turn ceramic drip-free disc valve
brass cartridges, 10-5/8’’(270mm) high x 5’’ (127mm) reach rigid gooseneck spout
with tamper-resistant 5.7LPM (1.5 gpm) flow aerator outlet and V.R. red and blue
indexed cast brass 4’’ (102mm) blade handles.
4. Mixing valve: Powers model Hydroguard E480 on hot water supply
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 88
5. Waste: McGuire 155A Basin drain, chrome plated cast brass, one piece open grid
strainer with 17ga. With 32mm tailpiece.
6. Supply: McGuire H165LKN3RB chrome plated rigid brass horizontal supplies with
angle stops and stainless steel braided flexible risers.
7. Trap: McGuire 8872C, 40 mm cast brass chrome plated offset adjustable ‘P’ trap
with cleanout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
INSTALLATION
Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.
Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for
people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping."
Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with
sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible lavatories.
CONNECTIONS
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and
vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
ADJUSTING
Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
END OF SECTION 224216.13
SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stainless Steel Single Bowl, Drop-in Sink.
Stainless Steel Single Bowl, Drop-in Sink (Barrier free).
Sink faucets.
Supply fittings.
Waste fittings.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 89
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics and furnished specialties and
accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For sinks in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
STAINLESS STEEL SINKS
Stainless Steel Single Bowl, Drop-in Sink (Drawing Symbol S1, for Teacher)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Sink: Kindred model LBS6808, 20cm deep, single compartment self rimming dropin sink with faucet ledge, 20 gauge type 302 18-8 stainless steel, undercoated,
waste fitting, factory applied rim seal, cutout template, and universal installation
system hardware. Centre back waste location, includes 89mm crumb cup strainer
with 38mm brass tail piece. Cut hole to suit faucet installation, refer to architectural
drawing for exact location (side mount or back mount faucet).
Faucet: American Standard, Heritage model 6830.372H.002, 5’’ (127mm) reach
swing gooseneck spout with 5.7LPM(1.5GPM) flow pressure compensating aerator
outlet and red and blue indexed cast brass 4’’ (102mm) blade handles, vandal
resistant, 8’’ (203mm) centres, durable cast brass lead-free construction, ¼ turn
washerless ceramic disc valve cartridges, all operating parts must be replaceable
from above the deck, threaded male inlet shank.
Mixing valve: Powers model Hydroguard E480 on hot water supply.
Supply: McGuire H165N5 rigid polished brass horizontal supplies with wheel
handle angle stops and flexible copper risers.
Trap: McGuire 8912CB 40 mm polished cast brass ‘P’ trap with cleanout.
Stainless Steel Single Bowl, Drop-in Sink (Drawing Symbol S2, for Children)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sink: Kindred model LBS6808, 20cm deep, single compartment self rimming dropin sink with faucet ledge, 20 gauge type 302 18-8 stainless steel, undercoated,
waste fitting, factory applied rim seal, cutout template, and universal installation
system hardware. Centre back waste location, includes 89mm crumb cup strainer
with 38mm brass tail piece. Cut hole to suit faucet installation, refer to architectural
drawing for exact location (side mount or back mount faucet).
Faucet: American Standard, Heritage model 6830.372H.002, 5’’ (127mm) reach
rigid gooseneck spout with 5.7LPM(1.5GPM) flow pressure compensating aerator
outlet and red and blue indexed cast brass 4’’ (102mm) blade handles, vandal
resistant, 8’’ (203mm) centres, durable cast brass lead-free construction, ¼ turn
washerless ceramic disc valve cartridges, all operating parts must be replaceable
from above the deck, threaded male inlet shank.
Mixing valve: Powers model Hydroguard E480 on hot water supply.
Supply: McGuire H165N5 rigid polished brass horizontal supplies with wheel
handle angle stops and flexible copper risers.
Trap: McGuire 8912CB 40 mm polished cast brass ‘P’ trap with cleanout
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 90
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXAMINATION
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.
Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.
Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height
according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.
1.
2.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with sink.
Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for
Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping."
Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with
sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing
Piping Insulation."
CONNECTIONS
Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and
vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water
Piping."
Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary
Waste and Vent Piping."
ADJUSTING
Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks,
fittings, and controls.
Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 91
Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 224216.16
SECTION 224216.17 – DRINKING FOUNTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Stainless Steel Drinking Fountain.
Stainless Steel Drinking Fountain (Barrier free).
Supply fittings.
Waste fittings.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics and furnished specialties and
accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For drinking fountain in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
STAINLESS STEEL DRINKING FOUNTAINS
Stainless Steel Single Bowl, Barrier-free Drinking Fountain (Drawing Symbol DF)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Standard of Acceptance: Haws.
Drinking Fountain: Haws #1109 wall hung fountain with #6700 concealed
mounting plate, lead-free, stainless steel, 18 gauge (1.2mm) with #4 satin finish,
round front, 18’’ (457mm) receptor, forged brass bubbler head, self-closing push
button, automatic volume regulator, 250 micron (60 mesh) in-line filter, vandal
resistant open grid strainer, tailpiece.
Carrier: Jay R Smith fountain carrier, with steel pipe legs, block base feed
support and plate (space required 102mm finished wall to back of pipe space).
Supply: McGuire #HST11BV polished brass straight ¼ turn all brass ball valve
stop with VP loose key handle.
Trap: McGuire #8872C-17T, 32 mm, CP, 17 gauge (1.5mm) brass adjustable
body, and escutcheon.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.
Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
INSTALLATION
Install drinking fountains level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung drinking fountains.
Install accessible wall-mounted drinking fountains at handicapped mounting height
according to ADA.
Install water-supply piping with ball valve on supply to each drinking fountain.
1.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
B.
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 92
Install valve in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
Seal joints between drinking fountain and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant
requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
CONNECTIONS
Connect drinking fountains with water supply, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,
waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water
Piping."
Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary
Waste and Vent Piping."
ADJUSTING
Operate and adjust drinking fountains and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning drinking fountains, fittings, and controls.
Adjust water pressure at supply to produce proper flow.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
After completing installation of drinking fourntain, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
Clean drinking fountains and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
END OF SECTION 224216.16
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
WORK SUMMARY
Excavating and backfilling as required for mechanical services under building within
foundation walls.
Concrete backfill and pipe supporting pads as specified
WORK SUMMARY
Excavation outside of building, paving, sodding.
1.
Excavating and backfilling by Division 2, Site Work except for work provided by the
Mechanical Division as specified under 1.1 and 1.2 above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
Not applicable.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 22 Plumbing Specifications
Page 93
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Carry out trench excavation in strict conformity with the Construction Safety Act. Keep
excavation dry at all times.
Excavate and prepare for underground services, so that no portion of any pipe bears
directly against rock or hard surface.
Grade and shape bottoms of excavations for pipes, as required, to fit the lower one-third
segment of pipes and sockets.
Keep sides and bottoms of excavation from freezing and protect as required to prevent
damage to any part of the work by weather or other conditions.
Execute excavating, pipe laying, testing and backfilling in limited length to enable
protective and heating measures to function efficiently.
Break up rocks and boulders removed from excavation as required, to permit handling.
Remove rock encountered by drilling and wedging. Blasting will not be permitted unless
prior written instructions are obtained.
Form bottoms of trenches in earth inside building so that pipes are supported on a solid
bed of undisturbed earth. Lay pipe to relieve hubs or conduits of undue strain. Backfill
excavation required in proximity to and below footing levels with 10 MPa concrete to the
level of the top of adjacent footing. Support piping inside building installed in unstable or
filled ground as defined by jurisdictional authorities on a reinforced 17.5 MPa concrete
pad or piers. Shape concrete support to provide a minimum bearing for the lower
one-third of circumference of pipe.
Support outside piping passing through building foundation walls with reinforced 17.5
MPa concrete pads. Key concrete pads into the outside wall and extend in length
sufficiently to obtain a minimum bearing of .6m on undisturbed ground. Extend and wire
the reinforcing steel of the support pads to the reinforcing steel of the outside walls, to
prevent failure at the junction of the two elements.
Replace excavation carried to greater depth than shown or authorized through
negligence or error, with well compacted acceptable sand fill or concrete, at no change to
Contract Price to give a bearing value equal to that of adjacent soil.
Do not commence backfilling until written instruction to do so have been obtained.
Backfill carefully to avoid injury to work and undue subsequent settlement.
Backfill pipe trenches under building floors with sand placed in 150mm layers compacted
to 98% standard Proctor. Manually compact fill up to 450mm above pipes.
Include for cutting and making good of concrete floors inside building to accommodate
new services. Final floor finish to be provided by General Trades where noted on the
Architectural drawings.
Store materials excavated in locations as instructed and in such a manner as to produce
a minimum of damage or disfigurement of existing ground. Remove and dispose of
excess excavated materials. Leave site clear and unencumbered.
END OF SECTION 312000
End of Division 22
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 1
INDEX FOR DIVISION 23
Section
Title
Page
230000
230001
083113
230513
230516
230517
230518
230519
230523.12
230523.14
230529
230548
230553
230593
230713
230719
232113
232116
232123
232513
233113
233300
233713
233723
237313
238236
238239.13
239993.11
239994
Index
General Conditions
Access Door and Frames
Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping
Escutcheons for HVAC Piping
Meters and Gauges for HVAC
Ball Valves for HVAC Piping
Check Valves for HVAC Piping
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & Eqpt
Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
Duct Insulation
HVAC Piping Insulation
Hydronic Piping
Hydronic Piping Specialties
Hydronic Pumps
Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems
Metal Ducts
Air Duct Accessories
Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
HVAC Gravity Ventilators, Louvres & Curbs
Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
Finned-Tube Radiation Heaters
Cabinet Unit Heaters
Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC
Building Automation System
END OF INDEX
March 3, 2014
ESI# 865
1
2
2
6
7
9
12
14
16
18
21
28
40
43
54
57
61
66
70
72
74
82
87
90
93
96
98
99
51 pages
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 2
SECTION 230001 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
General
1.1
1.2
Comply with the drawings, all specification sections including Division 00, 01, 02, 21, 22,
23 and 26, and all documents referred to therein.
The Mechanical work is divided into Divisions and Subsections as follows:



1.3
1.4
Division 22 – Plumbing Systems, and
Division 21 – Fire Suppression
Division 23 – HVAC Systems.
Subsections are in order, but may not be numbered consecutively. Refer to the Index at
each Division and page numbers.
Refer specifically to Division 22, Section 220001 for General Conditions applying to this
Division.
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
2.
Floor access doors and frames.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
D.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and
profiles, and finishes.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of
substrate.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 75x125mm (3x5’’) in size, in specified
finish, when requested.
Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with CAN/ULC S101, OBC
specified edition, that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for firetest-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed
and labeled by ULC or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source
from single manufacturer.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with
gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineralfiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic
closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for
concealed flange installation in ceilings and exposed flange for drywall partitions
unless concealed flanges are requested by the Architect.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of construction assembly into which
the door is being inserted to a minimum of 2 hours.
Temperature-Rise Rating: 450OF (250OC) at the end of 30 minutes.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Finish: No. 2b.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Hardware:
1.
2.
A.
B.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
2.3
Finish: No. 2b.
Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges FAP:
1.
D.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 3
Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.
Lock: Mortise cylinder.
MATERIALS
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with coldrolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel
(CS), exposed.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove
tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
FABRICATION
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to
types of supports indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.5
A.
B.
For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath
attached to door panel.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
1.
2.
F.
For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board or
gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide
zinc-coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter
of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood
framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of
applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1.
E.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 4
For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating
on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
E.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 5
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromatefree, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for
topcoat.
Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Supply architectural style recessed frame and flange type access panels for locations
where mechanical equipment or any other device requiring maintenance or adjustment is
"built-in"; such as valves, junction boxes, relays, etc. Include cost of installation by
qualified tradesmen.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
Do not provide access panels in removable panel type ceilings. Indicate location of
equipment with acceptable markers.
Size and locate access panels in applied tile, or in glazed or unglazed structural tile to
suit block patterns.
ADJUSTING
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 6
SECTION 230513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, generalpurpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac
power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or
shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
CSA Listed and marked for intended location and application.
Efficiency: Energy efficient in Compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2010.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40OC and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate
connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
POLYPHASE MOTORS
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
Service Factor: 1.15.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
Insulation: Class F with Class B temperature rise unless noted.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
2.
I.
Motors 15HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
Motors Smaller than 15HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for
motor frame sizes smaller than 324T .
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
B.
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring
connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in
motor terminal box, suited to control method.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
A.
D.
E.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish,
designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time
rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F
insulation.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
Thermal Protection: Comply with OESC, CSA and NEMA MG 1 requirements for
thermally protected motors.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
Motors larger than 1/20hp and smaller than 1/2hp shall be suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
B.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 7
Capacitor start, inductor run.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to
motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating
of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Not Applicable.
END OF SECTION 230513
SECTION 230516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
1.2
A.
B.
Section Includes:
1.
Expansion compensators-slip type.
2.
Expansion compensators- bellows type.
3.
Pipe loops and swing connections.
4.
Alignment guides and anchors.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working
pressures, and temperatures.
Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between
anchors.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.3
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 8
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion Compensator-Slip Type:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Expansion Compensator-Bellows Type:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
For axial lateral or angular movements with stainless steel bellows, guides
control rings and travel stops.
Standard of Acceptance: Flexonics, Garlock, Badger, Tube Turn.
ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS
Alignment Guides:
1.
B.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
For axial pipe movement: complete with packing chamber, limit stops, lubrication
fittings or lubricant impregnated packing rings. Packing material: as
recommended by the manufacturer with adjustable packing gland. Slip pipe: hard
chrome plated to ASTM A53-82, carbon steel.
Standard of Acceptance: Rockwell, Tube Turns, Flexonics
Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section
outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider
for bolting to pipe.
Anchor Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for
use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
a.
b.
c.
5.
Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
a.
b.
c.
Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component
epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where
fastener is to be installed.
Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on
stud unless otherwise indicated.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION
Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.
Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc."
PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including
tee in main.
Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings
including tee in riser.
Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings
including tee in main.
ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION
Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional
stress.
Install two guides on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides
nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.
Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.
Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
Anchor Attachments:
1.
2.
F.
Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply
with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
2.
G.
Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9
and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications."
Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP69, Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.
Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.
Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow
fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.
END OF SECTION 230516
SECTION 230517 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Sleeves.
Stack-sleeve fittings.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 10
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
A.
SLEEVES
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductileiron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and
welded steel collar; zinc coated.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,
zinc coated, with plain ends.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round
tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
2.3
A.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling
annular space between piping and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for
imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with
center opening to match piping OD.
GROUT
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and
walls.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete
slabs and walls.
1.
C.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs
and walls are constructed.
1.
2.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or PP sleeves.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
3.
D.
3.
3.2
A.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeveseal system.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
2.
E.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 11
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint
sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.
Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above
finished floor level.
4.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping
ring if ring is specified.
5.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations.
Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
service piping entries into building.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size
and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in
penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 12
between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs
and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
b.
2.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeveseal system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
b.
Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
3.
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
5.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
4.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
Interior Partitions:
a.
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
END OF SECTION 230517
SECTION 230518 – ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 13
Escutcheons.
Floor plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
A.
B.
ESCUTCHEONS
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew
fastener.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated
finish and spring-clip fasteners.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed
hinge and setscrew.
FLOOR PLATES
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stampedsteel type with concealed hinge].
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge
with chrome plated finish
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass or split-casting brass] type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type[ or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge
with chrome plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces and equipment rooms: Onepiece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with rough-brass finish.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
i.
2.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
A.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chromeplated finish.
Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Splitcasting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
2.
3.2
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate,
stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.
Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
a.
C.
D.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 14
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 230518
SECTION 230519 – METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
Thermometers.
Thermowells.
Dial-type pressure gages.
Test plugs.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
THERMOMETERS
Industrial, 228 mm adjustable angle cast aluminum case, CGSB standard CAN/CGSB14.4-M88 red reading mercury, lens front tube, white scale black embossed figures,
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 15
clear glass or acrylic window, tapered aluminum stem. Scale suitable for 2 times the
temperature range of service. Scale shall be combined Celsius and Fahrenheit.
1.
2.2
A.
Standard of Acceptance: Weiss, Ashcroft, Trerice.
THERMOWELLS
Thermowells:
1.
2.
B.
2.3
A.
Standard: ASME B40.200.
Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee
fitting.
3.
Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
4.
Material for Use with Steel Piping: CSA.
5.
Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
6.
External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,)
ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
7.
Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1
screw threads.
8.
Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9.
Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
PRESSURE GAGES
115 mm dial, solid front blow out back, fiberglass reinforced polypropylene case,
phosphor bronze bourdon tube and brass 1/4” N.P.T. socket, bottom connection,
stainless steel rotary type movement, gauge to be registered with the Provincial Boiler
and Pressure Safety Branch with a registration number and conform to ANSI B40.1.
Accuracy to be grade “A”. On pumps liquid filled gauges shall be used. Gauges shall
have combined kilopascal and psi scales.
1.
2.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Standard of Acceptance: Weiss, Ashcroft, Trerice
Provide bronze stop cock, bronze bar stock 1/4“ N.P.T. bronze porous core
pressure snubber for pulsating operation and diaphragm for corrosive services.
TEST PLUGS
Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap.
Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
Thread Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 200 psig at 200OF (1380 kPa at 93OC).
Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of one-third of pipe diameter and
in vertical position in piping tees.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include
bushings if required to match sizes.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted
positions.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on
pipe at the most readable position.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
Provide valved gauge connections on the discharge and suction side of all pumps and
all other locations shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications. Terminate
connections with 1/8” diameter female threads.
Provide gauges with suitably sized dampening devices. Install gauges on steam
services with steel syphon.
Locate engraved lamacoid nameplate, identifying medium adjacent to thermometers
and gauges.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 16
Building water service entrance into building.
Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.
Where shown on the drawings.
CONNECTIONS
Install gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of
meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
ADJUSTING
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 230519
SECTION 230523.1- BALL AND BALANCING VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
Ball valves.
Balancing Valves.
DEFINITIONS
CWP: Cold working pressure.
SWP: Steam working pressure.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.
Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 17
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in
watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves
made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
H.
3.
2.2
A.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than [NPS 2.5” (DN 100)].
Valves in Insulated Piping:
1.
2.
I.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.
ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
Include 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions.
Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective
sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or
disturbing insulation.
Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
BALL VALVES
Ball Valves 21/2” and smaller, screwed of soldered:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Apollo
Description:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Rated for 600 WOG, bronze body, bronze ball, with Teflon seal. Ball valves
shall have 111 port opening.
With lockable handle where specified.
Soldered ends acceptable only for 3/4” valves installed in copper piping.
Balancing Valves:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Bell and Gosset, Armstrong
Description:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
b.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 18
Globe style, of nonferrous copper alloy or bronze construction, capable of
positive shut-off, circuit drain connection with lockable memory and precise
full measurement.
Valves installed on cold (chilled water) services shall be provided with
factory supplied preformed, removable PVC insulation jacket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
A.
B.
EXAMINATION
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types
of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
Select valves with the following end connections:
1.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where
solder-joint valve-end option is specified.
2.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends or
threaded valve-end.
3.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.
4.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends or
threaded ends.
END OF SECTION 230523.12
SECTION 230523.14 – CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
Swing check valves 65mm diameter and smaller.
Swing check valves 75mm diameter and larger.
Silent check valves, 65 diameter and smaller, screwed.
Silent check valves, 75mm diameter and larger, flanged.
DEFINITIONS
CWP: Cold working pressure.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
SWP: Steam working pressure.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of valve.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Block check valves in either closed or open position.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 19
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.
If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use hand wheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
A.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.
ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
criteria.
ASME B16.18 for solder joint.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves
made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
CHECK VALVES
Swing check valves 65mm (2.5”) and smaller, screwed:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz
Description:
a.
B.
To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kpa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw
in cap, regrindable seat.
Swing check valves 75mm (3”) and larger, flanged:
1.
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
Description:
a.
C.
To MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kpa, cast iron body, bronze disc, bolted
cap, regrind renewable seat.
Silent check valves, 65mm (2.5”) diameter and smaller, screwed:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Kitz, Nibco.
Description
a.
D.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 20
To ASTM B62-82a, Class 125, 860 kpa, cast steel, wafer style, brass seat
rings, brass inner valve, stainless steel spring (heavy duty spring in vertical
down flow application)
Silent check valves, 3” diameter and larger, flanged:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Kitz, Nibco.
Description
a.
Class 125, 860 kpa, iron body, fluid to 200OF, bronze or stainless steel
disc, renewable seats and disc, stainless steel spring actuated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement
during shipping and handling.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
VALVE INSTALLATION
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1.
2.
D.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
Install valve tags. Comply with requirements for valve tags and schedules in
Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
ADJUSTING
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking
occurs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
B.
3.5
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 21
Silent check valves.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types
of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
Swing check valves
END OF SECTION 230523.14
SECTION 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
2.
3.
A.
B.
Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides
and anchors.
Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for vibration isolation
devices.
DEFINITIONS
1.
1.4
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe stands.
Equipment supports.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and
obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 22
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Equipment supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly
made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods,
nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
1.
2.3
A.
Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Steel.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
1.
2.4
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion
to support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel
channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple
parallel pipes.
Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.
Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into
channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Coating: Zinc.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862kPa) minimum compressive strength.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of
pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating
below ambient air temperature.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.5
A.
B.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 23
FASTENER SYSTEMS
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use
in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural
carbon-steel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping
from the building structure.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on fieldfabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
2.
C.
D.
E.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
F.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for
individual pipe hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's
operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Pipe Stand Installation:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 24
Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount
on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand
and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not
exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
6.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
5.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicateinsulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc
welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding
work; and with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
mm).
PAINTING
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 25
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal
framing systems and attachments for general service applications.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and attachments for copper piping and tubing.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
G.
H.
I.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
J.
2.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated
or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24
(DN 50 to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2
to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation
might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
K.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 26
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450OF (49 to 232OC) piping
installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
Steel Weld-less Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450OF (49 to 232OC) piping
installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
M.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
N.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 27
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger
with springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
O.
P.
Q.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 28
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in
concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 230529
SECTION 230548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING &
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
C.
Elastomeric isolation pads.
Elastomeric isolation mounts.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
Open-spring isolators.
Housed-spring isolators.
Restrained-spring isolators.
Housed-restrained-spring isolators.
Resilient pipe guides.
Air-spring isolators.
Restrained-air-spring isolators.
Elastomeric hangers.
Spring hangers.
Snubbers.
Restraint channel bracings.
Restraint cables.
Seismic-restraint accessories.
Mechanical anchor bolts.
Adhesive anchor bolts.
Vibration isolation equipment bases.
Restrained isolation roof-curb rails.
Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression" for
devices for fire-suppression equipment and systems.
Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing" for devices for
plumbing equipment and systems.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
b.
D.
2.
Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying
with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Contact Mr. Sean Cochrane at HTS Engineering (representing Kinetics
Noise Control), tel. (416) 661-3400 for information.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment
weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select seismic restraints and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
a.
3.
b.
c.
d.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections
for equipment mounted outdoors.
Seismic Restraint Details:
a.
A.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance
with requirements.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.
1.
1.2
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 29
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of
seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear
loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths,
and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure
during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with windrestraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with
requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: Submit for review to an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components
with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic
restraints.
Welding certificates when requested.
Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and
damping test data
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the OBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis.
They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval,
showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 30
ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by
a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
3.
Site Class as Defined in the OBC: D.
Building Classification Category: High - for Schools and Normal for Offices.
Building Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.24
(Toronto).
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.056 (Toronto).
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform
loading over pad area.
Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.
a.
b.
2.3
A.
Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
Component Factor: 1.0
Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0.
Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.
Peak Ground Acceleration: 0.150 for Toronto.
Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
1.
Mounting Plates:
a.
b.
2.
Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and
threaded with threaded studs or bolts.
Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for
anchoring to support structure.
Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
1.
Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and
opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and
attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
a.
b.
2.5
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric
isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500
psig (3447 kPa).
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping
Housing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.
a.
b.
2.7
A.
Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.
Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other
elastomeric material.
OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
1.
2.6
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 31
Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
Top housing with threaded mounting holes and internal leveling device.
RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
1.
Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed.
a.
Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.8
A.
Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped
with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A.
B.
A.
Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and
reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of
motion to meet location requirements.
ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
2.
A.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve
arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene
1.
2.11
Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447
kPa).
Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and
level equipment.
RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES
1.
2.10
Top plate with threaded mounting holes
Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
1.
2.9
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 32
Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and
an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular
lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to
steel contact.
SPRING HANGERS
Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in
Compression:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.12
A.
Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor
bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
2.
3.
A.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for
a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washerreinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
SNUBBERS
1.
2.13
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 33
Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and studwedge or female-wedge type.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient
cushion.
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel
channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to
building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosionresistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
RESTRAINT CABLES
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized (or ASTM A 492 stainless where noted in
this document or on the drawings) -steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching
hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for
rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to
type and size of attachment devices used.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.16
A.
2.17
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 34
MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinccoated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select
anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or
urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid
mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior
applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COORDINATION AND EXECUTION
Coordinate size, shape, reinforcement and attachment of all housekeeping pads supporting vibration/seismically rated equipment. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi or as specified by the project engineer. Coordinate size,
thickness, doweling, and reinforcing of concrete equipment housekeeping pads and
piers with vibration isolation and seismic restraint device manufacturer to ensure adequate space, embedment and prevent edge breakout failures. Pads and piers must be
adequately doweled in to structural slab.
Housekeeping Pads must be adequately reinforced and adequately sized for proper installation of equipment anchors. Refer seismic restraint manufacturer’s written instructions.
Coordinate with vibration/seismic restraint manufacturer and the structural engineer of
record to locate and size structural supports underneath vibration/seismically restrained
equipment (e.g. roof curbs, cooling towers and other similar equipment). Installation of
all seismic restraint materials specified in this section shall be accomplished as per the
manufacturer’s written instructions. Adjust isolators and restraints after piping or wiring
systems have been filled and equipment is at its operating weight, following the manufacturer’s written instructions.
Isolated and restrained equipment, duct and piping located on roofs must be attached
to the structure. Supports (e.g., sleepers) that are not attached to the structure will not
be acceptable.
Attach piping to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer’s design. Install cables
so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structures.
Do not brace or support equipment to separate portions of the structure that may act
differently in response to an earthquake. For example, do not connect a Transverse restraint to a wall and then a Longitudinal restraint to either a floor/ceiling/roof at the
same braced location.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
G.
3.3
A.
Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint
manufacturer’s design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply
equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to hanger rods.
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS APPLICATION
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
All equipment, piping and ductwork shall be restrained to resist seismic forces per
the applicable Building Code(s) as a minimum; listed herein. Additional requirements specified herein are included specifically for this project; as needed basis.
Install seismic restraint devices per the manufacturer’s submittals. Any deviation
from the manufacturer’s instructions shall be reviewed and approved by the manufacturer.
Attachment to structure for suspended equipment, pipe and duct: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
Provide hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or as required to prevent buckling
of rods due to seismic forces.
Where rigid restraints are used on equipment, ductwork or piping, the support
rods for the equipment, ductwork or piping at restraint locations must be supported by anchors rated for seismic use. Post-installed concrete anchors must be in
accordance with ACI 355.2.
Ensure housekeeping pads have adequate space to mount equipment and seismic restraint devices and shall also be large enough and thick enough to ensure
adequate edge distance and embedment depth for restraint anchor bolts to avoid
housekeeping pad breakout failure.
Concrete Anchor Bolts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 35
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre- or posttensioned tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Mechanical Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust per
manufactures instructions prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in
holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface
in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
2.
Seismically restrain the following equipment: air handling unit, boilers and
control panels. Install fasteners, straps and brackets as required to secure the
equipment.
Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment supported by floor-mounted, nonseismic vibration isolators. Position snubbers as necessary and attach to equipment base and supporting structure as required.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
Install neoprene grommet washers or fill the gap with epoxy on equipment anchor
bolts where clearance between anchor and equipment support hole exceeds 3.2
mm (0.125 inch).
Suspended Equipment: All suspended equipment that meets any of the following
conditions requires seismic restraints as specified by the supplier:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
b.
Anchor floor and wall mounted equipment to the structure as per the
stamped seismic certifications / drawings.
Suspended equipment shall be restrained using seismic cable restraints, or
struts, and hanger rods as per the stamped seismic certifications / drawings.
Vibration Isolated Equipment:
a.
b.
D.
Rigidly attached to pipe or duct that is 75 lbs. and greater,
Items hung independently or with flexible connections greater than 20 lbs..
For importance factors greater than 1.0 all suspended equipment requires
seismic restraints regardless of the above notes.
Wall mounted equipment weighing more than 20 lbs. with an importance
factor of 1.0.
The 300mm (12”) rule does not apply to suspended equipment.
Rigid Mounted Equipment:
a.
6.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 36
Seismic control shall not compromise the performance of noise control, vibration isolation or fire stopping systems.
Equipment supported by vibration-isolation hangers shall be detailed and
installed with approximately a 1/8” gap between the isolation hangers and
the structure. Isolators at restraint locations must be fitted with uplift limit
stops.
Piping, Duct and Electrical Systems: Provide seismic control measures with spacing
and anchorage engineered for the specific project.
1.
All piping, duct and conduit systems are to be restrained to meet code requirements.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
All piping associated with “Life Safety Systems” shall always have an importance factor of 1.5. Seismic restraint requirements / exemptions vary
with code and seismic acceleration – see specific code and comply with
applicable restraint requirements.
Seismically restrain / brace all pipes 65 mm (2 ½”) in nominal diameter and
larger.
Seismically restrain / brace all piping in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms
and refrigeration mechanical rooms 32 mm (1 ¼”) in nominal diameter and
larger.
Seismically restrain / brace all Gas (ie: natural gas, medical gas, vacuum,
petroleum based liquid, compressed air, etc.) piping 25 mm (1”) in nominal
diameter and larger.
Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines.
Restraint Spacing For Piping:
a.
b.
For ductile piping: Transverse supports a maximum of 12 m (40’) o.c.
For ductile piping: Longitudinal supports a maximum of 24 m (80’) o.c.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
c.
d.
e.
3.
d.
b.
Seismically restrain all conduit 65 mm (2 ½”) in nominal diameter and larger. Single supported conduit is restrained in the same fashion as single
clevis supported pipe.
Seismically restrain all conduit or cable trays that are supported on trapeze
bars, that have been assigned a Component Importance Factor equal to
1.5, and that have a total weight greater than 10 lb/ft (146 N/m). This total
weight includes not only the conduit or cable trays, but also includes the
trapeze bars as well.
Single supported conduit and trapeze supported conduit, bus duct, and cable
trays to be seismically restrained in a manner similar to pipe and duct.
a.
b.
7.
Transverse supports a maximum of 9 m (30’) o.c.
Longitudinal supports a maximum of 18 m (60’) o.c.
Seismically restrain per specific code requirements all Electrical components
listed below (unless otherwise indicated on the drawings), using seismic cable
restraints:
a.
6.
All ducts with cross sectional area equal to or greater than 0.55 m2 (6 ft2).
All round ducts with diameters equal to or greater than 28” (710 mm).
Any ductwork, pipe or equipment, which if it were to fail would result in
damage to a piece of equipment or building function that has a component
importance factor of 1.5.
All ductwork weighing more than 25 kg/m (17 lb/ft).
Restraint Spacing For Ductwork:
a.
b.
5.
For non-ductile piping (e.g., cast iron, PVC) space Transverse supports a
maximum of 6 m (20’) o.c., and Longitudinal supports a maximum of 12 m
(40’) o.c. Differential spacing can be designed depending upon pipe size
and length(s) of run (design will be indicated on drawings of approved
method).
For piping with hazardous material inside (e.g., natural gas, medical gas)
space Transverse supports a maximum of 6 m (20’) o.c., and Longitudinal
supports a maximum of 12 m (40’) o.c.
For pipe risers, restrain the piping at floor penetrations using the same
spacing requirements as above.
Seismically restrain per specific code requirements, all ductwork listed below (unless otherwise indicated on the drawings), using seismic cable restraints: (Ductwork not meeting listed below criteria is to be “Exempt”)
a.
b.
c.
4.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 37
Conduit: Follow piping spacing requirements and required criteria as
listed in Section 3.2.E.2
Bus Ducts and Cable Trays: Follow duct spacing requirements and required criteria as listed in section 3.2.D.2
The seismic restraint components provided by Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. are
intended to be used with suspended single supported conduit and trapeze supported conduit, cable trays, and bus ducts. Components intended to both support and restrain distribution systems such as wall mounted conduit, cable
trays, and bus ducts will need to be designed and evaluated for both the dead
weight load and the design horizontal seismic load.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 38
To ensure that the seismic forces are transferred properly to the restraint
points, the cables should be strapped either individually or in bundles to the cable tray at regular intervals. It is necessary for the conduit, bus ducts, and cable
trays to be attached to the trapeze bars sufficiently to resist the design horizontal seismic forces, both transverse (T) and longitudinal (L).
Brace a change of direction longer than 3.7 m (12’).
This specification does not allow the use of the 300mm (12’’) rule where the piping, duct and electrical may be exempted from seismic restraint based on the
length of the support rods provided that the rods are not subjected to bending
moments.
Install restraint cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment
or building structure. Tie back to structure at 45 degrees to the structure.
Longitudinal restraints for single pipe supports shall be attached rigidly to the
pipe, not to the pipe hanger.
For supports with multiple pipes (trapezes), secure pipes to trapeze member with
clamps approved for application.
Install flexible metal hose loops in piping which crosses building seismic joints,
sized for the anticipated amount of movement.
Install flexible piping connectors where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with
connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from
the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment.
Where pipe sizes reduce below required dimensions noted above in Section
3.2.E, the final restraint shall be installed at the transition location.
Roof mounted duct is to be installed on sleepers or frames mechanically connected to the building structure. Roof anchors and seismic cables or frames shall
be used to resist seismic and wind loading. Wind loading factors shall be determined by the registered design professional.
Where duct sizes reduce below required dimensions noted above in Section
3.2.D, the final restraint shall be installed at the transition location.
Longitudinal restraints for single conduit supports shall be attached rigidly to the
pipe, not to the pipe/conduit hanger.
For supports with multiple conduits (trapezes), secure conduit to trapeze member
with clamps approved for application.
Where conduit, bus ducts, cable trays sizes reduce below required dimensions
noted above in Section 3.2.F, the final restraint shall be installed at the transition
location.
Rod Stiffener Clamps are required where the hanger rod exceeds the maximum
length shown in the seismic calculation sheets. They are only required at restraint
locations.
Seismically Rated Beam Clamps are required where welding to or penetrations to
steel beams are not approved.
Adjust restraint cables so that they are not visibly slack. Cable not to support
weight during normal operation.
Seismic systems are to be compatible with requirements for anchoring and guiding of systems.
Drilled or power driven anchors or fasteners shall not be permitted for use with
seismic control measures.
Friction due to gravity does not constitute a seismic attachment.
Seismic restraint connections are not to be connected to the bottom chord of
steel joists or the bottom flange of steel beams.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
29.
30.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 39
Standard beam clamps can be used to support restrained components; they cannot be used to connect the seismic restraint to the structure – only for the hanger
rods.
Brace remaining piping, ductwork, electrical components to code requirements
(OBC & NBC or TI-809-04)) or in conformance with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.) “Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”, 2ND edition or 3RD edition depending on
Code or EOR.
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent
sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the
connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different
structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach
equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for
piping flexible connections.
INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer prior to installing any seismic restraint devices. The contractor shall seek
the representative’s guidance in any installation procedures with which he/she is unfamiliar.
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer mid-way through the listed project for an inspection all vibration and
seismic restraint devices already installed. A written report of any installation errors,
improperly selected devices, or other fault in the system which could affect the performance of the system shall be documented and the contractor shall perform all steps
that are required from this written report to properly complete the vibration and seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Upon completion of the installation, arrange for the design Engineer to visit the site to
verify the proper installation of all seismic restraint devices herein specified. A written
report citing any installation errors, improperly selected devices, or other fault in the
system which could affect the performance of the system should be generated by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall verify that isolators are adjusted, with spring’s perpendicular to bases or housing, adjustment bolts are tightened up on equipment mountings,
and hangers are not cocked. Upon completion of the Work, the Engineer shall provide
a sealed letter addressed to the local authorities having jurisdiction confirming that the
Seismic Design and Installation is in general conformance with the design documents
and the Ontario and National Building Codes.
The installing contractor shall take all steps required to properly complete the seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Perform the following tests:
1.
2.
3.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
5.
3.6
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 40
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
ADJUSTING
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
END OF SECTION 230548
SECTION 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Pipe labels.
Valve tags.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
Valve numbering scheme.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
EQUIPMENT LABELS
Metal Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or stainless steel, 0.025-inch
(0.64-mm) or aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch
(0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for
attachment hardware.
Letter Color: Black.
Background Color: White.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of
principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 41
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
Letter Color: Black.
Background Color: White.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160OF (71OC).
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of
principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and
the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for
attachment hardware.
Letter Color: Red.
Background Color: White.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160OF (71OC).
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
PIPE LABELS
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with
lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
backing.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
2.4
A.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to
accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
Lettering Size: [Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping] [At least 1/2 inch
(13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm) and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances].
VALVE TAGS
Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1.
2.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 42
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment
hardware.
Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.
Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag),
location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or
modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and
similar special uses.
1.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
PREPARATION
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible
ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as
shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and
inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
6.
7.
B.
C.
A.
B.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes,
including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
3.5
Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience
and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughingin connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color
scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a.
2.
A.
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round or square.
Valve-Tag Colors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.6
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 43
Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background.
Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.
Combustible Fluids: White letters on a safety-brown background.
Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background.
Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters
on a safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background,
and white letters on a safety-black background
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
END OF SECTION 230553
SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
Constant-volume air systems.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
A.
B.
1.7
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 44
Constant-flow hydronic systems.
DEFINITIONS
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Certified TAB reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or
TABB.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in
ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire
TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with
Owner's operations.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize
conflicts with Owner's operations.
COORDINATION
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
TAB SPECIALISTS
Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following available TAB
contractors:
1.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
Approved by the TCDSB.
EXAMINATION
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and
equipment.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,
thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
F.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief
air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as and are properly
separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and
fire-stopped if required.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1.
2.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
3.3
A.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 45
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including
system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC
equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to
rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use
tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and
installed conditions.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are
aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with
indicated perforations.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting
or mixing fluid flows.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight
fins.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.
Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
PREPARATION
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations
can be met.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.4
A.
B.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111,
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems", SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this
Section.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to
the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
2.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.6
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 46
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and
thickness as used to construct ducts.
After testing and balancing, install test ports that comply with requirements in
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve
position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with
paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) or metric (SI)
units to match measurements shown in the contract documents.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow
measurements.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure total airflow.
a.
2.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a.
b.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
c.
d.
3.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are
measured.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound
traps, heat-recovery equipment, under final balanced conditions.
Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors.
Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling
units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated airhandling-unit performance.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode
to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a.
2.
3.
C.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and
downstream from duct restrictions.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling
unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
4.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 47
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for
Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and
inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
D.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather
than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1.
2.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of
indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.7
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at
pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved
pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in
addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.8
A.
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
Check liquid level in expansion tank.
Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest
vent.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at
indicated flow.
Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do
not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless
several terminal valves are kept open.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing
device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positivedisplacement pumps:
1.
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero
flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
a.
2.
3.
4.
C.
If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain
approval from Architect and comply with requirements in Section 232123
"Hydronic Pumps."
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across
the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.
a.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 48
Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors
in overload conditions.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower
for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare
calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report
conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in
fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
F.
G.
3.
I.
J.
3.9
A.
B.
3.10
A.
A.
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over
indicated flow.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage,
rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air
temperature.
Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of
balancing.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2.
Motor horsepower rating.
3.
Motor rpm.
4.
Efficiency rating.
5.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer,
model number, serial number, and nameplate data.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.11
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flowpressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow
that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1.
2.
H.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 49
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
Water flow rate.
Water pressure drop.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
3.12
A.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10
percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
FINAL REPORT
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate
sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
2.
B.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed
by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title page.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the
report. Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated
values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 50
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
Water and steam flow rates.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
Terminal units.
Balancing stations.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
7.
D.
Position of balancing devices.
Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
3.
Unit identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and unit size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Unit arrangement and class.
Discharge arrangement.
Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
Number, make, and size of belts.
Number, type, and size of filters.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
E.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 51
Total air flow rate in L/s (cfm).
Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
Filter static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg)
Heating-coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg)
Outdoor airflow in L/s (cfm).
Return airflow in L/s (cfm).
Outdoor-air damper position.
Return-air damper position.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Air flow rate in L/s (cfm).
Average face velocity in m/s (fpm).
Air pressure drop in Pa (inches wg)
Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in OC (OF).
Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in OC (OF).
Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in OC (OF)..
Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in OC (OF).
Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
Water pressure differential in feet of head or kPa (psig).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
j.
k.
F.
Entering-water temperature in OC (OF).
Leaving-water temperature in OC (OF).).
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
g.
3.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Arrangement and class.
Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
Number, make, and size of belts.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
G.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 52
Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
Suction static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump
curves and include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Unit identification.
Location.
Service.
Make and size.
Model number and serial number.
Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
Water pressure differential in feet of head or kPa (psig).
Required net positive suction head in feet of head or kPa (psig).
Pump rpm.
Impeller diameter in mm (inches).
Motor make and frame size.
Motor horsepower and rpm.
Voltage at each connection.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
n.
o.
p.
2.
Report Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A.
Initial Inspection:
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly
check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final
test and balance readings documented in the final report.
Check the following for each system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
Final Inspection:
1.
3.14
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
INSPECTIONS
1.
B.
Static head in feet of head or kPa (psig).
Pump shutoff pressure in kPa (psig).
Actual impeller size in mm (inches)
Full-open flow rate in L/s (gpm).
Full-open pressure in feet of head or kPa (psig)..
Final discharge pressure in kPa (psig).).
Final suction pressure in kPa (psig).
Final total pressure in kPa (psig).
Final water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
Voltage at each connection.
Amperage for each phase.
Instrument Calibration Reports:
1.
3.13
Amperage for each phase.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Seal type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
H.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 53
After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies
that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final
report submit final report for review.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak
summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and
winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 54
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.
B.
RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED
1.
C.
Acoustic duct insulation and flexible duct insulation unless specifically noted
otherwise. Refer to the drawings and specifications for specific requirements and
extent of flexible ductwork and internal acoustic lining.
SUBMITTALS
1.
D.
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete the
insulation work of the Duct Insulation in accordance with the specifications and/or
drawings.
Submit sample of insulating materials and a report from an approved testing
laboratory confirming fire hazard ratings if requested.
DEFINITIONS
1.
Exposed casings or ductwork and exposed casings or duct insulation includes all
casings and ductwork and casings and ductwork insulation installed in equipment
rooms, service spaces and areas of the building not provided with suspension type
acoustic tile, drywall or plaster ceilings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL
Thermal insulating materials shall be non-combustible. Adhesive shall be waterproof and
Thermal insulating materials shall be non-combustible. Adhesive shall be waterproof and
flame resistant. Combustible wrappings or vapour barriers used in conjunction with
thermal insulating materials shall be treated to reduce their combustibility so that flame
spread classification of entire assembly, as determined according to Method of Fire
Hazard Classification for Building Materials ASTM E-84-76a shall not exceed 25 and
smoke developed number shall not exceed 50.
Insulation thickness shall be as specified under the "Work Included Article" of this
Section.
1.
Ductwork and Casing Insulation Types
a.
Type ‘A’
.1
.2
.3
.4
Exposed and concealed rectangular ductwork and casings: 25mm
thick rigid fibrous glass duct insulation of minimum 86 kg/m3density
Exposed round ductwork 250mm diameter and over: 25mm thick
Fiberglas FLEX-WRAP of 56 kg/m3 (3.5 lbs/ft3) or 25mm thick
preformed fibrous glass sleeving.
Concealed round ductwork: 25mm thick flexible fibrous glass duct
insulation of minimum 28 kg/m3 density.
Insulation to be supplied with factory applied vapour barrier jacket
of glass fibre reinforced kraft or aluminum foil laminate having a
maximum vapour transmission rate of .03 perms.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
b.
Type ‘B’ (Ducts/plenums handling outdoor air located inside the building)
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 55
Exposed and concealed rectangular ductwork and casings: 50mm
thick rigid fibrous glass duct insulation of minimum 86 kg/m3.
density.
Exposed round ductwork 250mm diameter and over: 50mm thick
Fiberglas FLEX-WRAP of 56 kg/m3 (3.5 lbs/ft3) or 50mm thick
preformed fibrous glass sleeving.
Concealed round ductwork: 50mm thick flexible fibrous glass duct
insulation of minimum 28 kg/m3. Density.
Insulation to be supplied with factory applied vapour barrier jacket
of glass fibre reinforced kraft or aluminum foil laminate having a
maximum vapour transmission rate of .03 perms.
Insulation Covering
a.
Close weave fire retarding canvas of the following weights:
 Exposed pipe and equipment insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
3.
Insulation Accessories.
a.
b.
c.
(14 gauge) pins with 32mm (1.25") square plated type clips.
Fibrous glass twine to local authorities approval.
Unless noted wire used to secure insulation shall be minimum 16 gauge
galvanized annealed wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
EXECUTION
This work shall be performed only by tradesmen experienced in insulation work.
Install insulation material and adhesive in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Provide covering material which is to be finish painted by other Division, in condition to
receive the paint.
Surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry.
Do not apply insulation until leakage tests have been completed.
Install insulation in a neat workmanlike manner with smooth and even surfaces. Locate
longitudinal seams where least visible.
Keep insulation clear of all instruments, controls, dampers, components, etc., so that it
will not hinder or interfere with removal, setting, reading of, or access to same.
Install insulation continuous through walls, floors and similar surfaces.
Seal all welded pin penetrations of vapour barriers with a 100mm x 100mm patch of
aluminum foil tape or pressure sensitive vapour barrier tape.
Do not break continuity of insulation, vapour barrier and canvas finish by supports or
rods. Remove supports and rods temporarily to facilitate installation of insulation, vapour
barrier and canvas finish where required.
Unless otherwise noted, further insulation will not be required on ductwork provided with
internal acoustic lining. Exposed flexible ductwork insulation shall be canvas covered by
this Section.
Install incompressible insulation material of the same thickness as adjacent ductwork
insulation between casing or duct and support for externally insulated exposed
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
M.
N.
rectangular or square casings or ductwork, except for ductwork supported by steel
bands.
Ensure correct installation of plugs for pitot tube openings in externally insulated casings
and ductwork. Finish insulation flush with test plugs so that test openings may be used
without damage to insulation.
Unless noted otherwise, do not insulate the following items:
1.
2.
3.
O.
Discharge from safety and relief valves, overflow and equipment drain pipes.
Closed type hot water heating and chilled water expansion tanks.
Exposed chrome plated piping.
Insulation Types:
1.
Ductwork and Casing Insulation Type ‘A’
a.
Secure flexible insulation for ducts up to 0.6 meter wide to duct surface using
pressure sensitive tapes a minimum of 100mm wide and applied with
moving pressure using an appropriate sealing tool. Outward clinch
insulation with staples placed 150 mm on center. Refer to manufacturer’s
diagram for staple stitching and butt-joint method. Closure systems should
have a 25/50 F.H.C. per UL723.Secure with wire at 300mm centres on runs
of ductwork and 150mm centres on fittings. Do not compress insulation to
more than 25% of specified thickness.
Adhere rigid insulation and flexible insulation for ducts and casings over 0.6
meter wide to duct surface with insulation adhesive and welding pins. Apply
adhesive in 150mm wide strips at 450mm maximum spacing. Locate welded
pins at 450mm maximum spacing and secure pins to duct with welding gun.
Use a minimum of two rows of fasteners per side. Pin sizes shall be as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the type and thickness of
insulation. Impale insulation over pins and secure with suitable speed
washers or clips. Remove protruding ends of pins.
Butt insulation tightly against standing seams or flanged joints. Seal joints
between perimeter of insulation and flange with vapour proof mastic.
Fill joints, seams, chipped edges, etc., on exposed ductwork and casing
insulation with a vapour barrier bedding compound or mastic to leave a
smooth and even surface. Provide 50mm x 50mm x 0.4mm protective
aluminum corners secured with tape until canvas covered.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Ductwork and Casing Type ‘B’
a.
Apply insulation as specified for Type 'A' insulation except as follows:

P.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 56
At standing seams and flanged joints, cover the projecting portion of the
seam or flange with 75mm wide strips of the duct insulation grooved to
accommodate seam or flange and provide a minimum of 12mm cover over
the perimeter edges of seam or flange. Adhere strips to insulation on duct
with adhesive. Over all coverings, strips at standing seams and flanges,
apply a layer of vapour-proof mastic, embed an open mesh glass fabric, 20
x 20 in the mastic and apply a second coat of mastic over the insulation on
the duct or casing for a minimum 50 mm.
Insulation Covering:
a.
Unless noted cover exposed ductwork and casing insulation with canvas.
Adhere canvas to insulation surfaces with full coating of lagging adhesive.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 57
Finish and seal canvas with a full brush coat of lagging adhesive. Install
canvas over any vapour barrier jacket or coating specified. Where insulation
is butted against standing seams or flanged joints, canvas cover the
projecting leg of the seam or joint by placing a strip of canvas tight around
the projecting seam or joint extending 75mm on each side. Lapp all seams at
least 50 mm.
Q.
Application – Ductwork Insulation
1.
Exhaust Air Duct/Plenum
a.
2.
Outdoor Air Intake Duct/Mixing Plenum (AHU1 and AHU2)
a.
3.
Insulate with with type ‘B’ ductwork insulation.
Air Handling Unit Supply Air Ductwork (AHU1 and AHU2)
a.
4.
Insulate exhaust air duct serving washroom exhaust fans from roof by
minimum 3m with type ‘A’ ductwork insulation.
Insulate all concealed supply air ductwork with type ‘A’ ductwork insulation.
Refer to architectural ceiling and room finishing schedules to determine the
extent of concealed ductwork. Flexible ducts to be factory insulated..
Miscellaneous
a.
Insulate various parts of ductwork, plenums, etc., as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 230713
SECTION 220719 – HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
1.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.
C.
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete the
insulation work of the HVAC Piping Insulation in accordance with the specifications
and/or drawings.
Submit sample of insulating materials and a report from an approved testing
laboratory confirming fire hazard ratings if requested Pipe labels.
DEFINITIONS
1.
Exposed piping and exposed pipe insulation includes all piping and pipe insulation
installed in equipment rooms, service spaces and areas of building not provided
with suspension type acoustic tile, drywall or plaster ceilings.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 58
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL
Thermal insulating materials shall be non-combustible. Adhesive shall be waterproof and
flame resistant. Combustible wrappings or vapour barriers used in conjunction with
thermal insulating materials shall be treated to reduce their combustibility so that flame
spread classification of entire assembly, as determined according to Method of Fire
Hazard Classification for Building Materials ASTM E-84-76a shall not exceed 25 and
smoke developed number shall not exceed 50.
Insulation thickness shall be as specified under the "Work Included Article" of this
Section.
1.
Pipework Insulation Types.
a.
Type ‘A’
.1
b.
Type ‘B’
.1
2.
Preformed type mineral insulation of minimum 104 kg/m3 density
with canvas or multi service jacket having longitudinal and traverse
laps.
Preformed type mineral insulation of minimum 104 kg/m3 density
with factory applied vapour barrier jacket or glass fibre reinforced
kraft or aluminum foil laminate having a maximum vapour
transmission rate of .03 perms.
Insulation Covering
a.
Close weave fire retarding canvas of the following weights:
 Exposed pipe and equipment insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
 Exposed fitting, valve body, etc., insulation: 1.8 kg/m2.
 Except for steam piping, factory premoulded PVC fitting covers and jacketing
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
 For steam piping systems use canvas covering.
3.
Insulation Accessories.
a.
b.
c.
(14 gauge) pins with 32mm (1.25") square plated type clips.
Fibrous glass twine to local authorities approval.
Unless noted wire used to secure insulation shall be minimum 16 gauge
galvanized annealed wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXECUTION
This work shall be performed only by tradesmen experienced in insulation work.
Install insulation material and adhesive in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Provide covering material which is to be finish painted by other Division, in condition to
receive the paint.
Surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry.
Do not apply insulation until leakage tests have been completed.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Install insulation in a neat workmanlike manner with smooth and even surfaces. Locate
longitudinal seams where least visible.
Keep insulation clear of all instruments, controls, dampers, components, etc., so that it
will not hinder or interfere with removal, setting, reading of, or access to same.
Install insulation continuous through walls, floors and similar surfaces.
Do not break continuity of insulation, vapour barrier and canvas finish by supports or
rods. Remove supports and rods temporarily to facilitate installation of insulation, vapour
barrier and canvas finish where required.
Install 100mm long, 20 gauge polished aluminum pipe insulation protectors at all points,
where exposed pipe insulation terminates at floor.
Unless noted otherwise, do not insulate the following items:
1.
2.
3.
L.
Discharge from safety and relief valves, overflow and equipment drain pipes.
Closed type hot water heating and chilled water expansion tanks.
Exposed chrome plated piping.
Insulation Types:
1.
Pipework Insulation Type ‘A’
a.
b.
c.
2.
Secure insulation with approved type staples and/or cement laps down with
adhesive.
Insulate fittings, flanged unions and valve bodies with segments of
preformed block or pipe insulation of by wrapping with strips of fibrous glass
blanket type insulation to the same thickness of the adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulation shall be held in place with wire of fibrous glass twine. Finish
insulation with a coat of cement recovered with canvas or factory
premoulded one piece PVC fitting covers and jacketing.
Do not insulate screwed unions and piping inside air handling unit casing.
Pipework Insulation Type ‘B’
a.
b.
M.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 59
Overlap vapour barrier jacket at least 50mm on longitudinal joints. Wrap butt
joints with a minimum 100mm wide band of vapour barrier jacket. Seal laps
and bands with pressure sensitive, vapour proof adhesive or vapour proof
mastic applied to the complete surface of the laps.
Insulate all fittings, screwed and flanged unions and valve bodies with
segments of preformed pipe insulation or by wrapping with strips of fibrous
glass blanket type insulation to the same thickness of the adjoining pipe
insulation. Insulation shall be held in place with wire or fibrous glass twine.
Coat the insulation with vapour proof mastic and wrap with glass fabric.
Embed the glass fabric in the mastic and seal the fabric with vapour proof
mastic. Finish insulation by applying a coat of vapour proof adhesive.
Alternatively factory premoulded one piece PVC fitting covers and jacketing
may be applied over insulation, in lieu of mastic and glass fabric. Install the
covers to provide a complete vapour seal. Insulate expansion joints and
flexible hose connectors to allow for movement and flexing of joints.
Insulation Covering:
1.
Unless noted cover exposed pipe and equipment insulation and exposed ductwork
and casing insulation with canvas. PVC jacketing may be used for piping in
mechanical rooms. Adhere canvas to insulation surfaces with full coating of lagging
adhesive. Finish and seal canvas with a full brush coat of lagging adhesive. Install
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 60
canvas over any vapour barrier jacket or coating specified. Where insulation is
butted against standing seams or flanged joints, canvas cover the projecting leg of
the seam or joint by placing a strip of canvas tight around the projecting seam or
joint extending 75mm on each side. Lapp all seams at least 50 mm.
N.
Hangers and Insulation Shields
1.
Insulate and vapour seal hangers directly supporting insulated piping as part of
adjoining pipe for the following services:
a.
Chilled Water Piping
Insulate hanger rods to length of 4 times the pipe insulation
thickness.
Use curved metal insulation shields wherever pipe is supported by
hanger of type which cannot effectively be insulated to prevent
condensation, eg. roller hangers.
Insulation shields shall consist of segment high density insulation and
12 gauge galvanized sheet steel protective shield complete with
vapour barrier, designed to suit adjacent insulation thickness and pipe
weight.
.1
.2
.3
O.
Hot Equipment
1.
2.
3.
Insulate hot equipment with fibrous glass metal mesh blanket. Hold metal mesh
blankets in place with 20mm metal bands on maximum 300mm centres. Lace
metal edges butting together with wire. On large flat or irregular surfaces, impale
metal mesh blankets over suitable welded fasteners on maximum 300mm centres.
Alternatively hot equipment may be insulated with calcium silicate insulation blocks
applied and secured as specified above.
Finish the insulation with two coats of asbestos free cement, 6mm thick troweled
smooth. Cover insulation with canvas.
Insulation thickness shall be as follows:



4.
5.
6.
Insulation Thickness
25 mm
40 mm
50 mm
Insulation shall have maximum 'K' value of 0.068 W/M/oC at 150oC mean
temperature.
Hot equipment shall include all equipment as specified under the "Application
Article" of this Section.
Do not insulate the following:
a.
P.
Equipment Temperature
up to 95oC
96oC to 150oC
150oC and over
Inspection and manholes on tanks and equipment, chemical by-pass
feeders, flanges on strainers and suction guides requiring removal for access
to strainer.
Cold Equipment
1.
2.
3.
Insulate cold surfaces of equipment as specified for pipework insulation Type 'B'.
Cold equipment shall include all equipment as specified under the "Application
Article" of this Section.
Provide slip-on type insulated enclosures for flanges on strainers.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Q.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 61
Application
1.
Hot Water Heating Piping Systems
a.
b.
c.
2.
Insulate with Type 'A' pipework insulation.
Insulation thickness: 25 mm for pipe size 25mm or larger; 12mm for pipe size
20mm or smaller.
Do not insulate piping inside finned tube units.
Hot Equipment
a.
Insulate as specified. Equipment includes the following:
.1
.2
Equipment, pipes, etc., exposed to human contact having surface
temperatures exceeding 70oC.
Bodies of strainers, suction guides and vertical in-line pumps (pump
types B and C where applicable) installed in piping systems and/or
services to be insulated with type 'A' pipework insulation
END OF SECTION 230719
SECTION 232113 – HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
Hot-water heating piping.
Makeup-water piping.
Condensate/drain piping.
Air-vent piping.
Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
Chemical treatment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the
following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
2.2
A.
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig (860 kPa)> at [200 deg F (93 deg C)].
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system
to which it is attached.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: [ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)].
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless,
Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping
Applications" Article.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in
"Piping Applications" Article.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in
"Piping Applications" Article.
Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250;
raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications"
Article.
Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including
bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Material Group: 1.1.
End Connections: Butt welding.
Facings: Raised face.
JOINING MATERIALS
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
a.
b.
B.
2.5
A.
B.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 62
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 63
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 21/2” (DN 65) and smaller shall be
any of the following:
1.
2.
B.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 3 (DN 75) and larger, shall be of the
following:
1.
C.
Schedule 40 steel, continuous weld or electric resistance welded black carbon
steel conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B with beveled ends.
Hot-water heating piping installed below ground shall be the following:
1.
D.
Type L hard drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM B-88, soft annealed
copper tubing may be used within convector enclosures only.
Schedule 40 steel, continuous weld or electric resistance welded black carbon
steel conforming to ASTM A53-84a Grade B with threaded ends. Class 150,
malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints.
Type K (Type A), annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and
brazed joints. Use the fewest possible joints.
Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be of the following:
1.
Type L (Type B) Type M (Type C), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper
fittings, and soldered joints.
E.
Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M (Type C) or Type DWV, drawn-temper copper
tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
F.
Air-Vent Piping:
1.
2.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
Inlet: Same as service where installed.
Outlet: Type K (Type A), annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared
joints.
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
A.
B.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4
(DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere
as required for system drainage.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch
connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the
top of the main pipe.
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final
connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, at final connections of
equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping
and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following
requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 64
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet
(6 m) long.
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20
feet (6 m) or longer.
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or
longer, supported on a trapeze.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct
contact with copper pipe.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1.
2.
NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m).
NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
2.
G.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
3.7
A.
NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
Support vertical runs at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors.
1.
F.
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m).
NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m).
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m).
NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m).
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1.
E.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 65
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified
processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than
equipment connections.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections
where shown on the drawings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
2.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during
test.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions
due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion
joints from testing.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
B.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or
replace strainer screens.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of
overpressure during test.
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 66
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of
damage due to freezing.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times
the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum
pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test.
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening,
repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no
leaks.
Perform the following before operating the system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open manual valves fully.
Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and
operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers
Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 232113
SECTION 232116 – HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following:
1.
Air Control Devices
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Hydronic Specialties
a.
b.
3.
4.
Manual air vents
Automatic air vents
Tangential air separators
Membrane expansion tanks
Strainers and suction guides
Triple duty valves
Air-vent piping.
Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 67
Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing
for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
Air-control devices.
Hydronic specialties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
1.
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the
following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
2.2
A.
AIR-CONTROL DEVICES
Manual Air Vents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Standard of Acceptance: Amtrol, Sarco, SA Armstrong, Trerice
Body: Bronze.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).
CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225OF (107OC).
Automatic Air Vents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig (860 kPa)> at 200 deg F (93 deg C).
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system
to which it is attached.
Standard of Acceptance: Amtrol, Sarco, SA Armstrong, Trerice
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4 (DN 8).
CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa), Maximum Operating Temperature: 240OF
(116OC).
Tangential-Type Air Separators:
1.
Standard of Acceptance: SA Armstrong Model VAS, Sarco, Amtrol
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
3.
4.
A.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
3.
4.
5.
6.
Standard of Acceptance: Braukmann, Crane, Morrison, Brass, McAvity, Sarco,
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends
for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Strainer Screens - Closed Water Systems: 1.6mm perforated stainless-steel
basket for sizes up to 75mm (3”), 3mm for sizes 100mm (4”) and larger.
Strainer Screens - Open Water Systems: 3 mm perforations, Free screen area
shall not be less than double the internal area of the pipe.
CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
Basket Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Standard of Acceptance: SA Armstrong, Extrol, Expanflex
Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 375OF
(191OC) maximum operating temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated
and supports installed and are labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water
to maintain required expansion capacity.
Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
1.
2.
B.
Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa)
minimum working pressure and 375OF (191OC) maximum operating temperature.
Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air
into expansion tank.
Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Blowdown Connection: Threaded.
Size: Match system flow capacity.
Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks:
1.
2.
2.3
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 68
Standard of Acceptance: Braukmann, Crane, Morrison, Brass, McAvity, Sarco.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom
drain connection.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends
for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket
with 50 percent free area.
CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
Suction Guides:
1.
Standard of Acceptance: SA Armstrong, Bell & Gossett
2.
Suction guides may be used in lieu of strainers at pump inlets.
3.
Body: Cast iron with steel guide vanes.
4.
End Connections: Flanged.
5.
Strainer Screen: Fine mesh brass startup strainer, stainless steel strainer with
perforations as specified for strainers. Start-up strainer to be removed after
cleaning and flushing of systems.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
6.
D.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 69
CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing
protective jacket.
End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.
CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250OF (121OC).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply
connection to each piece of equipment.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves where shown on the drawings.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling
terminal.
Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow
direction.
Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe
without valves to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on
Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1, for installation requirements.
Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill
pressure.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as
required for system air venting.
Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment
rooms only. Install manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air
venting.
Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a
2 percent upward slope toward tank.
Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or fullport ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.
Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and
charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.
1.
2.
F.
Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.
Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight
of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload
building components and structural members.
Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that tank is properly charged with
air to suit system Project requirements.
END OF SECTION 232116
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 70
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
Three-piece in-line design centrifugal pumps (Pump Type “A”).
Fluid lubricated (Wet-rotor) pumps (Pump Type “C”).
DEFINITIONS
Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
EPT: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated
capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions,
and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on
curves.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each pump.
1.
1.4
A.
Show pump layout and connections.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include operation, and maintenance
manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Three-Piece In-Line Design Centrifugal Pumps (Pump Type “A”)
Standard of Acceptance: SA Armstrong Series S and H, Bell & Gosset
.1
.2
2.2
A.
Fluid Lubricated (Wet Rotor) Pumps (Pump Type “C”)
Standard of Acceptance: SA Armstrong Series Astro, Bell & Gosset
.1
.2
2.3
A.
Horizontal in-line three-piece centrifugal design with resiliently mounted motor, oil
lubricated bronze sleeve bearings and mechanical seal suitable for 125psi
(860kpa) working pressure. Iron body, bronze-fitted construction for standard applications, all bronze construction for domestic hot water systems.
Capacities and application as scheduled on the drawings.
Cast iron body with replaceable stainless steel cartridge impeller assembly. No
mechanical seal, suitable for 125psi (860kpa) working pressure. Iron bodyconstruction for standard applications.
Capacities and application as scheduled on the drawings.
PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
Suction Diffuser or Guide:
1.
2.
Standard of Acceptance: SA Armstrong, Bell & Gosset
Angle pattern.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 71
175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast or ductile iron body and end cap,
pump-inlet fitting.
Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers.
Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes.
Drain plug.
Triple-Duty Valve:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Standard of Acceptance: SA Armstrong, Bell & Gosset
Angle or straight pattern.
175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast or ductile iron body, pump-discharge
fitting.
Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before pump installation.
PUMP INSTALLATION
Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by
pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices
specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and
spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support weight of in-line
pumps.
CONNECTIONS
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump
nozzles.
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage
tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
STARTUP SERVICE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Clean strainers on suction piping.
Remove start-up strainers on suction guides after cleaning and flushing
operation.
Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a.
Verify bearing lubrication.
b.
Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
6.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 72
Open discharge valve slowly.
END OF SECTION 232123
SECTION 232513 - WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
DEFINITIONS
TSS: Total suspended solids are solid materials, including organic and inorganic, that
are suspended in the water. These solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial
wastes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories for the following products:
1.
B.
1.4
A.
A.
Bypass feeders.
Shop Drawings: Treatment equipment showing tanks and piping connections to HVAC
systems. Include diagrams for power and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control reports.
1.
1.5
Cleaning and Flushing
Chemical By-pass Feeders
Chemical treatment test equipment.
Chemicals.
Water Analysis: Iron content after cleaning procedures.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment installed to be included in operation,
and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
MANUFACTURERS, SERVICE PROVIDERS
Standard of Acceptance: GE Betz, Dearborn
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological
growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to
operating personnel or to the environment.
Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics,
operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having
jurisdiction.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water (glycol) heating shall have the following
water qualities:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 73
To prevent corrosion.
pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.
"P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
CLEANING AND FLUSHING
Closed Hot Water (Glycol) Heating System (New piping loop connecting to existing
system):
1. Before commencing work, test existing water system and document water quality.
2. Clean and flush the new piping system as specified.
3. Cleaning Compound: Acceptable non-foaming and phosphate free detergent
cleaning compound as recommended by the water treatment specialist.
4. After satisfactory leak testing, and prior to any system service or start-up, completely
flush and drain the systems and equipment. Clean all strainers.
5. Introduce cleaning compound and circulate solution as recommended by the water
treatment specialist.
6. Provide valved pipe connections at new piping loop and temporary circulating pump
as required for circulating cleaning solution in new piping loop.
7. Test samples of water from the new piping loop for iron content. If total iron content
of water exceeds one p.p.m. repeat cleaning procedure. Submit results for review.
B.
2.4
A.
After cleaning and flushing operation, use existing by-pass feeder and add chemicals
compatible with existing system to maintain recommended water quality.
MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT
Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch
(89-mm) fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 (DN 20) bottom inlet and top side outlet.
Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the
feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.
1.
B.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
Capacity: 2 gal. (7.6 L).
Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig (860 kPa
CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounting
cabinet.
CHEMICALS
Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are
compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can
attain water quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
WATER ANALYSIS
Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project
site.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems equipped with the following:
1.
2.
3.3
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 74
Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Install a full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
B.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
C.
3.4
A.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain
water conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological
growth for the heating, hot-water (glycol) piping. Services and chemicals shall be
provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion and shall include
the following:
1.
2.
3.5
A.
Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have
been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before
introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.
Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations.
Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and
initially fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation.
DEMONSTRATION
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC watertreatment systems and equipment.
END OF SECTION 232513
SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Duct liner.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.2
A.
B.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam
and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and
performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of
gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible "Guidelines for
Mechanical Systems", OBC and SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for
Mechanical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
C.
A.
Low velocity, low pressure ductwork is classified as ductwork with mean
velocities less velocities less than 10.2 m/s and static pressure 50mm water
gauge or less.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: When requested, for each type of the following products:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Seismic Hazard Level A or Low: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.
Seismic Hazard Level B or Normal: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30.
Seismic Hazard Level C or High: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.
Ductwork Pressure Class
a.
1.3
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 75
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
Seismic-restraint devices.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sheet metal thicknesses.
Joint and seam construction and sealing.
Reinforcement details and spacing.
Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting
hangers and supports and seismic restraints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless
otherwise indicated.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular
Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular
Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
2.2
A.
B.
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select
types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure
class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and
duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be
free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 76
Galvanized Coating Designation: [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)].
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;
black and galvanized.
1.
D.
2.3
A.
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce
aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or
EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36
inches (900 mm).
DUCT LINER
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and
with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." Liner inner surface to be
neoprene coated.
a.
Liner to be 25mm (1”) thick, Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
1)
B.
Insulation Pins and Washers:
1.
2.
C.
Type II, Rigid: [0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x OF (0.033 W/m x K)] at 75OF
(24OC) mean temperature.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,
fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, [0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-)] [0.135inch- (3.5-mm-)] diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with
integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch(0.41-mm-) thick aluminum; with beveled edge sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness
with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive
metal nosing.
Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal
joints necessary.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at
intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm)
from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm)
longitudinally.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
a.
b.
2.4
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 77
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for
sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene
plasticizer.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 78
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum
Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.2
A.
DUCT INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to
size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other
design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and
for branch connections.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation
thickness.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are
exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on
four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire
dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire
and smoke dampers.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials.[ Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under
Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."]
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead.
Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.
When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the
exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of
fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
DUCT SEALING
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in
"Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.4
A.
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
3.
4.
5.
D.
E.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa)
and Lower: Seal Class B.
Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa)
and Lower: Seal Class C.
Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
1.
2.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 79
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing;
install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48
inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with
welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a
maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
F.
G.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 80
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items
during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items
are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical
and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavyduty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural
element to which anchor is to be fastened.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel
anchors for applications exposed to weather.
CONNECTIONS
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
PAINTING
Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not
have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanizedsteel primer. Paint materials and application of duct exterior is specified under Painting
Divisions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
Leakage Tests:
1.
2.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test
report for each test.
Test the following systems:
a. Construction of low pressure ductwork shall be inherently airtight, and
leakage shall be of sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet
ambient and not detectable by sense of feel.
3.8
A.
B.
DUCT SCHEDULE
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:
1)
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2)
b.
3)
3)
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
b.
c.
3.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:
1)
2)
2.
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):
1)
2)
c.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 81
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of
direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and
three segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio
and four segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio
and five segments for 90-degree elbow.
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b.
C.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or
pleated.
c.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing
seam.
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
b.
2.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 82
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 233113
SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.2
A.
Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
Barometric relief dampers.
Manual volume dampers.
Control dampers.
Fire dampers.
Duct silencers.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounted access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Duct accessory hardware.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data.
Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless
otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
MATERIALS
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180).
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 83
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a
No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and No.4 finish for exposed ducts.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003,
Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for
exposed ducts.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063,
Temper T6.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches
(900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36
inches (900 mm).
BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS (Drawing Symbol B/D)
A. Construct dampers of aluminum. Join blades with a tie bar and mount shafts in bronze
bushings. Felt edges of blades for quiet operation.
B. Counterbalanced dampers shall be complete with ball bearings suitable for horizontal or
vertical mounting.
2.4
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS (Drawing Symbol V/D)
A. Single blade volume dampers for ducts up to maximum depth of 200mm and maximum
width of 1200mm.
B. Opposed multi-blade volume dampers for ducts, with maximum depth over 300mm or
width greater than 1,200mm , and ducts over 300mm diameter.
C. Material: Same as ductwork. Gauge: Minimum 18 gauge or 4 standard sizes heavier
than the duct metal gauge in which damper is installed. Fit dampers snugly into the duct
to provide shut-off. Bent edges at right angles to the shaft 90 degrees, bead blade or
brace as necessary to provide rigidity. Fit each damper with a locking type quadrant of
acceptable type and size.
D. Handle shall point in the direction of air flow with damper open, at right angles with the
damper closed. Where dampers are installed on insulated ducts, built out quadrant to
insulation thickness.
2.5
MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS (Drawing Symbol M/D).
A.
2.6
By Controls and Instrumentation Section
FIRE DAMPERS (Drawing Symbol F/D)
A. Dampers shall be listed and labeled.
B. Dampers installed in membrane forming part of a rated ceiling assembly shall be fire
stop flap design meeting code requirements.
C. Fire dampers shall be single blade, multi-blade or accordion type spring tension blade
design, rated for fire separation. Accordion type fire dampers shall maintain 100% free
duct area in ducts with air velocities of 6.0 m/s and over.
D. Provide 71oC fusible link conforming to ULC S505, chain and spring catch, for control of
dampers.
E. Dampers shall be of galvanized steel construction, except those installed in stainless
steel ductwork which shall be constructed of stainless steel.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.7
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 84
DUCT SILENCERS
A.
Standard of Acceptance: Vibro Acoustics, Kinetics Noise Control
B.
General Requirements:
1. Provide factory fabricated silencers as scheduled and specified.
2. Acoustical attenuation and air flow versus pressure drop performance shall be
substantiated by tests performed on silencers at an independent testing laboratory.
Supply performance data for all attenuators.
3. Cross-talk silencers shall be designed for installation in walls with a sound
transmission class rating of STC 50.
4. Provide all silencers with appropriate liners to minimize erosion of media.
C.
Design and Performance:
1. Silencers shall be duct or elbow type designed to attenuate equipment and fan
generated sound to maintain specified RC levels.
2. All parts of the silencers applied on supply air ductwork shall be internally insulated
to prevent excessive heat loss/gain or condensation.
3. Design and select silencer to suit available space. Submit shop drawings and design
data for review.
D.
Cross-talk, Duct and/or Casing Mounted Silencers
1. Unless noted otherwise, all metal parts shall be zinc coated. Outer casings of
attenuators shall be of galvanized sheet metal. Casing for rectangular units shall be
not lighter than 22 gauge. Seams of outer casings shall be lock formed and filled
with duct sealer, or continuously welded. Design interior partitions and baffles to
minimize aero-dynamic losses and shall be not lighter than 22 gauge galvanized
sheet steel. Perforations in the sheet metal forming cells and baffles shall not
exceed 3 mm diameter. Provide glass cloth backing between packing material and
perforated sheet metal to prevent erosion.
2. Construction of units, including those consisting of assemblies of modular units shall
be inherently airtight. Leak test at not less than 150 mm WG.
3. Acoustic media shall be “MoldBlock” media or approved equal containing 100%
natural cotton fibres treated with an EPA registered, non-toxic borate solution, flash
dried to provide resistance to mold, mildew and fungi. Media shall comply with
UL181 and NFPA90A.
4. Media, adhesives, sealers, and other accessory materials shall have fire ratings not
exceeding 25 for flame spread and 5O for smoked developed as determined in
accordance with ASTM E84.
5. Sound attenuators comprised of multiple modular units shall be free from air and
acoustic leaks. The assembly shall be rigid structure with girth angles to prevent
distortion of assembly in shipment. Edges of units shall not be field cut, formed, or
otherwise modified except for forming holes for fastenings. Connections between
attenuators and connecting ducts shall consist of companion angles, sealed to
prevent leakage. Modular units as shipped from the factory shall include all angles,
studs, and other attachments to connecting ducts. Silencers shall be so constructed
and installed that they will not vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure
variations. Mechanical fastenings which may loosen, such as nuts and bolts and
sheet metal screws, shall not be used in unit assemblies. Media, adhesives, sealers,
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 85
and other accessory materials shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame
spread and 5O for smoked developed as determined in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Provide galvanized sheet metal guide vanes in duct and/or casings upstream and
downstream of silencers in location of excessive air turbulence and as required to
achieve design air pressure drop across silencers and minimize system effects.
2.8
A.
B.
C.
2.9
A.
TURNING VANES
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel;
support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct
mounting.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support
in Elbows."
Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double
wall for larger dimensions.
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access
Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
b.
c.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
3.
A.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two
sash locks.
Access Doors up to [18 Inches (460 mm)] Square: Two hinges and two
sash locks.
Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Continuous hinges
and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
1.
2.
2.11
Double wall, rectangular.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for
duct pressure class.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and
cam latches.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm)
in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200OF (Minus 40 to plus 93OC).
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Non-insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate
supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.
3.
4.
A.
B.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa)
negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160OF (Minus 23 to plus 71OC).
Use acoustic type flexible ducts where called for on the drawings
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
2.12
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa)
negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s).
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210OF (Minus 29 to plus 99OC).
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polethylene vapor-barrier film.
1.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 86
Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and
of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
INSTALLATION
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible
to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct
liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with
nosing at hat channel.
1.
2.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Install galvanized steel volume dampers in galvanized steel ducts.
Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
Install fire dampers according to ULC listing.
Connect ducts to duct silencers rigidly.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and
maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
2.
Upstream of duct coils.
Upstream from duct filters.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
J.
K.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access
doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed
upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed
downstream from dampers.
Control devices requiring inspection.
Elsewhere as indicated.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L.
M.
N.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 87
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
END OF SECTION 233300
SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Diffusers.
Registers and Grilles
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
A.
Standard of Acceptance: Bird Archer, Culligan, Finnan, GE Betz, Specialty Chemical.
Diffusers and Grilles
General
1.
2.
Unless specified otherwise, finish all internal parts of grilles, registers and diffusers
with flat black paint.
Counter-sink screw holes at face of grilles, registers or diffusers to accept
recessed type screws.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
Diffuser Identification
1.
2.
3.
The following abbreviations are used hereinafter and on the drawings to identify
diffusers as to service involved and to indicate specific requirements for frames:
Diffusers shall distribute air in a throw pattern as shown on the drawings. Blank-off
active section of diffusers where shown on the drawings and as required to
accommodate obstructions affecting air distribution.
Diffusers of linear design shall be of length shown on the drawings. Take field
measurements as required before ordering. Where sectional installation is required
provide alignment devices without devices being visibly apparent.
a.
b.
C.
SD Supply air diffuser.
SDD Supply air diffuser with 100mm drop type frame.
Diffuser Types
1.
Type SD1
a.
b.
c.
D.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 88
Diffusers shall be of square face or round neck design with a minimum of
four louvred vane assemblies and adjustable air pattern. The inner vane
assemblies shall be removable without the use of tools for access to
accessories above. Diffusers shall be of aluminum construction. EH price
model ASCDA or equal.
Unless noted otherwise, diffusers used on inverted T-bar ceilings shall be
provided with a flat border frame so that the diffuser will neatly rest on the
inverted T-bar. Unless noted otherwise, provide diffusers for other than lay-in
ceiling tile, inverted T-bar applications with extended frame designed for
flush mounting and to overlap ceiling opening.
Unless noted otherwise, provide each diffuser with one multi-blade variable
position deflecting and equalizing grid. Install grid in diffuser neck with blades
positioned to provide optimal draft free air distribution at occupant positions.
Grilles and Registers Identification
1.
The following abbreviations are used hereinafter and on the drawing to identify
grilles and registers as to service involved.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
SG Supply air.
RG Return air grille.
EG Exhaust air grille.
TG Transfer air grille.
DG Door grille
SR Supply air register.
RR Return air register.
ER Exhaust air register.
Unless noted otherwise, provide grilles and registers used in inverted T-bar
ceilings with a flat border so that the grille or register will neatly rest on the inverted
T-bars. Provide grilles and registers for other than lay-in ceiling tile, inverted T-bar
applications with extended frame designed for flush mounting and to overlap
ceiling, floor or wall opening, except where abbreviations above are followed by an
R. These grilles and registers shall be provided with an extended mounting frame
designed to allow removal of the grille or register core without destroying the panel
seal and paint finish; e.g. SRG denotes supply grille with removable core type
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 89
extended mounted frame. Extended mounting frame shall be of material specified
for grille or register.
E.
Grille and Register Types
1.
Type SG1/SR1
a. Grilles and registers shall be of steel construction with double deflection
horizontal face blades and vertical rear blades. Deflection blades shall be of
stream line shape and individually adjustable. Blade depth shall equal or exceed
blade spacing. Blade spacing shall not exceed 20mm.
2.
Type RG1, RR1, RG2, RR2
a.
3.
Type TG3
a.
4.
Grilles shall be of extruded aluminum heavy duty pressed core
construction, c/w heavy duty extruded aluminum border with reinforcing
support bars, precision mitered corners, core is removable and supplied
with core clips, 12 mm wide spacing, and narrow face border. Base of
design: EH Price LBPH-15B c/w 125 narrow face border, 100mm width
(unless noted on drawings otherwise).
Type DG
a.
b.
c.
F.
Grilles shall be of extruded aluminum heavy duty pressed core
construction, c/w heavy duty extruded aluminum border with reinforcing
support bars, precision mitered corners, core is removable and supplied
with core clips, pencil proof spacing, and minimum 19mm flanged border.
Base of design: EH Price LBPH-25C c/w 750 flange border, 100mm width
(unless noted on drawingS otherwise).
Type TG4
a.
5.
Grilles and registers shall
be of aluminum construction with 12mm x
12mm x 12mm grid core dimensions providing minimum 90% free area.
Grilles used on non-ducted return air ceiling applications with inverted
T-bar ceilings may be without border frame specified elsewhere. T-bar to
support grid core shall be provided by other Division.
Coordinate with general trades and provide door grilles as shown on the
drawings equal to EH Price, STG series. Employ qualified tradesman for
door cutting and grille installation.
Width and height of door grilles shall be subject to Shop Drawing review.
Provide fire-rated door grille where noted with FD on drawings; door grille to
be equal to Nailor 61 DGD-FR.
Accessories
1.
2.
Provide accessories in conjunction with supply air diffusers, supply, return and
exhaust air grilles and registers as specified and/or on the drawings.
Integral opposed blade volume control dampers shall be key and gang- operated
type adjustable from register or diffuser face with removable key. Dampers shall
have spring tension or other positioning device to maintain positive blade setting
under all operating conditions. Opposed blade volume control dampers shall be
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
5.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 90
aluminum or steel and aluminum construction. Unless specified otherwise, finish
shall be matte black paint.
Where shown on drawings, provide multi- vane air deflecting devices at branch
duct take-offs serving registers and grilles. Each unit shall consist of a bank of
curved blades, secured to four heavy side rails, two top and two bottom, which in
turn are pivoted to the mounting frame. Air deflecting devices shall be rotary
operated by lever arm with lever arm and locking quadrant external to duct. Unless
specified otherwise, finish shall be matte black paint.
Multi-blade variable position deflecting and equalizing grids shall be of steel
construction. Unless specified otherwise, finish shall be matte black paint.
Where shown on drawings (hatch in diffuser), provide sectorizing baffle to create
required air pattern (block off hatched direction).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Install grilles, registers and diffusers in such a manner as to facilitate repeated
removals of same without damaging ceiling or wall construction and finish.
Apply opposed blade volume dampers integral with grilles to comprise registers.
Joints between each grille, register or diffuser and its components, connecting duct or
mounting surface shall be essentially airtight, using gasket or equivalent as required, to
prevent leakage of supply air return air plenums and to prevent air bypassing grille,
register or diffuser.
ADJUSTING
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
SECTION 233723 - HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS, LOUVRES AND CURBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
Roof hoods for Air Intake and Exhaust/Relief Outlets.
Goosenecks.
Louvres
Roof Curbs
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Structural Performance: Ventilators shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of ventilator components, noise or metal fatigue caused by
ventilator blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind
pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.
Seismic Performance: Ventilators to
Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration through unit to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: For gravity ventilators, roof . Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, ventilator attachments to curbs, and curb attachments to roof structure.
1.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing
water intrusion.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Roof framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 91
Structural members to which roof curbs and ventilators will be attached.
Sizes and locations of roof openings.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For ventilators, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
MATERIALS
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as
required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required
finish.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish.
Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined
materials.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
Factory or shop fabricate gravity ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
ROOF HOODS
Standard of Acceptance: Low profile construction, Greenheck Model Fabra Hood or
approved equal.
Provide air intakes with 25 mm thick disposable glassfibre filters in readily accessible
mounting frames arranged to be removable without lifting the hood assembly
Provide interior surfaces of exhaust/relief hoods with 25 mm thick neoprene coated
insulation to prevent condensation
Factory fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figures 6-6 and 6-7.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
E.
F.
G.
2.4
A.
B.
Materials: Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063’’ (1.6mm) thick base and 0.050’’ (1.27mm)
thick hood; suitably reinforced.
Bird Screening: Aluminum, ½-inch (12.7mm) square mesh, 0.063’’ (1.6mm) wire.
Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on the drawings.
GOOSENECKS
Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 6-5; with a minimum of 0.052’’ (1.3mm) thick, galvanizedsteel sheet.
Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch (12.7mm) square mesh, 0.063’’ (1.6mm) wire.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:
1.
2.
3.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants.
Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
according to ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic
coating to be applied over it.
Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is
indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat and an
overall minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
a.
C.
2.5
A.
B.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 92
Color and Gloss: To Architect’s approval.
Capacities and Characteristics: As shown on the drawings.
LOUVRES
Standard of Acceptance: EH Price, Nailor, Titus, Ventex.
Louvres shall be of aluminum construction, weatherproof, fixed blade design with
minimum 45% free area. Provide louvres with aluminum birdscreens 12 mm x 12 mm
mesh, frames, head and sill to suit the application. Finish of louvres shall be subject to
review and acceptance. Provide galvanized steel blank-off panels of double skin
construction with 50mm rigid fibre glass insulation sandwiched in between for unused
portions of louvres
ROOF CURBS
Standard of Acceptance: Thaler or TCDSB roofer approved.
Factory fabricated curbs: to be of same material as specified for air intakes and outlets.
Provide curbs with rigid fiberglass insulation, cant strips, nailing strips held in place by
metal wraps-around and select curb design to suit roof construction.
Provide extended base type curbs where required to meet clearances indicated.
Minimum clearance for air intake hoods measured from finished roof to intake shall be
450mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
INSTALLATION
Install gravity ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
Install goosenecks on curb base where throat size exceeds 9 by 9 inches (230 by 230
mm).
Install gravity ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 93
Label gravity ventilators according to requirements specified in Section 230553
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes
so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in
the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide
new units.
END OF SECTION 233723
SECTION 237313 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
Constant-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Unit dimensions and weight.
Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.
Fans:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
1.4
A.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-handling units, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
2.
A.
B.
1.6
Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
Filters with performance characteristics.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.
1.5
Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions
indicated.
Certified fan-sound power ratings.
Fan construction and accessories.
Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
A.
B.
1.7
A.
B.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 94
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems
and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual
equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Standard of Acceptance: As scheduled on the drawing, contact Mr. Alex Forsea (HTS)
@ (416) 661-3400.
UNIT CASINGS
General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.
Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.
Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
Casing Insulation and Adhesive:
1.
Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical
fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from, and
including, the cooling-coil section.
a.
b.
c.
2.
C.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging
liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing
leakage in cabinet.
Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated
with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous
mat or fabric depending on service-air velocity.
Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.
Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:
1.
2.
Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall and
insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.
Inspection and Access Panels:
a.
b.
c.
Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation.
Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure
differential.
Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling
unit's internal components.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
Access Doors:
a.
b.
4.
A.
A.
General Requirements for Coil Section:
General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:
3.
A.
B.
As scheduled on the drawings.
Filter Gage:
1.
2.
2.5
Comply with NFPA 90A.
Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum
efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access
doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out
from access plenum.
Disposable Panel Filters:
1.
C.
Comply with ARI 410.
Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance
and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).
AIR FILTRATION SECTION
1.
2.
B.
As shown on the drawings.
COIL SECTION
1.
2.
2.4
Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano
hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside.
Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.
Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
Locations and Applications:
a.
2.3
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 95
3-1/2’’ (90mm) diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case.
Range: 0 to 0.5-inch wg (0 to 125 Pa) Accessories: Static-pressure tips with
integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch (6mm) plastic tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent
valves.
CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
As scheduled on the drawings:
Heating Coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Piping Connections: Threaded, same end of coil.
Tube Material: Copper.
Fin Type: Plate or Spiral.
Fin Material: Aluminum
Headers:
a.
Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.
b.
Fabricated steel, with brazed joints, prime coated.
6.
7.
Frames: Channel frame, galvanized steel
Number of Rows: As scheduled on the drawings.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.6
A.
B.
C.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 96
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCAcertified sound ratings seal.
Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air
density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig (2070 kPa) according to ARI 410 and
ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Equipment Mounting:
1.
2.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
Install air-handling units as shown on the drawings.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices
specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
Suspended Units: Suspend and brace units from structural-steel support frame using
threaded steel rods and spring hangers.
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for
service and maintenance.
Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter
gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter
gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and
downstream of filters.
CONNECTIONS
Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible
connectors.
STARTUP SERVICE
Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to
achieve design conditions.
Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
Submit manufacturer approved start-up report for review upon completion.
END OF SECTION 237313
SECTION 238236 – FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes hydronic convectors and finned-tube radiation heaters.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.2
A.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 97
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
HOT-WATER FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
Standard of Acceptance: Engineered Air, Rosemex
Performance Ratings: Rate finned-tube radiation heaters according to Hydronics
Institute's "IBR Testing and Rating Standard for Finned-Tube (Commercial) Radiation."
Capacity and Performance Characteristics: As scheduled on the drawings.
General
1. For unit valves which are not accessible for servicing, provide readily removable
sections of enclosure panels for access to valves.
2. Metal surfaces of enclosures or cabinets shall have factory applied baked enamel
finish coat. Colour to architect’s approval. Submit colour sample with shop drawings.
3. Unless noted otherwise, capacities shown on the Drawings are based on 18oC
entering air temperature and 82oC/71oC entering and leaving water temperature.
E.
Finned Tube Units (Drawing Symbol Type “A”)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Heating Elements: Copper tube/aluminum fin.
Element Hangers - quiet operation, ball bearings, cradle type providing unrestricted
longitudinal movement during expansion and contraction. Enclosure brackets shall
support hangers on four centres maximum with element evenly spaced.
Provide expansion compensators as recommended by the unit manufacturer to
absorb expansion.
Enclosures for tube fins shall be wall to wall and of type as shown on the drawings
complete with end boxes, trim strips inside and outside where required. Enclosure
construction minimum 16 gauge.
Heating elements shall be single row unless required otherwise by available space.
Pipe double row elements in series.
Increase enclosure heights if required to obtain specified capacity.
Finned Tube Units (Drawing Symbol Type “B”)
1. Heating Elements: Copper tube/aluminum fin.
2. Element Hangers - quiet operation, ball bearings, cradle type providing unrestricted
longitudinal movement during expansion and contraction. Provide expansion
compensators as recommended by the unit manufacturer to absorb expansion.
3. Heating elements to be installed behind book shelves or benches as per drawings
(millwork by general trades).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATER INSTALLATION
Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.
Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.
Install access doors for access to valves.
Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall. Unit manufacturer shall take field
dimensions as required to ensure proper installation.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 98
Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are
indicated to extend to adjoining walls.
Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.
Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully
recessed unit.
Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.
Install two valves on each radiator and convector on hot water heating systems. One
valve shall be a hand operated ball valve and the other a ball valve with memory stop.
For units located in public areas, remove valve operator.
Unless shown otherwise, provide each unit, which is supplied by upfeed runouts with
easily accessible air vent. Where air vent is not easily accessible, extend vent through
enclosure cabinet for screw driver operation.
Provide units located below mains with air vents and drain valves. Pitch units to allow
air to vent to the air vent.
END OF SECTION 238236
SECTION 238239.13 – CABINET UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot-water coils.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
1.3
A.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Standard of Acceptance: Engineered Air, Rosemex
CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
Capacity: As scheduled on the drawings
a. Elements shall be of 15mm copper tubes with aluminum plate type fins and with
headers. Each element shall be provided with a screwdriver operated air vent valve.
b. Cabinets shall be designed for recessed, wall or ceiling mounting as shown on the
drawings and shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with zinc chromate finish with
inlet and outlet grille. Cabinet shall be provided with a prime coat of paint inside and
outside.
c. Unit shall be complete with motor, overload protection, minimum 2-speed controller
and centrifugal fans. Speed controller shall be mounted within the cabinet and be
easily accessible through an access panel in the front panel.
d. Concealed mounted units shall have removable front panel to allow full access to
motor, fans and controls.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 99
e. Indicated unit capacities shall be met on low speed operation.
f. Unless noted on drawings, capacities scheduled on the drawings are based on
15.5OC EAT, 80OC EWT, 20OC differential temperature, low speed operation. Max.
WPD not to exceed 12 kPa at rated capacity.
g. Electric supply: 120/1/60
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
ELECTRIAL WIRING
This Division (controls) shall provide temperature controls, starters and electrical wiring
including power wiring from power supply termination points (junction boxes) as shown
on the electrical drawings.
END OF SECTION 238239.13
SECTION 230993.11 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC
1
Part One: General
.1
References
.1
.2
Work Included
.1
.2
.3
Submit shop drawings for the following:
.1
Control diagram complete with all wiring layouts. Wiring diagrams
shall identify interface wiring connections.
.2
Motorized damper.
.3
Control valves.
.4
As outlined in the Building Automation System (BAS) section.
Part Two: Products
.1
3
Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required to complete
the Controls and Instrumentation work of the Mechanical Division in accordance with the specifications and/or drawings.
Electrical wiring required in conjunction with the building automation and
energy management system as specified.
Submittals
.1
2
Comply with the Electrical Division specifications, and the Toronto Catholic
School Board Control Specification 239994.
Refer to appropriate sections.
Part Three: Execution
A. Installation and Responsibility
.1
All equipment shall be supplied and installed by a single contractor (refer to
Section 239994, item 1.5) who shall be responsible for the operation of the
whole system.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 100
B. Electrical Wiring
.1
.2
.3
Except as otherwise specified or shown herein, this Section shall provide all electrical wiring, transformer, relays and control components in conjunction with thermostats including interface wiring into motor starter circuits.
Provide all work specified under the BAS section.
Provide electrical work specified under the following articles:
.1
.2
Cabinet Unit Heaters (section 238239.13)
Air handling units (section 237313)
C. Termination
.1
.2
Electrical Division will make provision for and/or terminate power wiring for equipment to be wired by this Section in suitable receptacle, outlet box, disconnect
switch etc. as shown and/or specified in the electrical documents. This Section
shall provide breakers and/or control components including control voltage transformers including all wiring as required to complete the system(s).
Run wiring in approved Wiremold where existing walls are block construction.
D. Interlocking
.1
.2
E.
This section shall interwire fans, pumps, equipment, components, etc,. to provide
sequences and operation specified and/or shown.
This Section shall arrange and pay for all necessary changes from capacities and
sizes of control transformers specified and/or shown on Division 16 drawings.
Building Automation System (BAS)
.1 General
.1
.2
Refer to Specification 239994 Part 1, General.
Building Automation System (BAS) Contractor shall provide:




.3
A fully integrated new building automation system to Toronto Catholic
District School Board (TCDSB) standards as per specified and
specification .
All electrical wiring to each stand-alone Application Specific Controller and
DDC Controller. Pick up power from termination points provided by
Electrical Division as shown on the electrical drawings. Include for
breakers.
Incorporate surge transient protection in the design of system to protect
electrical components in all DDC Controllers, Application Specific
Controllers and operator's workstations.
All wiring, conduit, piping, installation, materials, supervision and labor including calibration, commissioning software programming and data base
generation, dynamic graphic generation and additional work necessary to
provide a complete and fully operating system to the approval of the Consultant.
The mechanical contractor shall provide:

Install wells and openings for water monitoring devices, flow switches and
alarms furnished by BAS Contractor.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition

F.
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 101
Install control devices, alarms, monitoring devices, control valves and
motorized dampers furnished by the BAS Contractor.
Control Sequence Description
1.
General
a. Unless otherwise specified, dampers and valves shall return to the "NO" or "NC"
positions as specified, when respective system supply fans or pumps are stopped.
b. Supply and install all step-down transformers from line voltage to 24 V as required.
c. Sensors which are shown wall mounted shall have wiring concealed in wall construction.
d. Where practical, sensors mounted on columns or poured concrete construction
shall have wiring or tubing concealed up to ceiling above.
e. Sensors shall be mounted 1500 mm from floor to centre unless shown otherwise.
f. Duct mounted devices shall be mounted on panels with bases plumb and level.
Duct panels shall be dampened to eliminate detrimental vibration.
g. Local control panels shall be mounted in accessible convenient wall locations within Mechanical Rooms.
h. Co-operate with the Air Balancing and Testing Specialist and make all necessary
adjustments to controls requested by him to provide performance specified with
regard to system balance, verification of air flows at air volume control terminals.
i. Provide status indication of equipment to TCDSB Standards.
j. Provide user temperature adjustment and occupied override features at space
temperature sensors to TCDSB standard.
k. Schedule equipment operation as directed by the Owner. Provide occupied/unoccupied and setback controls according to the TCDSB’s energy conservation
standards.
2.
Constant Volume Single Zone System with Supplementary Hot Water
Heating Convectors. Typical for AHU1 and AHU2 (Refer to Control
Schematics on Drawing M4)
a. The unit shall be started and stopped by the BAS based on a time of day schedule as directed by the TCDSB.
b. Heating during unoccupied periods is provided by the hot water convectors. To
conserve energy, the ventilation system should operate only during occupancy or
warm-up periods.
c. A room temperature sensor shall via DDC loop control sequentially modulate the
2-way valves at the hot water heating radiation and reset the supply air temperature of the air handling unit to maintain setpoint.
d. The supply air temperature sensor shall via DDC loop control sequentially modulate the free cooling dampers with the 3-way hot water heating coil valve to maintain a setpoint of 22 degC (for optimum energy efficiency the supply air setpoint
should match the space temperature setpoint).
e. A low limit mixed air temperature sensor via DDC loop control shall prevent the
temperature at the point of sensing from falling below 6 degC and maintain a plenum temperature of 20 degC by modulating the heating coil when the unit is shutdown.
f. Set minimum outdoor air ventilation position at free cooling dampers so that 40%
of outdoor air is introduced during occupancy. Note that excessive space pressurization is prevented by a gravity relief hood with counter balanced backdraft
dampers.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 102
g. Provide a freeze protection thermostat in the fan discharge air to shut down the
system when the temperature is below 2 degC. Provide a remote freezestat reset
function via BAS.
h. When the ambient temperature is below 0 degC, a water temperature sensor
sensing on the leaving heating coil side shall shut down the system and alarm at
the operator’s console if the temperature falls below 10 degC with the coil circulating pump operating.
i. When the ambient temperature is below 2 degC and the system is scheduled
ON, the heating coil circulating pump shall operate to maintain full flow through
the coil for freeze protection. Pump failure shall alarm at the operator’s console.
j. When the room is occupied, set minimum outdoor air ventilation at 10%. A CO2
sensor sensing in the return air shall signal the ac-unit controller to increase outdoor air ventilation to maintain a CO2 level of 700 ppm maximum. The signal shall
be overridden when the supply air temperature drops below 8OC and when the unit
operates in enthalpy mode
k. Monitor air filter pressure drop.
l. Provide humidity sensors to monitor indoor and outdoor humidity level.
m. Warm-up Mode
.1
Use OFF Hour temperature setback controls and morning warm up to
TCDSB standards by operating the system in recirculating mode with the
convectors at maximum output and the supply air temperature at an operator adjustable 40 degC. During warm-up operation, the outdoor air damper
shall be closed.
n. System Point Summary
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
3.
Outdoor air temperature
Space temperature
Supply air dry bulb temperature
Low limit mixed air temperature
Leaving heating coil water temperature
Freeze stat reset control
Air filter pressure drop alarm
Minimum outdoor air ventilation setting
Stop/start supply fan
Supply fan status
Coil circulating pump start/stop
Coil circulating pump status
Feedback for each damper
Feedback for control valve
Return air temperature
Return air CO2
Return air Humidity
Outdoor humidity
Outdoor air enthalpy
Point Type
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
BO
BI
AO
BO
AI
BO
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
Typical Cabinet Unit Heater Control
a. Space temperature sensor via DDC control loop shall modulate the 2-way valve
and cycle the fan to maintain set point.
b. System Point Summary
Point Type

Room temperature
AI
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition



4.
Control valve
Unit fan start/stop
Unit fan status (current sensor)
Division 23 HVAC Specifications
Page 103
AO
BO
AI
Washrooms Exhaust Fan (EF1-4)
a. Exhaust fan runs on a time-of-day schedule defined by the Operator.
b. System Point Summary
Point Type
 Fan start/stop
BO
 Fan status (current sensor)
AI
5.
Occupancy Control
a. Building Automation Contractor to wire to 24V AC signal from power pack (complete with built-in SPDT relay) serving motion sensor in each of two control zones
(Kindergartens 108 and 109); the sensor and power pack will be supplied and installed by Division 16 and located on the room ceiling as per the electrical drawings. Building Automation Contractor to wire to each sensor for control of each
air handling unit (AHU) during ‘UNOCCUPIED’ initiated by motion sensors while
the air handling unit is scheduled ON, times as follows:

6.
Maintain space temperature setpoint during the heating season.
Lighting control
a. Provide lighting control for the outdoor lighting zone c/w one AI/DO for this zone.
b. 120V photocell will be provided by Electrical Division plus contactor adjacent to
panel PP’D’ in Storage 132. Building Automation Contractor to wire to contactor
and photocell (provide relay if required) as required to control exterior lighting circuit.
c. Schedule lighting control as directed by the TDCSB including security alarm conditions.
d. Connect common signal to multiple sensors and relays as shown on the electrical
drawings; coordinate with electrical contractor.
End of Section 230993.11
End of Division 23
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.0 Section Includes
1.1 General
1.2 Approved Control Systems
1.3 Description
1.4 Demolition Work and General Intent
1.5 Quality Assurance
1.6 Codes and Standards
1.7 System Performance
1.8 Submittals
1.9 Project Record Documents
1.10 Warranty
1.11 Ownership of Proprietary Material
1.12 Definitions
1
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed
by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEMS
.1 The following are approved control system suppliers, manufacturers, and product lines:
Manufacturer
Software
Front-End Controller
Field Controllers
Automated Logic Control
WebCTRL
WebCTRL
ME, M, SE and ZN lines
Distech
Tridium Niagara
EC-BOS 7
ECB Series
Honeywell
Tridium Niagara
WEBax 700
Spyder
Johnson Controls
Tridium Niagara
FX70
FX Series
Johnson Controls
Johnson Controls
NAE45/55
FEC Series
.2
1.3
1.4
The above list is alphabetical and does not indicate preference. Inclusion on this list
does not guarantee acceptance of products or installation. Control systems shall
comply with the terms of this specification
.3
The Contractor shall use only operator workstation software, controller software,
custom application programming language, and controllers from the corresponding
manufacturer and product line unless Owner approves use of multiple manufacturers.
DESCRIPTION
.1
General: The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of
DDC controllers, a control system server and an operator workstation.
.2
Furnish and install a personal computer (PC) operator workstation able to access the
system through a conventional web browser connected to the network. The operator
workstation shall be as described in section 2.3.4. The PC shall allow operators to
interface with system via dynamic color graphics, depict each mechanical system and
building floor plan by a point-and-click graphic.
.3
The system shall directly control HVAC equipment as detailed on the drawings
including the Sequence of Control and Points List. Each zone controller shall provide
occupied and unoccupied modes of operation by individual zone. Furnish energy
conservation features such as optimal start and stop, night setback, request-based
logic, and demand level adjustment of setpoints as specified in Appendix A.
.4
Provide for future system expansion to include monitoring of occupant card access, fire
alarm, and lighting control systems.
.5
System shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the operator workstation or
web server and for communication between control modules. Schedules, setpoints,
trends, and alarms specified in Section 239994 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation)
shall be BACnet objects.
DEMOLITION WORK AND GENERAL INTENT
.1
Refer to drawings and specifications.
.2
Include all computer hardware and software, operator input/output communication
devices, standalone digital system controllers, communication interface to digital
system controllers and field sensors and control devices required to meet specified
performance.
2
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.3
1.5
1.6
1.7
Include all wiring, conduit, piping, installation, materials, supervision and labor including
calibration, commissioning software programming and data base generation, dynamic
graphic generation and additional work necessary to provide a complete and fully
operating system to the approval of the Consultant.
.4
Controls sub-contractor shall coordinate with the electrical sub-contractor the location
of junction boxes from which power to the controls equipment will be provided. The
over-all responsibility for providing and coordinating power supply to the controls
equipment rests with the mechanical contractor in his capacity as general contractor.
.5
The control system shall be installed by the control subcontractor but as an integral
part of the mechanical sub-contract. The systems shall be installed by competent
control mechanics and electricians regularly employed by the control sub-contractor
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications
.1
Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System
Manufacturer.
.2
Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's
control system training. Upon request, Installer shall present record of
completed training including course outlines.
CODES AND STANDARDS
.1
Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local, state,
and federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a
minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions in effect 30 days prior to
receipt of bids of the following codes:
.1
National Electric Code (NEC)
.2
International Building Code (IBC)
 Section 719 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings
 Section 907 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
 Section 909 Smoke Control Systems
.3
Division 15 Mechanical
.4
International Mechanical Code (IMC)
.5
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004: Data Communication Protocol for Building
Automation and Control Systems (BACNET)
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1
Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards
over network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's
recommended hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for
web-based systems).
.1
Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current
data within 10 sec.
.2
Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current
data within 8 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.
.3
Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or
tuning points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh
within 6 sec.
.4
Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2
sec. Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.
3
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.5
Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at
the workstation within 15 sec.
.6
Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be
capable of running as often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times
consistent with the mechanical process under control.
.7
Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute
DDC PID control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select
execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
.8
Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on the network shall receive
alarms within 5 sec of other workstations.
.9
Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end
accuracy listed in Table 1.
.10
Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable
at setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.
Table 1 - Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable
Reported Accuracy
Space Temperature
±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Ducted Air
±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Outside Air
±1.0ºC (±2ºF)
Dew Point
±1.5ºC (±3ºF)
Water Temperature
±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Delta-T
±0.15ºC (±0.25ºF)
Relative Humidity
±5% RH
Water Flow
±2% of full scale
Airflow (terminal)
±10% of full scale (see Note 1)
Airflow (measuring stations)
±5% of full scale
Airflow (pressurized spaces)
±3% of full scale
Air Pressure (ducts)
±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)
Air Pressure (space)
±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)
Water Pressure
±2% of full scale (see Note 2)
Electrical (A, V, W, Power Factor)
±1% of reading (see Note 3)
Carbon Monoxide (CO)
±5% of reading
Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
±50 ppm
Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10% - 100% of scale
Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure
Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters
Table 2 - Control Stability and Accuracy
Controlled Variable
Control Accuracy
Range of Medium
±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.)
0-1.5 kPa (0-6 in. w.g.)
Air Pressure
±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)
-25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)
Airflow
±10% of full scale
Space Temperature
±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)
Duct Temperature
±1.0ºC (±2ºF)
4
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
Humidity
Fluid Pressure
1.8
±5% RH
±7 kPa (±1.0 psi)
±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.)
MPa (1-150 psi)
0-12.5 kPa (0-50 in. w.g.) differential
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide three copies of shop drawings and other submittals on hardware, software,
and equipment to be installed or furnished. Drawings should be 11” x 17” prints.
.2
Provide submittals within 6 weeks of contract award
.3
Begin no work until submittals have been approved for conformity with design intent.
.4
Provide drawings using AutoCAD 2006 (or newer) in following formats: original, pdf
and print.
.5
Submittal approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient
quantities to complete work.
.6
Provide submittals on the following:
.1
Product Submittals. Clearly indicate applicable data on manufacturer's
cutsheets by highlighting or by other means. General catalogs shall not be
accepted as cut sheets to fulfill submittal requirements. Select and show
submittal quantities appropriate to scope of work.
.2
Network Architecture. Riser diagrams showing control network layout,
connections to all network devices, communication protocols, network speeds
and wire types. Include schematic diagrams of control, communication, and
power wiring for central system installation. Show interface wiring to control
system.
.3
Schematics. Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label all control
points with point names. Graphically show locations of control elements.
.4
Floor plan schematic diagrams indicating field sensor and controller locations.
.5
Valve Schedule. Indicate system and device designation, product name,
manufacturer, and model numbers (both valve and actuator), quantities, sizes,
Cv (design and actual), pressure drop, close-off pressure, configuration, ports,
and line sizes of each supplied valve and existing control valve.
.6
Damper Schedule. Indicate system and device designation, product name,
manufacturer, size, and model numbers (both damper and actuator) of each
supplied damper/actuator and existing control damper/actuator.
.7
Room and Equipment Schedules. Indicate controller type, address, model
number, object names, setpoints, and room location.
.8
Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each
control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.
.9
Manufacturer's description and technical data such as performance curves,
product specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for items
listed below and for relevant items not listed below:
 Direct digital controllers (controller panels)
 Transducers and transmitters
 Sensors (include accuracy data)
 Actuators
 Valves
 Relays and switches
5
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
1.8
 Control panels
 Power supplies
 Batteries
 Operator interface equipment
 Wiring
.10
Complete description of control system operation including sequences of
operation and points-lists for each control system. Include and reference
schematic diagram of controlled system. List I/O points and software points
specified in Section 239994. Indicate alarmed and trended points.
.11
Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers.
.12
Schematic wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control elements
and terminals. Where a control element is also shown on control system
schematic, use the same name.
.13
Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used in Section
239994 Article 3.17 (Control System Demonstration and Acceptance).
.14
BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each
submitted type of controller and operator interface.
.7
Schedules
.1
Construction Schedule of work provided within one month of contract award,
indicating:
 Intended sequence of work items
 Start date of each work item
 Duration of each work item
 Planned delivery dates for ordered material and equipment and
expected lead times
 Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or
situations
.2
Monthly written status reports indicating work completed and revisions to
expected delivery dates. Include updated schedule of work.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
.1
Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion of installation for
approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist of:
.1
As-built versions of submittal shop drawings should be 11” x 17” prints.
Provide drawings using AutoCAD 2006 (or newer) in following formats:
original, pdf and print.
.2
Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of
reports, checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Section
239994 Article 3.17 (Control System Demonstration and Acceptance).
.3
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online
help documentation of the following:
 As-built versions of submittal product data.
 Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors
and service representatives for equipment and control systems.
 Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems:
logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports,
6
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.4
1.10
trending data, overriding computer control, and changing setpoints
and variables.
 Programming manual or set of manuals with description of
programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and
calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of
program creation and modification, and of editor use.
 Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals
that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other
hardware; how to perform preventive maintenance and calibration;
how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace
hardware.
 Documentation of programs created using custom programming
language including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object
database. Electronic copies of programs shall meet this requirement
if control logic, setpoints, tuning parameters, and objects can be
viewed using furnished programming tools.
 Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media.
 List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
 Complete
original-issue
documentation,
installation,
and
maintenance information for furnished third-party hardware including
computer equipment and sensors.
 Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including
operating systems, custom programming language, operator
workstation or web server software, and graphics software.
 Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and
systems.
 Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system
components, including schedule of tasks such as inspection,
cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.
Training Materials:
 Provide course outline and materials for each class at least six
weeks before first class.
 Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions, computerbased training, or web-based training.
 Consultant will modify course outlines and materials if necessary to
meet Owner's needs.
 Consultant will review and approve course outlines and materials at
least three weeks before first class.
 Training shall be provided on an on-going basis at the request of the
Owner with a maximum of two 8 hour sessions per year.
WARRANTY
Warrant work as follows:
.1
Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a period
of 24 months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty period
shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to
7
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
1.11
1.12
Owner. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of Owner's warranty
service request.
.2
Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives beneficial use due to
early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase
contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period.
.3
If Consultant determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the end
of final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, Consultant will certify in writing that
control system operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms
of this specification. Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period.
.4
Provide updates to operator workstation software, project-specific software, graphic
software, database software, and firmware that resolve software deficiencies at no
charge for a period of five years from acceptance date. Do not install updates or
upgrades without Owner's written authorization.
.5
Reprograming and recommissioning of controllers & programs as required when
advised by board staff (including reprogramming due to revisions and complete rewrites of sequence of operations).
.6
Exception: Contractor shall not be required to warrant reused devices except those that
have been rebuilt or repaired. Installation labor and materials shall be warranted.
Demonstrate operable condition of reused devices at time of Engineer's acceptance.
OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL
Project-specific software and documentation shall become Owner's property. This includes,
but is not limited to:
.1
Graphics
.2
Record drawings / Documentation
.3
Database
.4
Application programming code (Two copies and two licenses of Engineering (Program)
Tool)
.5
Licensed copy of Web supervisor software for main server
.6
Limitless quantity of authenticated users and limitless quantity of authenticated
simultaneous users.
DEFINITIONS
Term
BACnet Interoperability
Building Blocks (BIBB)
Definition
A BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is
needed to perform a particular task. BIBBS are combined to build
the BACnet functional requirements for a device in a specification.
BACnet/BACnet Standard
BACnet communication requirements as defined by the latest
version of ASHRAE/ANSI 135 and approved addenda.
Control Systems Server
A computer(s) that maintain(s) the systems configuration and
programming database.
Controller
Intelligent stand-alone control device. Controller is a generic
reference to building controllers, custom application controllers, and
application specific controllers.
Direct Digital Control
Microprocessor-based control including Analog/Digital conversion
and program logic.
8
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
Term
Gateway
Definition
Bi-directional protocol translator connecting control systems that use
different communication protocols.
Local Area Network
Computer or control system communications network limited to local
building or campus.
Master-Slave/Token Passing
Point-to-Point
Primary Controlling LAN
Data link protocol as defined by the BACnet standard.
Serial communication as defined in the BACnet standard.
High speed, peer-to-peer controller LAN connecting BCs and
optionally AACs and ASCs. Refer to System Architecture below.
Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statement
A written document that identifies the particular options specified by
BACnet that are implemented in a device.
Router
Wiring
A device that connects two or more networks at the network layer.
Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
9
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.0 Section Includes
2.1 Materials .
2.2 Communication.
2.3 Operator Interface .
2.4 Connection to the TCDSB Wide Area Network (WAN).
2.5 TCDSB Central Server.
2.6 Heating Plant Low Temperature Alarm
2.7 Local Service Ports
2.8 Controller Software.
2.9 Controllers
2.10 Power Supplies and Line Filtering
2.11 Auxiliary Control Devices
2.12 Fiber Optic Cable System
2.13 Wiring and Raceways
10
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
.1
Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in
new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly
approved in writing by Owner. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after
completion of this contract.
COMMUNICATION
.1
Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall
comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication
shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet.
.2
Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable
control network.
.3
Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop
computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and
other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.
.4
Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork
architecture.
.1
An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to
interface with each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller
information such as data, status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and
editable from each internetwork controller.
.2
Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across
multiple controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork.
Program and test all cross-controller links required to execute control strategies
specified in Section 239994 Appendix A. An authorized operator shall be able
to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object address or by using a
point-and-click interface.
.5
Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service.
System shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operatordesignated controller via the internetwork. If applicable, system shall automatically
adjust for daylight saving and standard time.
.6
System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with
additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring.
OPERATOR INTERFACE
.1
Operator Interface. Workstation shall reside on high-speed network with building
controllers. Each workstation shall be able to access all system information.
.2
Communication. workstation and controllers shall communicate using BACnet protocol.
Workstation and control network backbone shall communicate using ISO 8802-3
(Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing as specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex J.
.3
Portable Operator's Terminal. Provide all necessary software, licenses and hardware
(e.g. bluetooth dongle) to configure a PC laptop computer for use as a Portable
Operator's Terminal. Operator shall be able to connect configured Terminal to the
system network or directly to each controller for programming, setting up, and
troubleshooting. Physical laptop need not be provided. Licenses should be valid for at
least the duration of the warranty period.
.4
BACnet. Web server or workstation shall have demonstrated interoperability during at
least one BMA Interoperability Workshop and shall substantially conform to BACnet
11
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.5
.6
12
Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device profile as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001,
BACnet Annex L.
Operator Workstation
.1
Hardware. Each workstation shall consist of the following:
 Computer. Industry-standard hardware shall meet or exceed DDC
system manufacturer's recommended specifications and shall meet
response times specified in Section 239994 Paragraph 1.9.
 Hard disk shall have sufficient memory to store system software,
one year of data for trended points specified in Appendix A, and a
system database at least twice the size of the existing database at
system acceptance.
 Configure computers and network connections if multiple computers
are required to meet specified memory and performance.
 Web server or workstations shall be Dell (TCDSB Standard) PCs
with a minimum of:
 Dual or Quad Core Processor
 4 GB RAM
 500 GB hard disk providing data at 3.0 Gb/sec
 16x DVD-RW drive
 Wireless Keyboard & Mouse
 24-inch 24-bit color LCD monitor with at least 1680 x 1050
resolution
 Serial, parallel, and network communication ports and
cables required for proper system operation
.2
Software
 Operating System. Workstation shall have an industry-standard
professional-grade operating system. Acceptable systems include
Windows 7.
Graphics
.1
System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall
include at least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics
for each chilled water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize
conditions on each floor of each building included in this contract.
 Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system
status, to view a summary of the most important data for each
controlled zone or piece of equipment, to use point-and-click
navigation between zones or equipment, and to edit setpoints and
other specified parameters.
 Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different
image files for changed object status.
 Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition
using color or other visual indicator.
 Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such
as BMP, JPEG, PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be
viewable on browsers compatible with World Wide Web Consortium
browser standards. Web graphic format shall require no plug-in
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.7
13
(such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only require widely available
no-cost plug-ins (such as Active-X and Macromedia Flash).
System Tools. System shall provide the following functionality to authorized operators
as an integral part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software programs. If
furnished as part of the interface, the tool shall be available from each workstation
interface. If furnished as a stand-alone program, software shall be installable on
standard workstation PCs with no limit on the number of copies that can be installed
under the system license.
.1
Automatic System Database Configuration. Each workstation shall store on its
hard disk a copy of the current system database, including controller firmware
and software. Stored database shall be automatically updated with each system
configuration or controller firmware or software change.
.2
Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download memory
from the system database to each controller.
.3
System Configuration. Operators shall be able to configure the system.
.4
Online Help. Context-sensitive online help for each tool shall assist operators in
operating and editing the system.
.5
Security. System shall require a user name and password to view, edit, add, or
delete data.
 Operator Access. Each user name and password combination shall
define accessible viewing, editing, adding, and deleting functions in
each system application, editor, and object.
 Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no
keyboard or mouse activity is detected. Operators shall be able to
adjust automatic log out delay.
 Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including
operator passwords in an encrypted format. System shall not display
operator passwords.
.6
System Diagnostics. System shall automatically monitor controller and I/O point
operation. System shall annunciate controller failure and I/O point locking
(manual overriding to a fixed value).
.7
Alarms
 Alarm Processing. System input and status objects shall be
configurable to alarm on departing from and on returning to normal
state. Operator shall be able to enable or disable each alarm and to
configure alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm states, and
alarm reactions for each system object. Configure and enable alarm
points as specified in Section 239994 Appendix A (Sequences of
Operation). Alarms shall be BACnet alarm objects and shall use
BACnet alarm services.
 Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use an English language
descriptor without acronyms or mnemonics to describe alarm
source, location, and nature.
 Alarm Reactions. Operator shall be able to configure (by object)
actions workstation or web server shall initiate on receipt of each
alarm. As a minimum, workstation or web server shall be able to log,
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.8
.9
.10
.11
14
print, start programs, display messages, send e-mail, send page,
and audibly annunciate.
 Alarm Maintenance. Operators shall be able to view system alarms
and changes of state chronologically, to acknowledge and delete
alarms, and to archive closed alarms to the workstation or web
server hard disk from each workstation or web browser interface.
Object and Property Status and Control. Operator shall be able to view, and to
edit if applicable, the status of each system object and property by menu, on
graphics, or through custom programs.
Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to
print reports and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in a format
accessible by standard spreadsheet and word processing programs.
 Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports:
 Objects. System objects and current values filtered by object
type, by status (in alarm, locked, normal), by equipment, by
geographic location, or by combination of filter criteria.
 Alarm Summary. Current alarms and closed alarms. System
shall retain closed alarms for an adjustable period.
 Logs. System shall log the following to a database or text file and
shall retain data for an adjustable period:
 Alarm History.
 Trend Data. Operator shall be able to select trends to be logged.
 Operator Activity. At a minimum, system shall log operator log in
and log out, control parameter changes, schedule changes,
and alarm acknowledgment and deletion. System shall date
and time stamp logged activity.
Graphics
 Graphics Generation. Graphically based tools and documentation
shall allow Operator to edit system graphics, to create graphics, and
to integrate graphics into the system. Operator shall be able to add
analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation
files to a background graphic using a mouse.
 Graphics Library. Complete library of standard HVAC equipment
graphics shall include equipment such as chillers, boilers, air
handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. Library shall
include standard symbols for other equipment including fans,
pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. Library graphic
file format shall be compatible with graphics generation tools.
Custom Application Programming. Operator shall be able to create, edit, debug,
and download custom programs. System shall be fully operable while custom
programs are edited, compiled, and downloaded. Programming language shall
have the following features:
 Language. Language shall be graphically based and shall use
function blocks arranged in a logic diagram that clearly shows
control logic flow. Function blocks shall directly provide functions
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.8
15
listed below, and operators shall be able to create custom or
compound function blocks.
 Programming Environment. Tool shall provide a full-screen, cursorand-mouse-driven programming environment that incorporates word
processing features such as cut and paste. Operators shall be able
to insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code, and to
copy blocks of code to a file library for reuse in other control
programs.
 Independent Program Modules. Operator shall be able to develop
independently executing program modules that can disable, enable
and exchange data with other program modules.
 Debugging and Simulation. Operator shall be able to step through
the program observing intermediate values and results. Operator
shall be able to adjust input variables to simulate actual operating
conditions. Operator shall be able to adjust each step's time
increment to observe operation of delays, integrators, and other
time-sensitive control logic. Debugger shall provide error messages
for syntax and for execution errors.
 Conditional Statements. Operator shall be able to program
conditional logic using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and
relational (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL)
comparisons.
 Mathematical Functions. Language shall support floating-point
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root
operations, as well as absolute value calculation and programmatic
selection of minimum and maximum values from a list of values.
 Variables: Operator shall be able to use variable values in program
conditional statements and mathematical functions.
 Time Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined
variables to represent time of day, day of the week, month of
the year, and date. Other predefined variables or simple
control logic shall provide elapsed time in seconds, minutes,
hours, and days. Operator shall be able to start, stop, and
reset elapsed time variables using the program language.
 System Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined
variables to represent status and results of Controller Software
and shall be able to enable, disable, and change setpoints of
Controller Software as described in Controller Software
section
Operator Functions. Operator interface shall allow each authorized operator to execute
the following functions as a minimum:
.1
Point-and-click Navigation. Operator interface shall be graphically based and
shall allow operators to access graphics for equipment and geographic areas
using point-and-click navigation.
.2
View and Configure Trends. Operators shall be able to view a trend graph of
each trended point and to edit graph configuration to display a specific time
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
period or data range. Operator shall be able to create custom trend graphs to
display on the same page data from multiple trended points.
CONNECTION TO THE TCDSB WIDE AREA NETWORK (WAN)
.1
Advise the TCDSB representative of the proposed location of the system
router/gateway panel within the facility The controls vendor shall Provide a
communication cable (RJ45) between the BAS Controller and the schools HUB under
the TCDSB supervision and comply with the Board standard and he shall connect the
BAS to the TCDSB server and WAN and confirm that network access to the BAS has
been established.
.2
Submit the proposed site-specific BAS network wiring diagram to the Consultant for
approval. The use of field installed hubs/switches is not allowed under any
circumstances.
TCDSB CENTRAL SERVER
.1
New site databases and graphics files shall be installed on and integrated to the
designated central TCDSB central server located at 80 Sheppard Ave. East, Toronto.
.2
Provide written notification to the TCDSB representative prior to installing new site
databases to the TCDSB server. Do not install software or make any changes to the
server without the written consent of the TCDSB representative.
.3
Set up and configure the server software and area routers (where required) to allow for
seamless access to the site BAS via the TCDSB WAN.
.4
Coordinate all activities related to the central server with the TCDSB representatives.
Provide the TCDSB with detailed documentation related to any changes made to the
server software, settings or protocols.
.5
Supply and install on the TCDSB central server, the latest version of server software
available from the manufacturer. Ensure server license is valid for at least the duration
of the warranty period.
.6
Provide all services required to fully integrate the new installation at the school with the
TCDSB central server.
HEATING PLANT LOW TEMPATURE ALARM
.1
Provide separate digital output (DO) for alarm annunciation via dry contact on relay to
security panel for each primary heating plant on heating failure
.1
Provide wiring from relay (terminated at relay) to security panel (un-terminated
at security panel)
.2
TCDSB staff to terminate wiring in security panel
.2
Alarm contact to make only when all 4 of the following conditions are met
(programming and set-points to be adjustable):
.1
Outside temperature is below 5 degrees C
.2
Heating Season is active (between October 1 and April 1)
.3
All boilers in heating plant are in flame failure
.4
Primary Return Temperature is below 30 degrees C
LOCAL SERVICE PORTS
.1
Every DDC panel shall be provided with a local network access port to connect to
laptop computer. A user connected to the local access port shall have the same level
of system access and functionality as being connected to the site workstation PC.
.2
Where BAS points (4 or more) are located in a mechanical room that does not have a
local BAS panel installed, a remote network access port shall be provided. The access
16
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
2.8
port shall be installed in a hinged metal enclosure with key-lock set and lamicoid ID
label.
.3
Main Server LAN connection. Provide LAN connection for Main server and for primary
user interface/workstation (if not in same room) in the Maintenance Office. Include
outlets, cabling (CAT-5E or to match existing) and conduit and route back to main LAN
room.
.4
Additional LAN connections. Provide one LAN connection in each mechanical room
and boiler room to allow connection for a Portable Operator Terminal. Include outlets,
cabling (CAT-5E or to match existing) and conduit and route back to main LAN room.
CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
.1
Building and energy management application software shall reside and operate in
system controllers. Applications shall be editable through operator workstation, web
browser interface, or engineering workstation.
.2
Scheduling. See (View and Adjust Operating Schedules Paragraph). System shall
provide the following schedule options as a minimum:
.1
Weekly. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule
shall be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10
events).
.2
Exception. Operator shall be able to designate an exception schedule for each
of the next 365 days. After an exception schedule has executed, system shall
discard and replace exception schedule with standard schedule for that day of
the week.
.3
Holiday. Operator shall be able to define 24 special or holiday schedules of
varying length on a scheduling calendar that repeats each year.
.3
System Coordination. Operator shall be able to group related equipment based on
function and location and to use these groups for scheduling and other applications.
.4
Remote Communication. System shall automatically contact operator workstation or
server on receipt of critical alarms. If no network connection is available, system shall
use a modem connection.
.5
PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional-integralderivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled
variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog
value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs.
.6
Staggered Start. System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power outage.
Operator shall be able to adjust equipment restart order and time delay between
equipment restarts.
.7
Demand Limiting.
.1
The demand-limiting program shall monitor building power consumption from a
building power meter (provided by others) which generates pulse signals or a
BACnet communications interface. An acceptable alternative is for the system
to monitor a watt transducer or current transformer attached to the building
feeder lines.
.2
When power consumption exceeds adjustable levels, system shall
automatically adjust setpoints, de-energize low-priority equipment, and take
other programmatic actions to reduce demand as specified in Section 23 09 93
(Sequences of Operation). When demand drops below adjustable levels,
system shall restore loads as specified.
17
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.8
2.9
Energy Calculations
.1
System shall accumulate and convert instantaneous power (kW) or flow rates
(L/s [gpm]) to energy usage data.
.2
System shall calculate a sliding-window average (rolling average). Operator
shall be able to adjust window interval to 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 60
minutes.
.9
Anti-Short Cycling. Binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling by
means of adjustable minimum on-time and off-time settings.
.10
On and Off Control with Differential. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting on
and off algorithms with adjustable differential to cycle a binary output based on a
controlled variable and setpoint.
.11
Runtime Totalization. System shall provide an algorithm that can totalize runtime for
each binary input and output. Operator shall be able to enable runtime alarm based on
exceeded adjustable runtime limit. Configure and enable runtime tantalization and
alarms as specified in Appendix A (Sequence of Operations).
.12
Environmental Index. System shall monitor all occupied zones and compile an index
that provides a numerical indication of the environmental comfort within the zone. As a
minimum, this indication shall be based upon the deviation of the zone temperature
from the heating or cooling setpoint. If humidity is being measured within the zone then
the environmental index shall be adjusted to reflect a lower comfort level for high or low
humidity levels. Similarly, if carbon dioxide levels are being measured as an indication
of ventilation effectiveness then the environmental index shall be adjusted to indicate
degraded comfort at high carbon dioxide levels. Other adjustments may be made to the
environmental index based upon additional measurements. The system shall maintain
a trend of the environmental index for each zone in the trend log. The system shall also
compute an average comfort index for every building included in this contract and
maintain trendlogs of these building environmental indices. Similarly, the system shall
compute the percentage of occupied time that comfortable conditions were maintained
within the zones. Through the UI the user shall be able to add a weighting factor to
adjust the contribution of each zone to the average index based upon the floor area of
the zone, importance of the zone, or other static criteria.
CONTROLLERS
.1
General. Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC),
Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart Sensors (SS)
as required to achieve performance specified in Section 239994 Article 1.9 (System
Performance). Every device in the system which executes control logic and directly
controls HVAC equipment must conform to a standard BACnet Device profile as
specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L. Unless otherwise specified,
hardwired actuators and sensors may be used in lieu of BACnet Smart Actuators and
Smart Sensors.
.2
BACNET.
.1
Building Controllers (BCs). Each BC shall conform to BACnet Building
Controller (B-BC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004,
BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-BC in the BACnet Testing
Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.2
Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). Each AAC shall conform to BACnet
Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in
18
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.3
19
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified BAAC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.3
Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall conform to BACnet
Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile as specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified BASC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
.4
Smart Actuators (SAs). Each SA shall conform to BACnet Smart Actuator (BSA) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L
and shall be listed as a certified B-SA in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL)
Product Listing.
.5
Smart Sensors (SSs). Each SS shall conform to BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet Annex L and
shall be listed as a certified B-SS in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL)
Product Listing.
.6
BACnet Communication.
 Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network using
ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and
BACnet/IP addressing.
 BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet device
routers as necessary to connect BCs to networks of AACs and
ASCs.
 Each AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3
(Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP
addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using the
ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
 Each ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or
MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
 Each SA shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or
MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
 Each SS shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3
(Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP
addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using ARCNET or
MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol
COMMUNICATION.
.1
Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication port for
connection to a Portable Operator's Terminal. Connection shall be extended to
space temperature sensor ports where shown on drawings.
.2
Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and
output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and
virtual object information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.
.3
Data Sharing. Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with each
networked BC and AAC.
.4
Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment specified in Section 239994
Appendix A shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone
control in the event of communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece
of equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable stand-
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
20
alone control using default values or other method for values normally read
over the network.
Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions.
.1
Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in
waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F
to 140°F).
.2
Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective
enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).
Keypad. Provide a local keypad and display for each BC and AAC. Operator shall be
able to use keypad to view and edit data. Keypad and display shall require password to
prevent unauthorized use. If the manufacturer does not normally provide a keypad and
display for each BC and AAC, provide the software and any interface cabling needed
to use a laptop computer as a Portable Operator's Terminal for the system.
Real-Time Clock. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock
Serviceability.
.1
Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and
processor.
.2
Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
.3
Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory circuit
status and shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall
continuously check controller network and generate alarm for each controller
that fails to respond.
Memory.
.1
Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming
requirements.
.2
Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least
72 hours in the event of power loss.
.3
Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and
application programming in the event of power loss. System shall automatically
download dynamic control parameters following power loss.
.4
Each controller shall have a min. 25% spare memory to allow for future
expansion.
Immunity to Power and Noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of
nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal
voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from
keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
Transformer. ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at
a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.
INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE
.1
General. Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs, or SAs.
.2
Protection. Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to
ground shall cause no controller damage. Input or output point contact with up
to 24 V for any duration shall cause no controller damage.
.3
Binary Inputs. Binary inputs shall monitor the on and off signal from a remote
device. Binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA and shall
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
2.10
2.11
be protected against contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense dry
contact closure without application of power external to the controller.
.4
Pulse Accumulation Inputs. Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary
input requirements and shall accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.
.5
Analog Inputs. Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20
mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be
compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
.6
Binary Outputs. Binary outputs shall send an on-or-off signal for on and off
control. Building Controller binary outputs shall have three-position (on-off-auto)
override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally
open or normally closed operation.
.7
Analog Outputs. Analog outputs shall send a modulating 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA
signal as required to properly control output devices. Each Building Controller
analog output shall have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually
adjustable potentiometer, and status lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more
than 0.4% of range annually
.8
Tri-State Outputs. Control three-point floating electronic actuators without
feedback with tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs). Tri-State
outputs may be used to provide analog output control in zone control and
terminal unit control applications such as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted
heating coils, and zone dampers.
.9
Universal Inputs and Outputs. Inputs and outputs that can be designated as
either binary or analog in software shall conform to the provisions of this section
that are appropriate for their designated use.
POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING.
.1
Power Supplies. Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 currentlimiting type or furnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for
Class 2 service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of
rated capacity.
.1
DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements.
Unit shall be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peakto-peak. Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in overvoltage and over-current protection and shall be able to withstand 150% current
overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure.
 Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF
shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD
810C for shock and vibration.
 Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.
.2
Power Line Filtering.
.1
Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations and controllers. Surge protection shall have:
.2
Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum
.3
Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less
.4
Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater
.5
Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40-100 Hz
AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
21
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.1
.2
22
Motorized Control Dampers.
.1
Type. Control dampers shall have linear flow characteristics and shall be
parallel- or opposed-blade type as specified below or as scheduled on
drawings.
 Outdoor and return air mixing dampers and face-and-bypass
dampers shall be parallel-blade and shall direct airstreams toward
each other.
 Other modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade.
 Two-position shutoff dampers shall be parallel- or opposed-blade
with blade and side seals.
.2
Frame. Damper frames shall be 2.38 mm (13 gauge) galvanized steel channel
or 3.175 mm (1/8 in.) extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.
.3
Blades. Damper blades shall not exceed 20 cm (8 in.) in width or 125 cm (48
in.) in length. Blades shall be suitable for medium velocity (10 m/s [2000 fpm])
performance. Blades shall be not less than 1.5875 mm (16 gauge).
.4
Shaft Bearings. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by
manufacturer for application, oil impregnated sintered bronze, or better.
.5
Seals. Blade edges and frame top and bottom shall have replaceable seals of
butyl rubber or neoprene. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel.
Blade seals shall leak no more than 50 L/s·m2 (10 cfm per ft2) at 1000 Pa (4 in.
w.g.) differential pressure. Blades shall be airfoil type suitable for wide-open
face velocity of 7.5 m/s (1500 fpm).
.6
Sections. Damper sections shall not exceed 125 cm - 150 cm (48 in. - 60 in.).
Each section shall have at least one damper actuator.
.7
Linkages. Dampers shall have exposed linkages.
.8
Standard of Acceptance:
.9
TAMCO ultra-low leakage insulated dampers for all fresh air and exhaust
dampers.
.10
TAMCO uninsulated dampers for return air dampers.
Automatic Control Valves
.1
Automatic control valves, shall be globe type valves. Valves and actuators
shall be ordered as one factory-assembled and tested unit. Control ball valves
will not be accepted.
.2
Submit to the Consultant for review the following information for each valve:
 Valve type and size
 Connection type
 Line size
 Valve manufacturer and model number
 Valve flow coefficient
 Design flow
 Pressure drop across valve
 Maximum close-off pressure
 Actuator manufacturer and model number
 Actuator maximum torque
.3
Valves 2” (50mm) and smaller shall be constructed of bronze. Valves 2 ½ ”
(65mm) and larger shall have iron bodies and bronze mountings.
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
23
All control valves shall have stainless steel stems. The bronze in bodies and
bonnets of all bronze valves shall conform to ASTM B62 for valves rated up to
150psig (1035 Kpa) working pressure and to ASTM B61 for valves rated at 200
psig (1380 Kpa) working pressure. The bodies and bonnets of iron body valves
shall conform to ASTM A126, Class B.
Control valve discs and seats shall be of bronze for 100 °C or less fluid
temperature and of stainless steel for fluid temperatures above 100 °C.
The control valves shall have tight shut-off. Flat disk valves are not acceptable.
Control valves 2” (50mm) and smaller shall be complete with screwed ends
type, except for bronze valves installed in soldered copper piping which shall be
complete with soldering ends. Control valves larger than 2” (50mm) shall be
complete with flanged end type and proper flanged adapters to copper shall be
provided where flanged valves are installed in copper piping.
The water control valves shall be sized for a pressure drop of 6 ft. water column
or as indicated on mechanical drawings.
Each automatic control valve must provide the design output and flow rates at
pressure drops compatible with equipment selected.
Each automatic control valve must be suitable for the particular system working
pressure.
Each automatic control valve shall be fitted with a position indicator.
All the same type control valves shall be the products of a single manufacturer
and have the manufacturer’s name, pressure rating and size clearly marked on
the outside of the body.
All heating valves: default position shall be fully open to the coil.
Valves providing two-position service shall be quick opening. Two-way valves
shall have replaceable disc or ball.
Close-off (Differential) Pressure Rating. Valve actuator and trim shall provide
the following minimum close-off pressure ratings.
Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.
Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow
or 100% of total system (pump) head.
Ports. Valves providing modulating service shall have equal percentage ports.
Sizing.
 Two-position service: line size.
 Two-way modulating service: select pressure drop equal to the
greatest of twice the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load),
50% of the pressure difference between supply and return mains, or
35 kPa (5 psi).
 Three-way modulating service: select pressure drop equal to the
smaller of twice the pressure drop through the coil exchanger (load)
or 35 kPa (5 psi).
Fail Position. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as follows unless
otherwise specified.
 Water zone valves: normally open.
 Heating coils in air handlers: normally open to the coils.
 Chilled water control valves: normally closed to the coils.
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS

.3
.4
.5
24
Other applications: as scheduled or as required by sequences of
operation.
.21
Standard of Acceptance: Belimo
Electric Damper and Valve Actuators.
.1
Stall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator
damage throughout the actuator's rotation.
.2
Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for power-failure, heating and safety
applications shall have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS), unless otherwise specified
.3
Signal and Range. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 Vdc or a 0-20 mA
control signal and shall have a 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA operating range. (Floating
motor actuators may be substituted for proportional actuators in terminal unit
applications as described in paragraph 2.6H.)
.4
Wiring. 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring.
.5
Manual Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator
when the actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an
external manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more than 7 N·m (60
in.-lb) torque capacity shall have a manual crank.
.6
Standard of Acceptance: Belimo
Binary Temperature Devices (low limit, high limit devices).
.1
Low-Voltage Space Thermostats. Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V,
bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation
heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range,
1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
.2
Line-Voltage Space Thermostats. Line-voltage space thermostats shall be
bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch
type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical
rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range,
1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
.3
Low-Limit Thermostats. Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed,
vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall
sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest
sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.
Temperature Sensors.
.1
Type. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or
thermistor.
.2
Duct Sensors.
 Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as shown. Averaging
sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) in length per 1 m2 (10 ft2)
of duct cross-section.
 Standard of Acceptance: Greystone
.3
Immersion Sensors.
 Provide immersion sensors with a separable stainless steel well.
Well pressure rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will
be immersed in. Well shall withstand pipe design flow velocities.
 Use immersion temperature sensors with thermwells for all
applications where a temperature of a fluid in a pipe is being sensed.
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS

.6
.7
25
The sensors shall be complete with brass thermowell. Provide a
stainless steel thermowell where exposed to corrosive liquids.
 Use conductive gel when mounting the sensor in the thermowell.
 The sensors to be mounted on insulated piping shall be installed
clear of the insulation.
 Standard of Acceptance: Greystone
.4
Space Sensors
 Mount sensors at a height of 5’-6’’ above the finished floor. Unless
indicated otherwise, mount new sensors adjacent to the existing
thermostat in the space.
 Provide a heavy-duty metal guard for all sensors or thermostats
mounted in public areas such as stairways, vestibules, lobbies,
gyms. On the approval of the Consultant, a, stainless steel,
ventilated plate-type sensor may be used in lieu of guard or cage.
 Do not mount sensors on outside walls or other locations influenced
by external thermal sources (e.g. computers, boiler rooms ).
 Standard of acceptance: Greystone
.5
Duct Averaging Sensors
 Provide plenum mounted mixed air temperature averaging type
sensors with the following minimum characteristics:
 Mount in a zigzag manner to provide continuous coverage of the
entire duct cross-sectional area.
 The use of thermistor type sensors is acceptable.
 Standard of Acceptance: Greystone
.6
Outdoor Temperature Sensors
 Provide outdoor air temperature sensors with the following minimum
characteristics:
 Each sensor shall be a 6”, 10K thermistor probe
 Minimum two sensors shall be installed for each site.
 Both sensors shall be mounted inside a heavy-duty (blow-proof)
solar shield.
 Standard of Acceptance: Greystone
Humidity Sensors.
.1
Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%–80%.
.2
Duct sensors shall have a sampling chamber.
.3
Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%–95% RH and
shall be suitable for ambient conditions of -40°C–75°C (-40°F–170°F).
.4
Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually.
Flow Switches.
.1
Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential
pressure type (air or water service) as shown. Switches shall be UL listed,
SPDT snap-acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum).
.2
Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 1 enclosure unless
otherwise specified.
.3
Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for
intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
26
.4
Standard of Acceptance: Greystone
CO2 Sensors
.1
Provide CO2 sensors for either wall or duct mounting applications as specified.
Provide a heavy duty metal guard to protect the sensor when mounted on walls.
Provide the factory-supplied duct mounting kit for all duct mount applications.
.2
The sensor shall be microprocessor controlled, fully digital, non-dispersive dual
wavelength infrared technology with temperature compensation. The device
output shall be 4 to 20mA.
.3
The sensor shall have a measurement range of 0 to 3000ppm with an accuracy
of +/-25ppm in the 15-30C range. Long term stability shall be no greater than 20
ppm per year. The user selectable range shall be 0 to 1500ppm.
.4
Install the sensor in accordance with all manufacturer’s instructions. Wall
mounted sensors shall be installed at a minimum height of 72” above the
finished floor. Sensors shall not be mounted on an outside wall, close to a
window, door or in draft areas with direct airflow.
.5
The standard of acceptance shall be Greystone
Relays.
.1
Control Relays. Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have
dust cover and LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil
voltage shall be suitable for application.
.2
Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL
listed, and shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100%
from setpoint shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be
suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in
local control panel.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Enercorp
Override Timers.
.1
Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-wound
line voltage, UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required by
application. Provide 0-6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Flush
mount timer on local control panel face or where shown.
Current Transmitters
.1
AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current
transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20
mA two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150
A, and 200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be
±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.
.2
Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be
UL/CSA recognized.
.3
Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.
Current Transformers
.1
AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely
encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.
.2
Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected
for ±1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.
.3
Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core
transformers for existing wiring installation.
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
27
Voltage Transmitters
.1
AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20
mA output with zero and span adjustment.
.2
Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330
Vac, and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm
maximum burden.
.3
Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be
UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.
Power Monitors.
.1
Power monitors shall be three-phase type and shall have three-phase
disconnect and shorting switch assembly, UL listed voltage transformers, and
UL listed split-core current transformers.
.2
Power monitors shall provide selectable output: rate pulse for kWh reading or 420 mA for kW reading. Power monitors shall operate with 5 A current inputs and
maximum error of ±2% at 1.0 power factor or ±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.
Current Switches
.1
Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip
current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system output
requirements.
Status Relays (Solid State)
.1
The status relays shall be mounted inside newly provided enclosures mounted
near the respective equipment starter cabinets.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Omron
Pressure Transducers.
.1
Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span.
.2
Continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater
than calibrated span shall not damage transducer sensing elements.
.3
Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum
proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output,
suitable mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves.
.4
Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with
minimum proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential
pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.)
Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5valve manifold.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: Greystone
Differential Pressure Switches.
.1
Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT
snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range and
differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless
otherwise specified.
Pressure-Electric (PE) Switches.
.1
PE switches shall be UL listed, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) or motor
control rated, metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating pressure rated
for 0-175 kPa (0-25 psig), with calibrated scale minimum setpoint range of 14125 kPa (2-18 psig).
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.2
.20
.21
.22
28
Provide one- or two-stage switch action (SPDT, DPST, or DPDT) as required
by application.
.3
Switches shall be open type (panel-mounted). Exception: Switches shall be
enclosed type for remote installation. Enclosed type shall be NEMA 1 unless
otherwise specified.
.4
Each pneumatic signal line to PE switches shall have permanent indicating
gauge.
Variable Speed Drives
.1
The VFD serial communication:
 The BACnet connection shall be an RS485, MS/TP interface
operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be
tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed. The
BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type
of an Applications Specific Controller (BASC).
 The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable.
If additional hardware is required to obtain the BACnet interface, the
VFD manufacturer shall supply one BACnet gateway per drive.
Multiple VFDs sharing one gateway shall not be acceptable.
 Capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run/stop control,
speed set adjustment, PID control adjustments, current limit,
acceleration/deceleration time adjustments, and lock and unlock the
keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to
monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed /
frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours
(resettable), operating hours (re-settable), and drive temperature.
 The VFD shall allow the DDC to control the drive’s digital and analog
outputs via the serial interface, independent of any VFD function and
monitor all of the drive’s digital and analog inputs.
 All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over
the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be
possible. The following additional status indications and settings
shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus – keypad
“Hand” or “Auto” selected and bypass selected. The DDC system
shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode
or bypass mode.
Occupancy Sensors. Occupancy sensors shall utilize Passive Infrared (PIR) and/or
Microphonic Passive technology to detect the presence of people within a room.
Sensors shall be mounted as indicated on the approved drawings. The sensor output
shall be accessible by any lighting and/or HVAC controller in the system. Occupancy
sensors shall be capable of being powered from the lighting or HVAC control panel, as
shown on the drawings. Occupancy sensor delay shall be software adjustable through
the user interface and shall not require manual adjustment at the sensor.
Fire stopping and Smoke Seal Materials
.1
Asbestos-free elastomeric materials tested, listed and labelled by ULC in
accordance with CAN4-S115-M85, for installation in U.L.C. designated
firestopping and smoke seal Systems. These Systems shall provide a positive
fire, water and smoke seal and a fire- resistance rating (flame, smoke hose
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.23
.24
.25
.26
29
stream and temperature) not less than the fire resistance rating of surrounding
construction.
.2
Materials shall form ULC listed or UL classified assemblies and be compatible
with abutting dissimilar materials and finishes.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: 3M Canada Limited
 A/D Fire Protection System Ltd.
 Fire Stop System
Wall Opening Covering Plates
.1
All hole covering plates used on this project shall be stainless steel 18-8
chrome metal alloy, type 302, non-magnetic type for finished areas and pressed
steel for unfinished areas. Finish brush marks shall be run in a vertical direction.
Access Doors
.1
Access doors installed in unfinished areas shall be constructed of 12 ga prime
coated steel and of stainless steel for all areas finished with tile or marble
surfaces.
.2
Access doors shall be complete with 180? opening door, round safety corners,
concealed hinges, screwdriver latches, plaster lock and anchor straps.
.3
Access doors shall be 24’x 24’ or 12’x 18’ as per site condition.
.4
Access doors in fire rated construction shall be ULC listed and labeled and of a
rating to maintain the fire separation integrity.
.5
Standard of Acceptance:
 Zurn Industries Canada Limited
 LeHage Industries Limited
 Acudor Acorn Limited.
Local Control Panels.
.1
Indoor control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with hinged
door key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A common key shall open each
control panel and sub-panel.
.2
Prewire internal and face-mounted device connections with color-coded
stranded conductors tie-wrapped or neatly installed in plastic troughs. Field
connection terminals shall be UL listed for 600 V service, individually identified
per control and interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring.
.3
Each local panel shall have a control power source power switch (on-off) with
over current protection.
LAN CABLING
.1
All LAN cabling shall be Category V as defined by EIA/TIA 568A. The
contractor shall test all cabling to verify that 100Mb bandwidth is supported.
See commissioning requirements.
.2
Cabling shall be 4 pair, 100 ohm UTP, #24 AWG solid copper conductor PVC
insulated, with blue or grey colour coded jacket. FT6 rated cable shall be used
unless otherwise required to meet building codes or by-laws.
.3
Data outlets shall be RJ45, 8 pin connectors, with 50 microns of hard gold over
nickel, minimum durability of 750 mating cycles and contact pressure of 100
grams per contact. Transmission characteristics shall meet TSB-40 Category
V.
.4
Provide one RJ45 data outlet adjacent to each device to be terminated (e.g.
workstation PC, DDC panel, hub, etc.) Use a flexible patch cable to connect
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
2.12
2.13
from the data outlet to the end device. For Delta Controls installations, provide
a duplex data outlet at the workstation PC to accommodate the remote security
key wiring. LAN cabling shall not be directly terminated to any device.
.5
Provide protection from EMI sources in accordance with CSA-T530 article 4
.6
The contractor shall test all cabling to verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-67
- Basic Link Test using a Level 2, bi-directional tester. See commissioning
requirements.
.7
Where there are more than 2-90 degree in a conduit run, provide a pull box
between sections so that there are two bends or less in any one section.
.8
Where a conduit run requires a reverse bend, between 100 degrees and 180
degrees, insert a pull box at each bend having an angle from 100 degrees to
180 degrees.
.9
Ream all conduit ends and install insulated bushings on each end.
.10
Terminate all conduits that protrude through the structural floor 2” above the
concrete base.
.11
Do not use a pull box in lieu of a conduit bend. Align conduits that enter a pull
box from opposite ends with each other.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
.1
Optical Cable. Optical cables shall be duplex 900 mm tight-buffer construction
designed for intra-building environments. Sheath shall be UL listed OFNP in
accordance with NEC Article 770. Optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI,
ANSI X3T9.5 PMD for 62.5/125mm.
.2
Connectors. Field terminate optical fibers with ST type connectors. Connectors shall
have ceramic ferrules and metal bayonet latching bodies.
WIRING AND RACEWAYS
.1
General. Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in applicable
sections of Division 16.
.2
Insulated wire shall use copper conductors and shall be UL listed for 90°C (200°F)
minimum service.
30
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.2 Protection
3.3 Coordination
3.4 General Workmanship
3.5 Field Quality Control
3.6 Existing Equipment
3.7 Wiring
3.8 Communication Wiring
3.9 Fiber Optic Cable
3.10 Installation of Sensors
3.11 Flow Switch Installation
3.12 Actuators
3.13 Warning Labels
3.14 Identification of Hardware and Wiring
3.15 Programming.
3.16 Equipment Enclosures And Locations
3.17 Identification and Labeling Of Control Equipment
3.18 Systems Hardware Commissioning.
3.19 Substantial Completion Inspection
3.20 Control System Demonstration And Acceptance
3.21 Cleaning
3.22
Training
31
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
.1
Thoroughly examine project plans for control device and equipment locations. Report
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Consultant for resolution before starting roughin work.
.2
Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies,
conflicts, or omissions to Consultant for resolution before starting rough-in work.
.3
Examine drawings and specifications for work of others. Report inadequate headroom
or space conditions or other discrepancies to Consultant and obtain written instructions
for changes necessary to accommodate Section 239994 work with work of others.
Controls Contractor shall perform at his expense necessary changes in specified work
caused by failure or neglect to report discrepancies.
PROTECTION
.1
Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to
material caused by Contractor's work or employees.
.2
Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected,
tested, and accepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of
work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry
of foreign objects.
COORDINATION
.1
Site.
.1
Assist in coordinating space conditions to accommodate the work of each trade
where work will be installed near or will interfere with work of other trades. If
installation without coordination causes interference with work of other trades,
Contractor shall correct conditions without extra charge.
.2
Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work
dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress.
.2
Test and Balance.
.1
Provide Test and Balance Contractor a single set of necessary tools to interface
to control system for testing and balancing.
.2
Train Test and Balance Contractor to use control system interface tools. This
training will be planned for a minimum of 4 hours.
.3
Provide a qualified technician to assist with testing and balancing the first 20
terminal units.
.4
Test and Balance Contractor shall return tools undamaged and in working
condition at completion of testing and balancing.
.5
Also refer to section 15015 for location of measurements, tolerances, checking
and calibration of BAS devices.
.3
Life Safety.
.1
Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are provided under
Division 16 and/or are existing. Interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for
shutdown as specified in Section 239994 Appendix A (Sequences of
Operation).
.2
Smoke dampers and actuators required for duct smoke isolation are provided
under Division 15 and/or are existing. Interlock smoke dampers to air handlers
as specified in Section 239994 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).
.4
Coordination with Other Controls. Integrate with and coordinate controls and control
devices furnished or installed by others as follows.
32
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.1
.2
3.4
3.5
3.6
Communication media and equipment shall be provided as specified herein
Each supplier of a controls product shall configure, program, start up, and test
that product to meet the sequences of operation described herein regardless of
where within the contract documents those products are described.
.3
Coordinate and resolve incompatibility issues that arise between control
products provided under this section and those provided under other sections
or divisions of this specification.
.4
The contractor is responsible for providing all controls described in the contract
documents regardless of where within the contract documents these controls
are described.
.5
Controls Contractor shall be responsible for integration of control products
provided by multiple suppliers regardless of where integration is described
within the contract documents.
GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
.1
Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to
walls wherever possible.
.2
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment
vibration isolation.
.3
Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code
(NEC) Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.
.4
Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.
.5
Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and
standards and local codes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable
local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Section 239994 Article
1.8 (Codes and Standards).
.2
Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and workmanship quality.
.3
Contractor shall arrange for work inspection by local or state authorities having
jurisdiction over the work.
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
.1
Wiring. Interconnecting control wiring shall be removed and shall become Contractor's
property unless specifically noted or shown to be reused.
.2
Local Control Panels. Remove and deliver existing control panels to Owner.
.3
Repair. Unless otherwise directed, Contractor is not responsible for repair or
replacement of existing energy equipment and systems, valves, dampers, or actuators.
Notify Consultant in writing immediately of existing equipment that requires
maintenance.
.4
Indicator Gauges. Ensure operation of and recalibrate for reasonable accuracy or
replace existing gauges.
.5
Room Thermostats. Remove and deliver existing room thermostats to Owner unless
otherwise noted. Patch and finish holes and marks left by removal to match existing
walls.
.6
Electronic Sensors and Transmitters. Remove and deliver existing sensors and
transmitters to Owner.
.7
Controllers and Auxiliary Electronic Devices. Remove and deliver existing controllers
and auxiliary electronic devices to Owner.
33
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.8
3.7
Damper Actuators, Linkages, and Appurtenances: Remove and deliver existing
damper actuators, linkages and appurtenances to Owner.
.9
Control Valves. Replace existing control valves with new. Deliver removed control
valves to Owner.
.10
Existing System Operating Schedule. Existing mechanical system may be disabled
during this work.
.11
Maintain fan scheduling using existing or temporary time clocks or control systems
throughout the control system installation.
.12
Modify existing starter control circuits if necessary to provide hand-off-auto control of
each controlled starter. Furnish new starters or starter control packages as required.
.13
Patch holes and finish to match existing walls.
.14
At Owner's request, items to be delivered to Owner shall instead be properly disposed
of. Hazardous materials shall be disposed in accordance with current regulations and
applicable by-laws.
WIRING
.1
Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local
electrical codes, and manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway as specified
by NEC.
.3
All wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit unless specified otherwise. Exposed wiring
in finished areas (e.g. corridors, classrooms, gymnasiums, etc.) shall be installed in
wiremold (colour to match surrounding area)
.4
Wiring from DDC controllers to sensors and actuators and control system network and
low voltage wiring running in accessible ceilings may be installed using LVT cable.
Where the ceiling is used as a return air plenum, plenum rated cable shall be used in
lieu of LVT cable.
.5
Install EMT and cable at right angles to building lines, securely fastened, and in
accordance with current electrical codes and standards.
.6
Power and control wiring shall be copper conductor (RW90). For power wiring, provide
#12 AWG (minimum) with a 3% maximum voltage drop in accordance with CEC
requirements. Control wiring shall be a minimum of #14 AWG, unless otherwise
specified.
.7
The wires smaller than 18 gauge shall not be used and will not be accepted on the
project except for: wiring between terminal computer devices, wire in standard
communication cables, such as printers and short haul modems, wire used in
communication networks, i.e. any cable transferring digital data, using twisted shielded
pairs.
.8
The wiring from panels to devices shall be installed without splices. The use of crimp
connectors is not allowed when connecting field wiring to sensor or device leads. The
use of wire nuts is acceptable in this application.
.9
Power for control system shall not be obtained by tapping into miscellaneous circuits
that could be inadvertently switched off. Only dedicated circuit(s) shall power the
control system. Provide additional breakers or electrical panels as required.
.10
Mount transformers and other peripheral equipment in panels located in serviceable
areas. Provide line-side breakers/fuses for each transformer.
34
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.11
3.8
3.9
All 120 VAC power for any controls equipment shall be from dedicated circuits.
Provide a breaker lock for each breaker used to supply the control system. Update the
panel circuit directory.
.12
A dedicated power circuit may be used to power DDC panels and equipment within the
same or adjoining mechanical rooms. The use of one power circuit to power DDC
panels distributed throughout the building is not acceptable.
.13
The controller may be powered from the equipment that it is directly controlling (i.e.
heat pump, rooftop unit) only if the controller controls no other equipment and the
power supply to the controller remains energized independently of unit operation or
status.
.14
Provide all required code gauge boxes, connectors and other wiring accessories.
.15
For all DC wiring, positive conductors shall be WHITE or RED in colour while negative
conductors shall be BLACK in colour.
COMMUNICATION WIRING
.1
Communication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring and shall comply with Article
3.7 (Wiring).
.2
Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other Class 2
wiring.
.3
During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius
specified by the cable manufacturer.
.4
Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for
each cable.
.5
Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable
and ground where a cable enters or exits a building.
.6
Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when
that length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths
shall have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.
.7
Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.
.8
Ground coaxial cable according to NEC regulations article on "Communications
Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding."
.9
BACnet MS/TP communications wiring shall be installed in accordance with
ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135. This includes but is not limited to:
.1
The network shall use shielded, twisted-pair cable with characteristic
impedance between 100 and 120 ohms. Distributed capacitance between
conductors shall be less than 100 pF per meter (30 pF per foot.)
.2
The maximum length of an MS/TP segment is 1200 meters (4000 ft) with AWG
18 cable. The use of greater distances and/or different wire gauges shall
comply with the electrical specifications of EIA-485.
.3
The maximum number of nodes per segment shall be 32, as specified in the
EIA 485 standard. Additional nodes may be accommodated by the use of
repeaters.
.4
An MS/TP EIA-485 network shall have no T connections.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
.1
During installation do not exceed maximum pulling tensions specified by cable
manufacturer. Post-installation residual cable tension shall be within cable
manufacturer's specifications.
35
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.2
3.10
3.11
3.12
Install cabling and associated components according to manufacturers' instructions. Do
not exceed minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii specified by cable
manufacturer.
INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
.1
Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.
.3
Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by
wall framing.
.4
Air seal wires attached to sensors in their raceways or in the wall to prevent sensor
readings from being affected by air transmitted from other areas.
.5
Use averaging sensors in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks. Install averaging
sensors in a serpentine manner vertically across duct. Support each bend with a
capillary clip.
.6
Install mixing plenum low-limit sensors in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct.
Support each bend with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m (1 ft) of sensing element for each
1 m2 (1 ft2) of coil area.
.7
Install pipe-mounted temperature sensors in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors
with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.
.8
Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall at designated location with sun
shield complete with metal cover cage.
.9
Differential Air Static Pressure.
.1
Supply Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube.
Make pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Return Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube.
Make pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.
.3
Building Static Pressure. Pipe pressure sensor's low-pressure port to the static
pressure port located on the outside of the building through a high-volume
accumulator. Pipe high-pressure port to a location behind a thermostat cover.
.4
Piping to pressure transducer pressure ports shall contain a capped test port
adjacent to transducer.
.5
Pressure transducers, except those controlling VAV boxes, shall be located in
control panels, not on monitored equipment or on ductwork. Mount transducers
in a vibration-free location accessible for service without use of ladders or
special equipment.
.6
Mount gauge tees adjacent to air and water differential pressure taps. Install
shut-off valves before tee for water gauges.
.10
Smoke detectors, freezestats, high-pressure cut-offs, and other safety switches shall
be hard-wired to de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation.
Switches shall require manual reset. Provide contacts that allow DDC software to
monitor safety switch status.
.11
Install humidity sensors for duct mounted humidifiers at least 3 m (10 ft) downstream of
the humidifier. Do not install filters between the humidifier and the sensor.
FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION
.1
Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.
.2
Adjust flow switch according to manufacturer's instructions.
ACTUATORS
.1
General. Mount actuators and adapters according to manufacturer's recommendations.
36
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.2
3.13
Electric and Electronic
.1
Damper Actuators. Mount actuators directly on damper shaft or jackshaft unless
shown as a linkage installation. Link actuators according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
 For low-leakage dampers with seals, mount actuator with a minimum
5° travel available for damper seal tightening.
 To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on
normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open
position, manually close the damper, then tighten linkage.
 Check operation of damper-actuator combination to confirm that
actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open
and closed positions.
 Provide necessary mounting hardware and linkages for actuator
installation.
.2
Valve Actuators. Connect actuators to valves with adapters approved by
actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following the
actuator manufacturer's recommendations.
WARNING LABELS
.1
Affix permanent warning labels to equipment that can be automatically started by the
control system.
.1
Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.
.2
Warning labels shall read as follows.
CAUTION
This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at
any time without warning. Switch disconnect to "Off" position before
servicing.
.2
Affix permanent warning labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected
to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects.
.1
Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.
.2
Warning labels shall read as follows.
CAUTION
This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate
disconnects. Disconnect all power sources before servicing.
3.14
IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING
.1
Label wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, with control
system address or termination number at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination.
.2
Label pneumatic tubing at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with a descriptive
identifier.
.3
Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show instrument or item
served.
.4
Label control panels with minimum 1 cm (½ in.) letters on laminated plastic
nameplates.
.5
Label each control component with a permanent label. Label plug-in components such
that label remains stationary during component replacement.
.6
Label room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
37
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.7
.8
3.15
Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after
equipment is installed.
Label identifiers shall match record documents.
Controllers
.1
3.16
3.17
Provide a separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. A DDC controller
may control more than one system provided that all points associated with the system
are assigned to the same DDC controller. Points used for control loop reset, such as
outside air or space temperature, are exempt from this requirement.
.2
Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide
the required I/O point capacity required to monitor all of the hardware points listed in
Appendix A (Sequences of Operation).
PROGRAMMING
.1
Point Naming. Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each
sequence of operation. See Section 239994 Appendix A (Sequences of Operation). If
character limitations or space restrictions make it advisable to shorten the name, the
abbreviations given in Appendix C may be used. Where multiple points with the same
name reside in the same controller, each point name may be customized with its
associated Program Object number. For example, "Zone Temp 1" for Zone 1, "Zone
Temp 2" for Zone 2.
.2
Software Programming. Programming shall provide actions for each possible situation.
Graphic- or parameter-based programs shall be documented. Text-based programs
shall be modular, structured, and commented to clearly describe each section of the
program.
.1
Application Programming. Provide application programming that adheres to
sequences of operation specified in Section 239994 Appendix A. Program
documentation or comment statements shall reflect language used in
sequences of operation.
.2
System Programming. Provide system programming necessary for system
operation.
.3
Operator Interface.
.1
Standard Graphics. Provide graphics as specified in Section 239994 Article 2.3
Paragraph E.2 (System Graphics). Show on each equipment graphic input and
output points and relevant calculated points such as indicated on the applicable
Points List in Section 239994 Appendix A. Point information on graphics shall
dynamically update.
.2
Install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot operator interface software and
functions (including operating system software, operator interface database,
and third-party software installation and integration required for successful
operator interface operation) as described in Section 239994.
EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES AND LOCATIONS
.1
Provide new enclosures for all field equipment (e.g. DDC panels, transducers, relays,
etc.). Enclosures shall be equipped with a hinged door and latch. Provide a OWNERstandard key/lock set for each enclosure.
.2
Mount all enclosures in serviceable areas of mechanical rooms, storage rooms or
janitor closets. Obtain written approval of the Consultant prior to mounting any
enclosure in ceiling spaces or more than 5’-6” above the finished floor.
38
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.3
3.18
All transformers and power supplies for control equipment shall be installed in new
dedicated metal cabinets with hinged, lockable covers located in the proximity of their
dedicated controller cabinets.
.4
Include within a DDC panel enclosure one 120 VAC duplex receptacle for portable PC
power, if the controller cabinet is located further than 5’-0” from the nearest wall
receptacle.
.5
Ensure that enclosures are sized to allow for ease of servicing of all equipment
contained within. Enclosures containing DDC panels shall be sized to allow for the
installation of the maximum allowable number of expansion panels/boards. Do not
mount other equipment in a manner that may interfere with the future installation of
expansion panels/boards.
.6
For enclosures containing pneumatic transducers or devices, provide one pressure
gauge (1½” dial, 0-30psi) for the main air line supply.
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING OF CONTROL EQUIPMENT
.1
All panels must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3”x1”) affixed to the front face indicating
panel designation and function (i.e. “BAS Panel 1” or “Relay Panel 3”).
.2
All field sensors or devices must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3”x1”) attached with tie-wrap
or adhesive indicating the point software name and hardware address (i.e. AHU1-MAT,
2.IP4). Tags must be secured by screws where mounted outside of the building, in unheated spaces, in high humidity areas or where subject to vibration.
.3
Room sensors or other sensors in finished areas must have a lamicoid tag affixed to
the front cover. This tag shall be minimum 1”x ½” and indicate the point software name
and hardware address.
.4
All devices within a field enclosure shall be identified via a label or tag.
.5
All BAS panel power sources must be identified by a label (min. 3”x1”) indicating the
source power panel designation and circuit number (i.e. “120vac fed from LP-2A cct
#1).
.6
All field control equipment panels fed from more than one power source must have a
warning label on the front cover.
.7
All wires shall be identified with the hardware address with a band-type self-adhesive
strips or clip-on plastic wire markers at both ends.
.8
All rotating equipment controlled by the BAS shall have a tag or label affixed indicating
that the equipment may start without warning.
.9
The location of the phone line manager shall be indicated via a label affixed to the
inside cover of the modem enclosure or BAS panel.
.10
All BAS panels will be supplied with a point’s list sheet (within a plastic sleeve)
attached to the inside door.
.11
The points list shall identify the following for each point:
 Panel number.
 Panel location.
 Hardware address.
 Software name.
 Point description.
 Field device type.
 Point type (i.e. AI or DO).
 Device fail position.
39
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
3.19
 Device manufacturer.
 Model number or reference.
 Wire tag reference.
.12
Provide laminated wiring diagrams for all field mounted relay enclosures. Securely
attach to the inside door. Identify power panels and circuit numbers of the equipment
being controlled.
.13
Provide laminated wiring diagrams or modify existing equipment wiring diagrams
wherever the BAS interfaces to other equipment. (e.g. boilers, chillers, etc.). Securely
attach to the inside of the respective control cabinet.
.14
Provide lamacoid labels indicating the required operating sequences, on the boilers
and valves, where the boiler plants have manual or automatic isolating valves. Submit
actual wording to the Consultant for approval prior to fabrication and installation.
.15
Provide lamicoid or machine labels (as outlined above) for all interposing relays or
contactors used in control circuits. The labels shall include the related point software
name and hardware address
.16
Provide a lamicoid label to identify the location of concealed devices above the ceiling
space. Mount the label on the ceiling grid t-bar or a permanent surface adjacent to the
devices. The label shall contain the wording “BAS Devices Above”.
.17
Provide lamicoid labels for all auxiliary HVAC equipment (e.g. force flow cabinets, unit
ventilators, unit heater, window AC units, etc.) controlled by the BAS. Mount the labels
in the vicinity of the existing thermostat or power switch for the unit. The label shall
contain the wording “Under BAS Control”.
.18
Where directed by the Consultant, provide any and all additional labelling, diagrams.
schematics or instructions as may be required to facilitate the correct operation and
maintenance of controlled building systems.
SYSTEM HARDWARE COMMISSIONING
.1
This contractor shall be responsible for the “end to end” commissioning, testing,
verification and start-up of the complete control system hardware including panels,
sensors, transducers, end devices, relays and wiring. Where applicable, this shall
include any points from an existing and/or re-used automation system in the building.
.2
The contractor shall conduct the hardware commissioning at the facility.
.3
When the site hardware installation is 100% completed (including all labeling and
documentation), the contractor shall provide written notification to the Owner to
schedule the hardware commissioning dates for each facility.
.4
Owner reserves the right, at it’s sole discretion, to discontinue site commissioning at
any time if any part of the site hardware installation is found to be incomplete on the
date of commissioning. If this occurs, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for
any additional costs related to rescheduling of the site commissioning.
.5
The Contractor shall prepare a hardware commissioning report containing the following
information and test results:
.1
Analog inputs (i.e. temperatures, pressure, etc.) shall be verified with an
approved calibration device. All actual temperature readings should be with +/1C of the readings observed at the workstation. Record calibration adjustments
and settings.
.2
Analog outputs shall be verified by manually commanding the output channel
from the operator workstation to two or more positions within the 0-100% range
and verifying the actual position of the actuator or device. All devices shall
40
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
3.20
operate over their entire 0-100% range from a minimum control range of 1090%. Record the actual output scale range (channel output voltage versus
controller command) for each analogue end device
.3
Digital outputs shall be verified by witnessing the actual start/stop operation of
the equipment under control.
.4
Digital inputs shall be verified by witnessing the status of the input point as the
equipment is manually cycled on and off.
.5
Identify any existing equipment (valves, dampers, fan starters, etc..) that are
inoperative or require maintenance or repair.
.6
The BAS field panel power source shall be toggled on and off to ensure reboot
functionality and power down memory retention of all parameters. During the
power down test, all controlled system outputs shall go to their fail-safe position.
.7
The hardware commissioning report must be signed and dated by the
Contractor’s technician performing the tests and participating Owner
representative.
.8
Include with the hardware commissioning report a site floor plan indicating the
location of all equipment installed in concealed or recessed locations (e.g.
interposing relays in ceiling spaces).
.9
Provide testing of all LAN cabling to ensure that 100Mb bandwidth is supported.
.10
Verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-67 - Basic Link Test using a Level 2, bidirectional tester. Provide all equipment necessary to carry out the required
tests.
.6
The Contractor shall prepare a software commissioning report containing the following
information and test results:
.1
Alarms and Interlocks.
 Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip
the alarm.
 Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that
actuators fail in the proper direction.
 Tests interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check
initiating value of variable and interlock action.
.2
Record all out-of-season or unverified points in the commissioning report as
“non-commissioned”.
.3
Verify PID loop tuning parameters by applying a step change to the current
setpoint and observing the response of the controlled device. Setpoint should
be reached in an acceptable period of time without excessive cycling or hunting
of the controlled device. Provide a graph of the trend response to setpoint
change for important controlled devices (e.g. valves 1-inch or larger, dampers
on major air handlers, etc.)
.4
Provide confirmation that a series of test alarms has been successfully received
at a designated remote monitoring workstations.
.5
The software commissioning report must be signed and dated by the
Contractor’s technician performing the tests and participating Owner
representative.
.7
At the completion of site commissioning, submit four (4) copies of each the hardware
and software commissioning reports to the Owner.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION
41
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.1
3.21
At the completion of the site hardware inspection, the Contractor shall test and verify
that the system programming, graphics and alarm software is operating correctly and
is in compliance all requirements of the specifications.
.2
The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Owner that the site is ready for
the Substantial Completion Inspection by the Consultant.
.3
At the conclusion of the Substantial Completion Inspection, the Consultant shall issue a
comprehensive site deficiency report to the Contractor for his immediate action.
.4
The Contractor shall correct all items noted in the site deficiency report within ten (10)
business days of receipt.
.5
The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Owner that all items on the
Consultant’s site deficiency report have been corrected.
CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
.1
Demonstration. Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to
demonstrate system operation and compliance with specification after and in addition
to tests specified above. Provide Consultant with log documenting completion of
Substantial Completion Inspection.
.1
Consultant and Board Representative will be present to observe and review
system demonstration. Notify Consultant and Board Representative at least 10
days before system demonstration begins.
.2
Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved. Complete
approved checklists and forms for each system as part of system
demonstration.
.3
Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified
herein. Provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication.
Demonstrate calibration and response of any input and output points requested
by Consultant. Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper
system operation.
.4
Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational
mode.
.5
Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.
.6
Demonstrate each of the following.
 DDC loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing
each DDC loop's response to a setpoint change representing an
actuator position change of at least 25% of full range. Trend
sampling rate shall be from 10 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on
loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show setpoint, actuator
position, and controlled variable values. Consultant will require
further tuning of each loop that displays unreasonably under- or
over-damped control.
 Building fire alarm system interface.
 Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate setpoints,
operating points, valve positions, and other data as specified in the
points list provided with each sequence of operation. Each log shall
cover three 48-hour periods and shall have a sample frequency not
less than 10 minutes or as specified on its points list. Logs shall be
accessible through system's operator interface and shall be
retrievable for use in other software programs.
42
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.7
3.22
3.23
Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after
Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to
successfully complete each test.
.2
Acceptance.
.1
After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of
both Consultant and Owner, Consultant will accept control system as meeting
completion requirements. Consultant may exempt tests from completion
requirements that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond
Contractor's control. Consultant will provide written statement of each exempted
test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of warranty.
.2
System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and
checklists are submitted and approved as required.
CLEANING
.1
Each day clean up debris resulting from work. Remove packaging material as
soon as its contents have been removed. Collect waste and place in designated
location.
.2
On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep
areas free from dust, dirt, and debris.
.3
On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint
damage. Repair damaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas.
Replace deformed cabinets and enclosures with new material and repaint to
match adjacent areas.
TRAINING
.1
Provide training for a designated staff of Owner's representatives. Training shall be
provided via self-paced training, web-based or computer-based training, classroom
training, or a combination of training methods.
.2
Training shall enable students to accomplish the following objectives.
.1
Proficiently operate system
.2
Understand control system architecture and configuration
.3
Understand DDC system components
.4
Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing
routines (algorithms)
.5
Operate workstation and peripherals
.6
Log on and off system
.7
Access graphics, point reports, and logs
.8
Adjust and change system set-points, time schedules, and holiday schedules
.9
Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics,
trend graphs, and other system tools
.10
Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance manual
.11
Understand job layout and location of control components
.12
Access data from DDC controllers
.13
Operate portable operator's terminals
.14
Create and change system graphics
.15
Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions
.16
Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend
graphs
.17
Configure and run reports
43
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
.3
.4
.5
.6
44
.18
Add, remove, and modify system's physical points
.19
Create, modify, and delete application programming
.20
Add operator interface stations
.21
Add a new controller to system
.22
Download firmware and advanced applications programming to a controller
.23
Configure and calibrate I/O points
.24
Maintain software and prepare backups
.25
Interface with job-specific, third-party operator software
.26
Add new users and understand password security procedures
Divide presentation of objectives into three sessions (1-13, 14-23, and 24-26).
Participants will attend one or more of sessions, depending on knowledge level
required.
.1
Day-to-day Operators (objectives 1-13)
.2
Advanced Operators (objectives 1-13 and 14-23)
.3
System Managers and Administrators (objectives 1-13 and 14-26)
Provide course outline and materials Provide one copy of training material per student.
Instructors shall be factory-trained and experienced in presenting this material.
Perform classroom training using a network of working controllers representative of
installed hardware.
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
APPENDIX A - Sequences of Operation
Refer to section 230993.11 and the mechanical drawings for the Sequences of Operation and Points
List.
45
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
APPENDIX B - Glossary of Terms
Terms used within the Specification Text:
 Advanced Application Controller (AAC):
A fully programmable control module. This control module may be capable of some of the
advanced features found in Building Controllers (storing trends, initiating read and write
requests, etc.) but it does not serve as a master controller. Advanced Application Controllers
may reside on either the Ethernet/IP backbone or on a subnet.
 Application Specific Controller (ASC):
A pre-programmed control module which is intended for use in a specific application. ASCs
may be configurable, in that the user can choose between various pre-programmed options,
but it does not support full custom programming. ASCs are often used on terminal equipment
such as VAV boxes or fan coil units. In many vendors' architectures ASCs do not store trends
or schedules but instead rely upon a Building Controller to provide those functions.
 BACnet/IP:
An approved BACnet network type which uses an Ethernet carrier and IP addressing.
 BACnet MS/TP:
An approved BACnet network type which uses a Master-Slave Token Passing configuration.
MS/TP networks are unique to BACnet and utilize EIA485 twisted pair topology running at
9600 to 76,800 bps.
 BACnet over ARCNET:
An approved BACnet network type which uses an ARCNET (attached resource computer
network) carrier. ARCNET is an industry standard that can utilize several speeds and wiring
standards. The most common configuration used by BACnet controllers is an EIA485 twisted
pair topology running at 156,000 bps.
 Building Controller (BC):
A fully programmable control module which is capable of storing trends and schedules, serving
as a router to devices on a subnet, and initiating read and write requests to other controllers.
Typically this controller is located on the Ethernet/IP backbone of the BAS. In many vendors'
architectures a Building Controller will serve as a master controller, storing schedules and
trends for controllers on a subnet underneath the Building Controller.
 Direct Digital Control (DDC):
A control system in which a digital computer or microprocessor is directly connected to the
valves, dampers, and other actuators which control the system, as opposed to indirectly
controlling a system by resetting setpoints on an analog pneumatic or electronic controller.
 PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement:
A written document, created by the manufacturer of a device, which identifies the particular
options specified by BACnet that are implemented in the device.
 Smart Actuator (SA):
An actuator which is controlled by a network connection rather than a binary or analog signal.
(0-10v, 4-20mA, relay, etc.)
 Smart Sensor (SS):
A sensor which provides information to the BAS via network connection rather than a binary or
analog signal. (0-10000 ohm, 4-20mA, dry contact, etc.)
 Web services:
Web services are a standard method of exchanging data between computer systems using the
XML (extensible markup language) and SOAP (simple object access protocol) standards. Web
46
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
services can be used at any level within a Building Automation System (BAS), but most
commonly they are used to transfer data between BAS using different protocols or between a
BAS and a non-BAS system such as a tenant billing system or a utility management system.
Terms used within the Sequences of Operation:
 adj.
Adjustable by the end user, through the supplied user interface.
 AI, AO, etc. (Column Headings on Points List)
AI = Analog Input. A physical input to the control module.
AO = Analog Output. A physical output from the control module.
AV = Analog Value. An intermediate (software) point that may be editable or read-only.
Editable AVs are typically used to allow the user to set a fixed control parameter, such as a
setpoint. Read Only AVs are typically used to display the status of a control operation.
BI = Binary Input. A physical input to the control module.
BO = Binary Output. A physical output from the control module.
BV = Binary Value. An intermediate (software) point that may be editable or read-only.
Editable BVs are typically used to allow the user to set a fixed control parameter, such as a
setpoint. Read Only BVs are typically used to display the status of a control operation.
Sched = Schedule. The control algorithm for this equipment shall include a user editable
schedule.
Loop = A control loop. Most commonly a PID control loop. Typically a control loop will include
a setpoint, an input which is compared to the setpoint, and an output which controls some
action based upon the difference between the input and the setpoint. A PID control loop will
also include gains for the proportional, integral, and derivative response as well as an interval
which controls how frequently the control loop updates its output. These gains may be
adjustable by the end user for control loop "tuning," but in self-tuning control loops or loops
which have been optimized for a specific application the gains may not be adjustable.
Trend. The control system shall be configured to collect and display a trend log of this object.
The trending interval shall be no less than one sample every 5 minutes. (Change of Value
trending, where a sample is taken every time the value changes by more than a user-defined
minimum, is an acceptable alternative.)
Alarm. The control system shall be configured to generate an alarm when this object exceeds
user definable limits, as described in the Sequence of Controls.
Note: If the specifications require use of the BACnet protocol, all of the above shall be
provided as BACnet objects.
 KW Demand Limiting: *
An energy management strategy that reduces energy consumption when a system's electric
power meter exceeds an operator-defined threshold.
When power consumption exceeds defined levels, the system automatically adjust setpoints,
de-energizes low priority equipment, and takes other pre-programmed actions to avoid peak
demand charges. As the demand drops, the system restores loads in a predetermined
manner.
 Occupant Override Switch, or Timed Local Override:
A control option that allows building occupants to override the programmed HVAC schedule
for a limited period of time.
When the override time expires, the zone returns to its unoccupied state.
 Occupant Setpoint Adjustment:
47
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS



A control option that allows building occupants to adjust - within limits set by the HVAC control
system - the heating and cooling setpoints of selected zones. Typically the user interface for
this function is built into the zone sensor.
Optimal Start-Up: *
A control strategy that automatically starts an HVAC system at the latest possible time yet
ensures comfort conditions by the time the building becomes occupied.
In a typical implementation, a controller measures the temperature of the zone and the outside
air. Then, using design heating or cooling capacity at the design outside air temperature, the
system computes how long a unit must run at maximum capacity to bring the zone
temperature to its occupied setpoint.
The optimal start algorithm often includes a self-learning feature to adjust for variations from
design capacity.
A distributed system must use Run on Request with Optimal Start. (See below.)
Requested, or Run on Request: *
A control strategy that optimizes the runtime of a source piece of equipment that supplies one
or more receiving units - such as an air handler unit supplying zone terminal units with heating,
cooling, ventilation, or similar service. Source equipment runs only when needed, not on a
fixed schedule.
The source equipment runs when one or more receiving units request its services. An operator
determines how many requests are required to start the source equipment.
For example, if all the zones in a building are unoccupied and the zone terminal units do not
need heating or cooling, the AHU will shut down. However, if a zone becomes occupied or
needs cooling, the terminal unit will send a run request to the AHU to initiate the start-up
sequence. If this AHU depends on a central chiller, it can send a run request to the chiller.
The run on request algorithm also allows an operator to schedule occupancy for individual
zones based on the needs of the occupants without having to adjust the schedules of related
AHUs and chillers.
Trim and Respond, or Setpoint Optimization: *
A control strategy that optimizes the setpoint of a source piece of equipment that supplies one
or more receiving units - such as an air handler unit supplying zone terminal units with heating,
cooling, ventilation, or similar service.
The source unit communicates with receiving units to determine heating, cooling, and other
requirements, and then adjusts its setpoint.
For example, if all zones are comfortable and do not request cooling, the AHU will gradually
increase (trim) its supply air setpoint. When a zone requests cooling, the AHU responds by
dropping its setpoint. The more zones that request cooling, the more it drops the setpoint. The
AHU repeats this process throughout the day to keep zones cool, but with a supply air setpoint
that is no cooler than necessary.
Contracting Terms:
 Furnished or Provided:
The act of supplying a device or piece of equipment as required meeting the scope of work
specified and making that device or equipment operational. All costs required to furnish the
specified device or equipment and make it operational are borne by the division specified to be
responsible for providing the device or equipment.
 Install or Installed:
48
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS


The physical act of mounting, piping or wiring a device or piece of equipment in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and the scope of work as specified. All costs required to
complete the installation are borne by the division specified to include labor and any ancillary
materials.
Interface:
The physical device required to provide integration capabilities from an equipment vendor's
product to the control system. The equipment vendor most normally furnishes the interface
device. An example of an interface is the chilled water temperature reset interface card
provided by the chiller manufacturer in order to allow the control system to integrate the chilled
water temperature reset function into the control system.
Integrate:
The physical connections from a control system to all specified equipment through an interface
as required to allow the specified control and monitoring functions of the equipment to be
performed via the control system.
49
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
APPENDIX C - Abbreviations
The following abbreviations may be used in graphics, schematics, point names, and other UI
applications where space is at a premium.
AC - Air Conditioning
AHU - Air Handling Unit
AI - Analog Input
AO - Analog Output
AUTO - Automatic
AUX - Auxiliary
BI -Binary Input
BO -Binary Output
C -Common
CHW - Chilled Water
CHWP - Chilled Water Pump
CHWR - Chilled Water Return
CHWS - Chilled Water Supply
COND - Condenser
CW - Condenser Water
CWP - Condenser Water Pump
CWR - Condenser Water Return
CWS - Condenser Water Supply
DA - Discharge Air
EA - Exhaust Air
EF - Exhaust Fan
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
HOA - Hand / Off / Auto
HP - Heat Pump
HRU - Heat Recovery Unit
HEX - Heat Exchanger
HW - Hot Water
HWP - Hot Water Pump
HWR - Hot Water Return
HWS - Hot Water Supply
MAX - Maximum
MIN - Minimum
MISC - Miscellaneous
NC - Normally Closed
NO - Normally Open
OA - Outdoor Air
RA - Return Air
RF - Return Fan
RH - Relative Humidity
RTU - Roof-top Unit
SA - Supply Air
SF - Supply Fan
SP - Static Pressure
TEMP - Temperature
50
Rev 5, July 12,2013
TORONTO CATHOLIC DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
SECTION 239994
DIGITAL CONTROLS
UH - Unit Heater
UV - Unit Ventilator
VAV - Variable Air Volume
W/ - with
W/O - without
51
Rev 5, July 12,2013
Electrical & Communications
Specifications
for
Addition to
St. Elizabeth Catholic School
5 Redcar Avenue,
Toronto, Ontario
ENSO Systems Inc.
5700 Yonge Street, Suite 200
Toronto, Ontario, M2M 4K2
Tel/Fax: (416) 410-9865
Email: ensosystems@rogers.com
March 3, 2014
Project: 865
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 1
INDEX FOR DIVISION 26
Section
Title
260000
260001
083113
260519
Index
General Conditions
Access Door and Frames
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
And Cables
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways
And Cabling
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
Identification for Electrical Systems
Lighting Control Devices
Panelboards
Wiring Devices
Fuses
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Enclosed Controllers
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
260526
260529
260533
260544
260548.16
260553
260923
262416
262726
262813
262816
262913
265100
265600
Page
END OF INDEX
March 3, 2014
ESI# 865
1
2
11
15
18
23
27
34
37
43
50
55
63
67
70
75
81
90
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 2
SECTION 260001 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
General
1.1
Comply with the drawings, all specification sections including Division 00, 01, 02, 26, 27
and 28, and all documents referred to therein.
The work of these Divisions - Electrical and Communications is divided into Divisions and
Subsections.
1.2



Division 26 – Electrical Systems
Division 27 – Communications Systems, and
Division 28 – Electrical Safety & Security.
1.3
Subsections are in order, but may not be numbered consecutively. Refer to the Index at
each Division and page numbers.
2
Definitions and Interpretations
2.1
The term "provide" shall be understood to include labour, materials, and services
necessary to supply and install item or work referred to.
The term "approved", "approval", etc., shall be understood to mean approved by
authorities having jurisdiction as conforming to Codes, Standards, By-laws, etc.
The term “accessible” shall be understood to mean readily accessible by a person using
necessary tools but without cutting or breaking out material.
The term “exposed” shall be understood to mean within the line of sight of any person
standing, sitting in or using the occupied space, unless defined otherwise in the Sections
of Division 16.
The term “listed” shall be understood to mean that the materials or equipment have been
tested in accordance with applicable standards, and have been approved and listed for
their intended use by a testing company approved by the Authorities having jurisdiction.
The term “subject to review” shall be understood to mean work or materials shall be laid
out for review. No work shall proceed until instructions have been obtained. Submit further
information, shop drawings, samples, etc., as specified and as may be reasonably
requested.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
Laws and Regulations
Work provided under this Division shall conform to the standards and codes, current
by-laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. In case of conflict, the codes,
by-laws and regulations take precedence over the Contract Documents. Do not reduce
the standard established by the drawings and specifications by applying codes, by-laws
and regulations.
4
Permits and Fees
Give notices, obtain and pay for permits including Electrical Safety Authority Inspection
and pay all fees necessary to complete the work of this Division. Include for all testing and
demonstration to authorities having jurisdiction required to obtain final approvals.
5
Drawings
The drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate
general arrangement and approximate location of equipment, fixtures, conduit and cable
runs. Take information involving accurate dimensions of the building by site
measurements.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 3
6
Examination
6.1
Examine existing buildings, building site and local conditions affecting the work together
with drawings and specifications of other Divisions forming part of the Tender Documents,
before Tendering. Submit notice of omissions, discrepancies, defects or interferences
affecting the work before submitting Tender.
6
Co-ordination
6.1
Lay out work so that it does not conflict with work of other Trades. Prepare field drawings
showing size and location of equipment bases, sleepers, inserts, sleeves and openings
required for passage of bus ducts, conduits, cables, etc., through walls, partitions, roofs,
ceilings, floors and structural members. Submit field drawings as specified under Shop
Drawings.
No extra cost or credit shall be incurred for any change in location of equipment, providing
distance does not exceed 3 m (10') and information is given before installation of said
equipment.
Coordinate work with all other trades and notify consultant of any conflicts or
discrepancies prior to rough-in.
6.2
6.3
7
Standard of Materials and Equipment
7.1
7.2
Material required for performance of work shall be new and of uniform pattern throughout
work. Identical units or equipment shall be of same manufacture.
All material and equipment shall be of the type subject to Factory Mutual, Underwriters'
Laboratories of Canada or Canadian Standards Association inspection and approval and
shall bear ULC or CSA labels.
8
Protection of Work and Materials
Protect materials and equipment from damage, inclement weather and/or extreme temperatures. Provide enclosures, tarpaulins, or special protection as required under the
circumstances. Be responsible for the protection and maintenance of the work of this
Division until the work has been completed and accepted.
9
Warranty
9.1
Warrant equipment and work against defects, deficiencies in design and workmanship
for a period of one year after acceptance.
Provide extended warranties where called for. Submit (1) copy of warranty certificates with
Data Book.
9.2
10
Trial Usage
Allow for use of electrical systems to be thoroughly tested before final completion and
acceptance of the work. Supply labour and equipment for such tests.
11
Superintendence
Maintain at the job site for the full duration of the project, qualified personnel with proven
experience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable nature
and complexity.
12
Data Books, Operating and Maintenance Instructions
13.1
Submit three copies of final reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's maintenance and
operating instruction for each piece of major equipment and system. Include the names
and addresses of spare parts suppliers and service organizations.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
13.2
Electrical Specifications
Page 4
13.3
Compile copies in sets in hard cover three-ring data books, with index page and indexing
tabs.
Provide the services of qualified personnel to instruct and familiarize the Owner's
operating and maintenance staff with the correct procedures of operating and maintaining
systems and equipment.
13
Base Bid and Supplementary Electrical Tender Form
13.1
Products names and/or model numbers shown are for the purpose of establishing a
standard of quality, performance, serviceability, appearance and capacity. Base tenders
on the materials, equipment and methods specifically named in the specifications or
indicated on the drawings. Submit proposed substitutions or alternatives in accordance
with the following procedures:
14.1.1 Where products, materials, methods and services are specifically named or
identified as "Base Bid" items, submit proposed substitutions and/or alternatives as
required by the Supplementary or Electrical Tender Form.
14.1.2 Where products, materials and methods are not specifically named or identified as
"Base Bid" items, include one of the listed acceptable equipment manufacturers,
methods and/or services (where applicable) in the tender and show the product
and/or service on which the tender is based as required by the Supplementary or
Electrical Tender Form.
14.2
14.3
15
15.1
15.2
15.3
The tenderer is encouraged to offer products and materials by manufacturers not included
in the specification. Do not include these items in the tender sum, but show items
separately as substitutes complete with changes in price.
Ensure that offered substitutions and/or alternatives meet space, weight, connection,
power and wiring requirements, etc. All costs incurred for additional components, changes
to services, structural or space requirements, layouts and plans, etc., necessary to
accommodate the alternative or substitute items shall be borne by this Division.
Shop Drawings and Samples
Submit shop drawings for review in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and
furnish shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction for review where applicable.
Submit shop drawings showing details of construction, weights, accurate dimensions,
capacities, performances and wiring diagrams for each piece of major equipment and for
each piece of equipment listed under "Shop Drawings" article in the Trade Section.
Include shop drawings for distribution equipment, transformers, luminaires, switches
(disconnect, safety, transfer), generators, emergency lighting and battery system, fire
alarm system, lighting control equipment, cable trays and modular wireways, fuses,
heating, low voltage wiring systems, wiring devices, and other special equipment as
requested by the Consultant.
Indicate the following information:



15.4
Manufacturer's and Supplier's name, catalogue model number
Name of trade supplying item, project numbers
Number identifying item in the contract documents such as splitter, transformer and
panel numbers, luminaire identification symbols, etc.
Check for pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make, performance,
electrical characteristics before submittal. Be responsible for accuracy of equipment
dimensions related to available space, accessibility for maintenance and compliance with
Codes and Regulations.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
16
16.1
16.2
17
Electrical Specifications
Page 5
Review of the drawings shall be construed to apply to general arrangement only and shall
not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings and
specifications, unless he has submitted written notice of such deviations at the time of
submission of drawings and samples.
Furnish prints of the reviewed shop drawing details to other parties for co-ordination.
Submit samples of material and equipment where specified or as instructed for review
before ordering same. Samples may be retained until the completion of the contract.
Complete all work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. All materials and
workmanship shall be equal to reviewed samples.
Record Drawings and Demonstration
Obtain and pay for one set of black line record drawings relating to the work of this
Division and keep at the job site. Note clearly, accurately and promptly revisions to the
work and deviations from the Contract Documents. Dimension the location, depth, size
and type of underground services from convenient reference points.
Submit three sets of prints and one disk with record drawings (in AutoCAD 2010) upon
completion of work. Construction drawing files will be made available for contractor’s use.
Accessibility
Install work so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repairs by
access panels or other acceptable means.
18
18.1
18.2
18.3
19
19.1
Concealment
Conceal conduit and cables except in unfinished areas such as service rooms or as
noted on the drawings where conduits shall be surface mounted. Chase walls were
necessary to conceal conduit and boxes.
Install services that are to be concealed as close to the building structure as possible so
that furrings, ceiling spaces and other enclosures can be of minimum size. Run exposed
services parallel to building lines.
Identify locations and submit notice where installation of work interferes with interior
treatment and use of space. Await instructions before proceeding with the work.
Final Inspection
Submit a written request to arrange for a final inspection of all electrical systems when:
19.1.1 Deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
19.1.2 Systems have been tested and reports submitted. Obtain and submit
unconditional final inspection certificate to Owner upon completion of work.
19.1.3 Operating and maintenance manuals have been submitted.
19.1.4 Tags are in place and equipment identified.
19.1.5 Owner's operating personnel have been given operating and maintenance
instructions.
19.2
20
20.1
Obtain and submit unconditional final inspection certificate from local Authorities having
jurisdiction to Owner upon completion of work.
Cutting, Patching and Firestopping
Advise other Trades of the location of openings required for the installation of this
Division's work. Provide and set sleeves, inserts, anchors, etc., when requested in
advance of concrete pouring or similar work. Pay for and employ the Trades whose work
is involved for cutting and patching of completed work. Lay out such work for review. Do
not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
21
Electrical Specifications
Page 6
Unless noted otherwise, perform and pay for cutting and patching in existing construction
required for installation of work under the Electrical Division. Sleeve as specified
elsewhere in this Specification.
Do not cut reinforcing steel without written instructions.
Provide fire stopping and smoke sealant where required for work by this Division. Refer
to general sections for material specifications.
Make good openings in walls and floors where demolished equipment, conduit, etc., are
removed.
Site Visit
Site visits are strongly suggested to all bidders in order to review existing conditions that
may affect the work. Advise the Owner’s representative 72 hours in advance of planned
site visit and make all necessary arrangements to gain access to the areas affected by
the work of the Contract.
22
22.1
Applicable Codes, Standards and Authorities
Codes, standards and authorities governing the work of this Division shall include but not
be limited to the following:
22.1.1
22.1.2
22.1.3
22.1.4
22.1.5
22.1.6
22.2
Authorities:
22.2.1
22.2.2
22.2.3
22.2.4
22.2.5
23
23.1
23.2
24
Ontario Building Code, current edition, and all Ontario Regulations.
National Building Code of Canada, current edition.
Fire Protection: Insurance Underwriters (Agency).
Department of Labour Regulations.
Ontario Electrical Safety Code
Elevating Devices Act & Elevator Code
Municipal Building Department
Municipal Fire Prevention Authorities
Electrical Safety Authority
Ontario Ministry of Energy and Environment
Ontario Fire Marshal’s Office
Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in these documents shall be as shown in the Table 1 at the end of this
section.
Other abbreviations may be used and shall be interpreted as referred to in the Ontario
Building Code and Electrical Safety Code.
English/Metric Conversion
Metric Units of measurement used in this specification are based on the International
System of Units (SI) contained in "The Canadian Metric Practice Guide" prepared by the
Canadian Standards Association, Publication Number CAN3-Z234.1-76. Motor and pipe
size conversions used are as in Table 2 at the end of this section.
25
List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods and Services
See Table 3 at end of section and Luminaire schedule on the drawings.
26
26.1
Hoisting Apparatus
Unless noted otherwise, provide all apparatus necessary for the hoisting and placing of
materials or equipment forming part of this Division.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
26.2
27
27.1
Electrical Specifications
Page 7
Ensure that all equipment and materials can be hoisted and set in place. Include for the
cost of dismantling and reassembling equipment where required.
Work in Existing Building
General
27.1.1 Route new services to avoid interference with existing construction.
27.1.2 Cut back and terminate existing services to present a neat appearance.
27.1.3 Remove and dispose of existing abandoned conduit, wiring, cables, devices,
equipment, fixtures, hangers and supports. All wiring and cable to be removed to
source panel. All unused outlet boxes (where it is not practical to remove same)
shall be blanked with coverplates.
27.1.4 Hand over to the Owner existing equipment to be removed such as panels,
transformers, splitters, etc., when requested by the Owner.
27.1.5 Refer also to Demolition Section in the Contract Documents.
27.1.6 Conceal all conduit and boxes except in unfinished areas such as service rooms
or as noted on the drawings where conduits shall be surface mounted. Walls
shall be chased where necessary.
27.1.7 It shall be the responsibility of any contractor, who while working on this project
may disturb the wiring or produce heat, smoke, or dust that may activate the fire
alarm system, to arrange to have the fire detectors in the area isolated before
commencing such work. Failure to comply may result in false alarms.
Subsequent charges and fines by the local municipality for attending to a false
alarm shall be borne by this contractor
27.2 Work Schedule
Carry out Owner/user disturbing work after hours or on weekends. For further details refer
to Instructions to Bidders.
27.3 X-ray and Scanning
27.3.1 Before core drilling any concrete floors or walls, x-ray and/or scan the area in
question. Include for premium time to perform this work.
28
Continuity of Existing Services
28.1 Include in tender price for overtime work that may be required to tie-in services and wiring
at night or weekends.
29
Testing
29.1 Perform tests on each system and submit test results for approval prior to the final
acceptance of the work. Repair or correct deficiencies and re-test system as directed.
29.2 Balance panels within 5%.
29.3 Grounding shall be as required by the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.
29.4 Test all system grounding conductors for phase to ground loads; ammeter shall read less
than one ampere.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 8
Table 1 - Abbreviations
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
AFF or A.F.F.
Above Finished Floor
AFG or A.F.G.
Above Finished Grade
ANSI or A.N.S.I.
American National Safety Institute
ASA or A.S.A.
American Standards Association
ASHRAE -
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning
ASTM -
American Society For Testing Materials
BB
Plywood backboard (FR indicates fire-rated)
BOD or B.O.D.
By Other Division
CGA
Canadian Gas Association
CGSB
Canadian Government Specification Board
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CUA
Canadian Underwriter's Association
C
Conduit
C/W or c/w
Complete With
EEMAC or E.E.M.A.C.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association Of Canada
ESA
Electrical Safety Authority
FA(P) or FAAP
Fire Alarm (Panel) or Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel
FR or FR BB
Fire-rated or fire-rated backboard
HP or hp
High Pressure Or Horsepower
JB
Junction Box
KG or kg
Kilograms
KW or kw
Kilowatts
LP or PP or RP
Lighting Panel, Power Panel, Receptacle Panel
LV
Low voltage
M or m
Meters
MM or mm
Millimeters
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NC, NO or nc, no
Normally Open, Normally Closed. Position When Power Is Off or
Control Signal Output Is Zero
OBC
Ontario Building Code, current version
OESC
Ontario Electrical Safety Code, current version
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 9
Table 1 - Abbreviations continued
Abbreviation:
Long Form:
PP
Power Pole
RPM or rpm
Revolutions Per Minute
SB
Switchboard
SP
Splitter
SS or S.S.
Stainless Steel
TSSA
Technical Standards and Safety Authority
TX or tx
Transformer
ULC
Underwriter's Laboratory of Canada
WM
Wiremold
Table 2 - Motor and Conduit Size Conversions
English System
Motor Size
HP
.5
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
kW
.37
English System
Conduit Size
Inches (“)
1/2
Metric System
Nominal Equivalent
MM
12 or 15
.75
.56
3/4
20
1
.75
1
25
1.5
1.1
1-1/4
32
2
1.5
1-1/2
40
3
2.2
2
50
5
3.7
2-1/2
65
7.5
5.5
3
75
10
7.5
3-1/2
90
15
10.5
4
100
20
15
5
125
25
19
6
150
30
22
8
200
40
30
10
250
50
37
12
300
60
45
14
350
75
56
16
400
100
75
18
450
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 10
Table 3 - List of Base Bid and Acceptable Equipment Manufacturers, Methods & Services
The following is a list of acceptable equipment manufacturer, methods and services. Any
deviation from the following list must be identified at the time of Tender closing on the
Supplementary Tender Form.
Component
Acceptable Product
Safety Switches
& Panelboards
Square D (Schneider Electric)
Siemens
Cutler Hammer (Eaton)
Contactors &
Starters
Square D
Siemens
Cutler Hammer
Allen-Bradley
Wiring Devices
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Hubbell
Arrow Hart
Exit Lights and
Battery Packs
Lumacell
Emergi-Lite
Beghelli
Fluorescent Ballast
And Lamps
Phillips
Osram-Sylvania
Fluorescent Fixtures
Visioneering
CFI
Metalux
Lithonia
Compact Fluorescent
Fixtures
Calculite
Halo
Lithonia
Fixture Type: M1, M2
McGraw Edison
Keene
Fire Alarm
Simplex Grinnell
Time Clocks
Paragon
Pass & Seymour
Intermatic
Motion sensors/
Photocells
Wattstopper
Lutron
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
End of Section 260001
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 11
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
2.
Floor access doors and frames.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
D.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and
profiles, and finishes.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of
substrate.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 75x125mm (3x5’’) in size, in specified
finish, when requested.
Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with CAN/ULC S101, OBC
specified edition, that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for firetest-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed
and labeled by ULC or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source
from single manufacturer.
Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's
standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
5.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
Finish: No. 2b.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
6.
7.
8.
C.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with
gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
D.
Electrical Specifications
Page 12
Finish: No. 2b.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Recessed Access Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door in the form of a pan recessed 1/2 inch (13
mm), 5/8 inch (16 mm), or 1 inch (25 mm), sized to suit infill material (drywall, tile,
etc.) Provide frame with gypsum board bead for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage.
Finish: Factory prime.
5.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
6.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
7.
8.
9.
E.
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Finish: No. 2b.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges FAP:
1.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineralfiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic
closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for
concealed flange installation in ceilings and exposed flange for drywall partitions
unless concealed flanges are requested by the Architect.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: minimum 300x300 (12x12’’) to 900x900mm (24x24’’) to suit
application.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of construction assembly into which
the door is being inserted to a minimum of 2 hours.
Temperature-Rise Rating: 450OF (250OC) at the end of 30 minutes.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch (1.63 mm), 16 gage.
a.
7.
F.
A.
B.
C.
Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.
Lock: Mortise cylinder.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to
types of supports indicated.
2.
3.
4.
For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board or
gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide
zinc-coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter
of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood
framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of
applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
1.
E.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Continuous for entire length of door.
Hardware: Latch unless noted to be lockable on the drawings.
FABRICATION
1.
D.
Finish: No. 2b.
Hardware:
1.
2.
2.3
Finish: factory prime where surface is to be painted by General Trades or
factory finish enameled white, subject to Architect’s approval, for areas that
will not be painted by General Trades.
Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage.
a.
8.
9.
10.
Electrical Specifications
Page 13
For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath
attached to door panel.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
1.
2.
For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
F.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating
on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
E.
Electrical Specifications
Page 14
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromatefree, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for
topcoat.
Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Supply architectural style recessed frame and flange type access panels for locations
where electrical equipment or any other device requiring maintenance or adjustment is
"built-in"; such as junction boxes, relays, etc. Include cost of installation by qualified
tradesmen.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
Do not provide access panels in removable panel type ceilings. Indicate location of
equipment with acceptable markers.
Size and locate access panels in applied tile, or in glazed or unglazed structural tile to
suit block patterns.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.3
A.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 15
ADJUSTING
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing Agency Qualifications: an NRTL plus OESC and OBC approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Copper Conductors and Insulation: shall comply with the OESC and be CSA listed, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Multiconductor Cable: shall comply with the OESC and be CSA listed, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
Feeders Concealed in Raceway: Type RW90 (90OC) for indoors or RWU-90, X-Link (40OC) for outdoors, as dictated by Code, single conductors.
Exposed Feeders:
 TECK, multiple conductor with annealed, Class B, stranded copper conductors and
cross-linked polyethylene, RW90 insulation, 1000 volt rating for #8 AWG and larger.
Grounding to be un-insulated tinned stranded copper with non-hygroscopic filter
material to maintain circular cross-section. Inner and outer jackets to be PVC
‘Flamenol’ suitable for –40OC with mylar tape separator and aluminum strip, armour
helically wound and interlocked.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
Building wire connectors to be Ideal ‘Wing Nut’ or equal for wire sizes up to #6 AWG
and Burndy QQA (CU/AL) at studs and bus bars and Burndy Q2A or A3Q (CU/AL) for
wire sizes #4 and larger.
Cable connectors to be watertight with open compounded head, T&B series ‘Spin-on 2’
with corrosion resistant boot for armoured TECK cables, T&B ‘Tite-Bite’ with nylon
insulated throat for armoured cables steel type.
Install connectors and tighten as recommended by manufacturer.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 16
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories shall comply with the OESC and be
CSA listed, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for
No. 8 AWG and larger.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:
 Type RW90 (90OC) for indoors or RWU-90, X-Link (-40OC) for outdoors, as dictated by
Code, single conductors in raceway.
 AC90, multi-conductor, with solid annealed commercial grade 98% conductivity tinned
copper conductors and cross-linked polyethylene with R90 insulation, 600 volt rating on
#10 and #12 size. Grounding to be un-insulated, solid copper with impregnated paper
separator. Throat connectors and anti-short sleeves are required at all dressed ends.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
Low voltage (24 volts or less) control circuit conductors for thermostats (excludes fire
alarm and lighting controls): equivalent to branch circuit wire above or stranded copper
power-limited plenum rated (FT6) cable rated for 48 volts or higher concealed in
ceilings, walls and partitions.
Wiring in channel back of fluorescent luminaires shall be GTF or TEW type.
Aluminum wiring shall NOT be used unless specifically identified on the drawings.
Wires and cables shall be rated at 1000V for 347/600V circuits, 600 volts for 120/208V
circuits, 300 volts for low voltage control, security or fire alarm circuits.
All wires shall be new and delivered to the site of the project in their original packing.
Wires shall be factory identified, showing size, voltage rating and insulation type.
The minimum permissible size for branch circuit wiring shall be #12 AWG.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Use only Code approved wire for final fixture or appliance connections.
All wiring for feeders, branches, drops, devices, etc., to be in EMT conduit unless
otherwise noted. Use of Teck and Corflex cables will specifically noted on the
drawings.
Armoured cable (BX) AC90 may only be used for:
 final lighting connections to a maximum of 1.5m (5’); note that final connections to
lighting fixtures shall originate from an outlet box; connections of fixture body to fixture
body are not acceptable,
 continuous rows of recessed pot lights in drywall or plaster ceilings,
 final connection to a power pole to a maximum of 3m (10’),
 final connection to a receptacle concealed in drywall partitions (must originate from a
junction box in the ceiling within 0.3m (12’’) of the wall entry point.
 DO NOT use armoured cable anywhere else without written permission.
D.
E.
The minimum permissible size for branch circuit wiring shall be #12 AWG.
Neutral conductor shall be white throughout, three phase wires shall be: one red, one
black and one blue or 3 black with coloured tape on each termination.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
3.3
A.
B.
Where common neutrals are used ensure that circuits are from different phases with a
minimum neutral size to be #10 AWG.
Provide a separate neutral for all separate circuits.
No splices are permitted for low voltage armoured cables.
Size wires for a maximum 2% voltage drop to farthest outlet on loaded circuit.
For 120V branch wiring exceeding 23m (75’) to the farthest outlet on a loaded circuit
shall be #10 AWG
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Do not pull or install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable.
Secure and support low voltage (thermostat) cables in ceiling plenums with j-hooks at
intervals not to exceed 1200mm (4’) or tie wrap to open web steel joists; do not allow
cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles. Fasten securely in place with hardware
specifically designed and installed as per manufacturer’s recommendations so as to
not damage cables.
Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points
according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to
pulling conductors and cables.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,
that will not damage cables or raceway.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural
members, and follow surface contours where possible.
Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to
eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
CONNECTIONS
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values.
Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and
that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
A.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 17
Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors
where aluminum conductors are specifically specified.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 300 mm (12 inches) of
slack.
Do NOT splice low voltage (thermostat) cables.
Termination lugs for feeders shall be compression type.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other
end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 18
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413
"Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 260519
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following
special applications:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features
specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1.
2.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
B.
Underground distribution grounding.
Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.
Foundation steel electrodes.
Ground rods.
Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories shall comply with the OESC and be
CSA listed, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application..
Comply with latest version of Electrical Safety Code for grounding and bonding
materials and equipment.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
Burndy or
Thomas and Betts
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
CONDUCTORS
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise
required by the OESC or by the Authorities having jurisdiction.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
2.3
A.
B.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor as required by
latest version of OESC.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; minimum size as permitted by the OESC and by the Authorities having
jurisdiction.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 6.3 by 100 mm (1/4 by
4 inches) by length (noted on plans or 600mm (24’’) where not noted) in cross section,
with 7.14-mm (9/32-inch) holes spaced 28mm (1-1/8 inches) apart. Stand-off insulators
for mounting shall comply with UL 891 and the Electrical Safety Code for use in
switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
CONNECTORS
Shall comply with the OESC and be CSA listed, by a qualified testing agency, and
marked for intended location and for applications in which used and for specific types,
sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.
Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression or
exothermic type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
Ground Rods: size and spacing as required by the OESC.
Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped,
charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts where specifically noted as
being required on the drawings.
1.
2.
Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 1200mm (48
inches) long or minimum size permitted by the Electrical Safety Code.
Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
APPLICATIONS
Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily
limited to following list: service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems,
frames of motors, starters, control panels, building steel and metal cladding work,
generators, elevator rails, communication systems, distribution panels and outdoor
lighting.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for #8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors
for #6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Size and install (bury at depth) as required by the
OESC.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe.
On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal
inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of
green and two bands of yellow.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as
otherwise indicated.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be
connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and
ground buses.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders, branch circuits and
the following items (not an all inclusive list).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 20
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from
raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding
conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise
indicated.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch
circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a
nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters
enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate
conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at
equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service
unless otherwise indicated.
INSTALLATION
Install complete permanent, continuous, system and circuit, equipment, grounding
systems including electrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories, as indicated, to
conform to requirements of local Hydro Authority and the OESC.
Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with
lugs.
Soldered joints not permitted.
Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at one end to grounding bushing,
soldieries lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of
flexible conduit.
Install separate ground wire in each conduit and bond to box. DO NOT USE CONDUIT
AS GROUND.
Connect building structural steel to ground by welding copper to steel.
Make buried connections, and connections to conductive water main and electrodes,
using copper welding by thermit process.
Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating
at single grounding point and connecting to incoming metal water pipe. Avoid loop
connections.
Bond single conductor, metallic armoured cables to cabinet at supply end, and provide
non-metallic entry plate at lead end.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless
otherwise indicated or required by the OESC. Avoid obstructing access or placing
conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: shall comply with the
OESC and be CSA listed, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning
protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding
electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final
grade unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
O.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
coating if any.
For grounding electrode system, install multiple ground rods spaced at least onerod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other
grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor
as required by the OESC and Authorities having jurisdiction.
Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes
are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
1.
P.
Electrical Specifications
Page 21
Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise
indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top
of test well flush with finished grade or floor.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
2.
3.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:
Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Q.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
R.
S.
T.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
B.
Metal Water Service Pipe (water, sanitary and storm piping): Install insulated
copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment,
or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect
grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp
connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug
bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass
water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system on customer side of gas
meter downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
Minimum wire size #6 AWG or as approved by local Authority having jurisdiction.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors
of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each
corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances in accordance with
the Electrical Safety Code and as approved by the local Authority having jurisdiction.
Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode: install in building foundation footings with
terminal and fabricate according to OESC; use copper conductor not smaller than #4/0
AWG.
1.
3.5
Electrical Specifications
Page 22
Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to
anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's
grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or
exothermic welding to create the required length.
Bond separate and multiple electrodes together.
Use size 4/0 AWG copper conductors for connections to electrodes.
Make special provision for installing electrodes that will give acceptable
resistance to ground value where rock or sand terrain prevails.
Minimum length to be 6m (20’ long) unless otherwise approved by the Authorities
having jurisdiction.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections when specifically noted.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Disconnect ground fault devices during tests.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum groundresistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 23
and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors
are connected.
a.
b.
5.
C.
D.
E.
Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than
natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other
artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform ground continuity and resistance test using method appropriate to
site conditions and to approval of local Authority having jurisdiction.
Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and groundrod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in
alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the
number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations
of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures
taken to improve test results.
Submit test and inspection reports for review.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Excessive Ground Resistance: if resistance to ground exceeds acceptable values,
notify Consultant promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and
installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
DEFINITIONS
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated. Maintain minimum criteria permitted by the
OESC.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of
supported systems and its contents.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five
times the applied force.
SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer if requested.
Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
A.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 24
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with
concrete Specifications.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components
for field assembly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester
coating applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in OESC or hereafter if stricter.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, straps, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical
conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of
conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.
Body shall be malleable iron.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: steel plates, shapes, and bars;
galvanized.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items
or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 25
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
Concrete Inserts: Steel, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: type suitable for attached
structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit
dimensions of supported equipment.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS
Description: 1200mm wide x 2400mm high x 19mm thick fire-retardant plywood
backboard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
APPLICATION
Provide supports for all conduits, luminaires, equipment, etc. installed by this Division.
Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of conduit, cable and
equipment in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer’s
installation recommendations.
Conduit Anchors: rigidly anchor all conduits to structural bearings where required to
control the direction of expansion and to prevent undue stress on branch connections
and structure or crushing of insulation in sleeves. Pay particular attention to all building
expansion joists.
Dissimilar metals shall not come in direct contact with each other.
Comply with OESC for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment
and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. Space hangers to
prevent sagging and to prevent conduit joints from carrying the weight of the conduit
and contents.
Support ceiling mounted equipment from the ceiling support system provided it is
adequate to carry weight of equipment specified. Provide Consultant and Electrical
Safety Authority with a sealed/stamped letter of approval from ceiling manufacturer or
Structural Engineer.
Support vertical conduits at each floor and/or at each length of conduit.
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related type of support structure
where indicated or required to support conduit runs, cable runs and raceways. Ensure
adequate vertical support where there is no wall support.
Support conduit with one hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables
50mm (2’’) and smaller and two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than
50mm.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used
for 38mm (1-1/2-inch) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to
trapeze supports.
Support individual cable or conduit runs with or without channels from 6mm (1/4’’)
diameter threaded rods and spring clips.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports for EMT and RMC as required by the OESC. Minimum rod size shall be 6mm
(1/4 inch) in diameter.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with U shape
pre-galvanized steel, 41mm x 41mm x 22mm support system, sized so capacity can be
increased by at least 50% in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
Provide backboards for mounting of panelboards, cabinets, contactors,
communications equipment, fire alarm control equipment, or any other equipment
where required by Code, local authorities, or designated on plans.
Hangers shall only be suspended from structural bearings such as beams, or joists.
Where such bearings do not exist use bridging steel. Do not weld hangers to structural
steel.
Do NOT use powder-actuated fasteners or wire lashing or perforated strap to support
or secure conduits, cables or raceways.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Comply with OESC for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described herein, conduits may be
supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in OESC.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so
strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified
loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be
weight of supported components plus 90 kg (200 lb).
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor
and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the
following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
3.3
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 26
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to self-drilling expandable concrete inserts.
To Masonry or tile: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and
expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs, lock washers and nuts, beam clamps or
spring-tension clamps.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to
substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage
requirements.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
Electrical Specifications
Page 27
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
PAINTING
Touchup: Comply with sections for Exterior and Interior Painting for cleaning and
touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint
on miscellaneous metal.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting and apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of
.05mm (2.0 mils).
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint.
END OF SECTION 260529
SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS, SPLITTERS, CABINETS, JUNCTION, PULL & OUTLET
BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
A.
B.
Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,
surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets,
and handholes serving communications systems.
Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits,
surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic
safety and security.
DEFINITIONS
GRC: heavy wall, galvanized steel, rigid threaded conduit.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
FMC: flexible metal conduit.
LFC: liquid (seal) tight flexible conduit.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
Samples: For exposed wireways and for each color and texture specified where
requested by the Consultant.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.5
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 28
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items
involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which
the certification is based and their installation requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall comply with the OESC
and be CSA listed, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
GRC: Comply with OESC.
EMT: Comply with OESC.
FMC: Comply with OESC; zinc-coated steel.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with OESC.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with OESC.
1.
2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with OESC.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
3.
4.
G.
H.
2.2
A.
Material: Steel.
Type: Setscrew.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with OESC,
rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external
bonding jumper.
Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 1mm (0.040
inch) with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in OESC, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
Do not use running threads. Use Ericson coupling where required.
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
Description: Sheet metal, complying with OESC and NEMA 250, Type 2 (typical indoor
use) Type 3R (service rooms), Type 4 (for exterior applications) or Type 12 (hazardous
locations) unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall comply with the OESC and be CSA
listed, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
2.3
A.
B.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type typical and flanged-and-gasketed type where
specifically noted on the drawings.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
SURFACE RACEWAYS
Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall comply with the
OESC and be CSA listed, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
Surface Metal Raceways shall comply with the OESC and be CSA listed, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Refer to drawing
legend for specification.
1.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Electrical Specifications
Page 29
Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses,
devices, mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with
raceway, boxes and devices as required for complete system.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: comply with the OESC
and be CSA listed, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet
locations.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: OESC gauge, welded construction and screwon flat covers. Provide covers with 25mm (1’’) minimum extension all the way around
for flush-mounted boxes.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: OESC gauge, ferrous alloy, type FS or FD, with
factory threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface mounted rigid conduit complete
with gasketed cover.
Masonry boxes: OESC gauge, electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi-gang
MBD boxes for masonry walls and electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete boxes with
matching extension and plaster rings for concrete walls and electro-galvanized steel
sectional screw gang type boxes with two double clamps for non-metallic sheathed
cable
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire including
weight of fixture, lamp, ballast, etc. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires
weighing more than 23 kg (50 lb) shall be listed and marked for the maximum
allowable weight.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: OESC gauge, welded construction and
screw-on flat covers. Provide covers with 25mm (1’’) minimum extension all the way
around for flush-mounted boxes.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material
as recessed box.
Device Box Dimensions: 100 mm square by 60 mm deep (4 inches square by 2-1/8
inches deep) and 100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep (4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 21/8 inches deep).
Utility boxes for connection to surface mounted EMT conduit shall be minimum 100mm
x 54mm x48mm (4’’x2.125’’x1.875’’).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Square or octagonal boxes for lighting shall be minimum 100mm (4’’).
Boxes for flush mounting devices in finished plaster or tile wall shall be minimum of
100mm (4’’).
Use 100mm (4’’) square boxes where more than one conduit enters one side with
extension and plaster rings as required.
Use 100mm (4’’) square boxes where more than one conduit enters one side with
extension and plaster rings as required.
Gangable boxes are allowed unless noted in the drawing details.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with OESC and NEMA 250, Type 2, 3R, 4 and 12
(to match box) with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
2.5
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 30
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
CONNECTORS FOR WIRES AND BOXES
Building wire connectors to be Ideal ‘Wing Nut’ or equal for wire sizes up to #6 AWG
and Burndy QQA (CU/AL) at studs and bus bars and Burndy Q2A or A3Q (CU/AL) for
wire sizes #4 and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
RACEWAY APPLICATION
Aluminum conduit shall NOT be used unless specifically noted.
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Exposed Conduit: GRC.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): liquid seal tight
flexible conduit, armoured cable or Corflex.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA type 4.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Unless otherwise noted, conduits inside the building for panel feeders, lighting,
fire alarm, branch circuit wiring, drops, devices, etc., shall be EMT. Steel fittings
shall be used with EMT; cast fittings are not acceptable. Connectors to be steel,
set screw type, nylon insulated. Conduit straps shall be single or double hole
steel
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT or Wiremold Raceway.
Exposed and Subject to Mechanical/Physical Damage or in Hazardous locations:
GRC Connectors to be steel, threaded type. Conduit straps shall be single or
double hole steel. Raceway locations include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Loading dock.
Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling
units.
Mechanical rooms.
Gymnasiums.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT unless armoured
cable is permitted.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
6.
7.
D.
E.
2.
3.
G.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): maximum 1m (3’)
FMC, except use LFMC in damp, wet or potentially wet locations. Connect FMC
to rigid conduit drop ahead of actual bend and have two additional clips over
normal requirements.
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4
stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet
locations.
Minimum Raceway Size: 21mm (3/4-inch) trade size.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
F.
Electrical Specifications
Page 31
Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise
indicated.
EMT: Use steel, setscrew type nylon insulated fittings; cast fittings are NOT
acceptable.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit.
Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where
aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in
nonmetallic sleeve.
Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
INSTALLATION
Comply with the OESC for installation requirements except where requirements on
drawings or specification are stricter.
Conduit sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall not be reduced in size
without authorization. Conduit in finished area shall be concealed. All conduits shall be
installed parallel to building lines.
Keep raceways at least 150mm (6’’) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems" for hangers and supports.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except
for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 300mm
(12’’) of changes in direction.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise
indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
Support conduit within 300mm (12’’) of enclosures to which attached.
Expansion Joints: where conduits cross expansion joints of building, as shown on
Architectural Drawings, provide approved type expansion joints complete with
grounding straps and clamps
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
Use EMT for raceways.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in
hubs or in an enclosure.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:
Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.
Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating
bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside
of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 35mm (1.25’’) trade size and
insulated throat metal bushings on 41mm (1.5’’) trade size and larger conduits
terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service
conduits.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts.
Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove
coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a
continuous ground path.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 53mm (2’’) trade size and larger,
use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 90kg (200-lb) tensile strength. Leave at least 1.2m (4’) of slack at
each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade
alongside raceways in use.
Surface Raceways:
1.
2.
U.
V.
Install surface raceway with a minimum 50mm (2’’) radius control at bend points.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 1.2m (4’) with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.
Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape
and glue are not acceptable support methods.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill
them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a
flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates
or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no
fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal
the interior of all raceways at the following points:
1.
2.
3.
W.
X.
Electrical Specifications
Page 32
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental
temperature change may exceed 17OC (30OF) and that has straight-run length
that exceeds 7.6m (25’). Install in each run of aboveground EMT conduit that is
located where environmental temperature change may exceed 55OC (100OF) and
that has straight-run length that exceeds 30m (100’).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
Y.
AA.
BB.
CC.
DD.
EE.
FF.
GG.
HH.
II.
JJ.
KK.
LL.
MM.
NN.
OO.
PP.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch
per foot of length of straight run per OF (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight
run per OC) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide
expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight
run per OF (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per OC) of temperature
change for metal conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting
selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific
location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion
movement.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 1.8m (6’)
of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to
vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
2.
Z.
Electrical Specifications
Page 33
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical
damage.
Only main pull and junction boxes are indicated on drawings. Install pull boxes so as
not to exceed 30m (100’) of conduit between boxes and after every two 90 degree
bends
Install boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations
Fittings for boxes to have bushings and connectors with nylon insulated throats,
knockout fillers, double lock nuts and insulated bushing on sheet metal boxes.
Use conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32mm (1.25’’) and pull boxes for conduits of
50mm (1.5’’) or larger.
Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
Provide matching blank coverplates for boxes without wiring devices.
Recess outlet boxes in plaster, masonry, or concrete walls where possible. Surface
mount outlet boxes only on existing masonry or concrete walls or in service rooms.
Separate communications outlets from power outlets by 100mm (4’’).
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height
measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of
masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to
provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or
supported equipment and box.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls by 150mm (6’’) so they
are not in the same vertical channel. Do not mount back to back.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two
framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support
boxes by conduits.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor
surface.
Provide barriers in boxes and approved signage where different voltages are used.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 34
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
PROTECTION
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls
and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SLEEVES
Wall Sleeves:
1.
2.
B.
C.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water-stop unless otherwise indicated.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.6mm (0.0239’’) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and raceway or cable.
2.
3.
A.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
A.
Sealing Elements: EPDM (flame spread rating less than 25 and smoke
developed rating of 50 or less) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of
pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Zinc coated carbon steel or stainless steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, water-stop assembly made for
embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber water-stop collar
with center opening to match piping OD.
GROUT
Description: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in
non-fire-rated walls or floors.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa (5000-psi), 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
SILICONE SEALANTS
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealants of grade indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
B.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 1.27m (50’’) and
with no side larger than 400mm (16’’), thickness shall be 1.3mm (0.052’’).
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 1.27m (50’’) or more and one
or more sides larger than 400mm (16’’), thickness shall be 3.5mm (0.138’’).
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
1.
2.3
Electrical Specifications
Page 35
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
Comply with ULC required ratings.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
Comply with ULC and NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and
Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
2.
F.
G.
3.2
A.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint
sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material
solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces
smooth; protect material while curing.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 6.4mm (0.25’’) annular clear space between sleeve
and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or clearance as
outlined by seismic criteria.
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for
mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 50mm (2’’)
above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
E.
Electrical Specifications
Page 36
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular
sleeved opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with
flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe
sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25mm (1’’)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 25mm (1’’) annular clear space between raceway or cable and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
raceway entries into building.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for
raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or
cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs
and walls. Position water-stop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
Electrical Specifications
Page 37
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 260544
SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
A.
Restraint channel bracings.
Restraint cables.
Seismic-restraint accessories.
Mechanical anchor bolts.
Adhesive anchor bolts.
Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly
used electrical supports and installation requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for
each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
b.
B.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report
numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance
with requirements.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.
1.
2.
Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying
with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Contact Mr. Sean Cochrane at HTS Engineering (representing Kinetics
Noise Control), tel. (416) 661-3400 for information.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment
weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select seismic restraints and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
a.
Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for
equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections
for equipment mounted outdoors.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
Seismic Restraint Details:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Electrical Specifications
Page 38
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of
seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear
loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths,
and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure
during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with windrestraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with
requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items
and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components
with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic
restraints.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
Welding certificates.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the OBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis.
They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval,
showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to
ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by
a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
3.
Site Class as Defined in the OBC: D.
Building Classification Category: High - for Schools and Normal for Offices.
Building Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 39
Importance factor (IE) Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category
as Defined in the OBC: ULS=1.3 for schools and 1.0 for Offices.
Component Factor: 1.0
Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0.
Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.
Peak Ground Acceleration: 0.150 for Toronto.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.24
(Toronto).
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.056 (Toronto).
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel
channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to
building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with
corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
RESTRAINT CABLES
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching
hangers to rigid channel bracings or restraint cables.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for
rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to
type and size of attachment devices used.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinccoated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select
anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or
urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid
mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior
applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 40
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COORDINATION AND EXECUTION
Attach conduit to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer’s design. Install cables
so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structures.
Do not brace or support equipment to separate portions of the structure that may act
differently in response to an earthquake. For example, do not connect a Transverse restraint to a wall and then a Longitudinal restraint to either a floor/ceiling/roof at the
same braced location.
Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint
manufacturer’s design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply
equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to hanger rods.
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS APPLICATION
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
All equipment and conduit shall be restrained to resist seismic forces per the applicable Building Code(s) as a minimum; listed herein. Additional requirements
specified herein are included specifically for this project; as needed basis.
Install seismic restraint devices per the manufacturer’s submittals. Any deviation
from the manufacturer’s instructions shall be reviewed and approved by the manufacturer.
Attachment to structure for suspended equipment and conduit: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
Provide hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or as required to prevent buckling
of rods due to seismic forces.
Where rigid restraints are used on equipment or conduit, the support rods for the
equipment, ductwork or piping at restraint locations must be supported by anchors rated for seismic use. Post-installed concrete anchors must be in accordance with ACI 355.2.
Concrete Anchor Bolts:
1.
2.
3.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre- or posttensioned tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
Mechanical Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
5.
C.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust per
manufactures instructions prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in
holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface
in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
2.
3.
Seismically restrain panels. Install fasteners, straps and brackets as required to secure the equipment.
Install neoprene grommet washers or fill the gap with epoxy on equipment anchor
bolts where clearance between anchor and equipment support hole exceeds 3.2
mm (0.125 inch).
Rigid Mounted Equipment:
a.
b.
4.
Anchor floor and wall mounted equipment to the structure as per the
stamped seismic certifications / drawings.
Suspended equipment shall be restrained using seismic cable restraints, or
struts, and hanger rods as per the stamped seismic certifications / drawings.
Vibration Isolated Equipment:
a.
b.
D.
Electrical Specifications
Page 41
Seismic control shall not compromise the performance of noise control, vibration isolation or fire stopping systems.
Equipment supported by vibration-isolation hangers shall be detailed and
installed with approximately a 1/8” gap between the isolation hangers and
the structure. Isolators at restraint locations must be fitted with uplift limit
stops.
Electrical Systems: Provide seismic control measures with spacing and anchorage engineered for the specific project.
1.
Seismically restrain per specific code requirements all Electrical components
listed below (unless otherwise indicated on the drawings), using seismic cable
restraints:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Seismically restrain all conduit 65 mm (2 ½”) in nominal diameter and
larger. Single supported conduit is restrained in the same fashion as single
clevis supported pipe.
Seismically restrain all conduit, bus ducts, or cable trays that are
supported on trapeze bars, that have been assigned a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.5, and that have a total weight greater than 10
lb/ft (146 N/m). This total weight includes not only the conduit, bus duct, or
cable trays, but also includes the trapeze bars as well.
The electrical contractor is to provide the weight per unit length for cable trays
and bus duct.
Single supported conduit and trapeze supported conduit, bus duct, and cable
trays to be seismically restrained in a manner similar to pipe and duct.
a.
b.
Conduit: Follow piping spacing requirements and required criteria as
listed in Section 3.2.E.2
Bus Ducts and Cable Trays: Follow duct spacing requirements and required criteria as listed in section 3.2.D.2
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
3.4
A.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 42
The seismic restraint components provided by Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. are
intended to be used with suspended single supported conduit and trapeze supported conduit, cable trays, and bus ducts. Components intended to both support and restrain distribution systems such as wall mounted conduit, cable
trays, and bus ducts will need to be designed and evaluated for both the dead
weight load and the design horizontal seismic load.
To ensure that the seismic forces are transferred properly to the restraint
points, the cables should be strapped either individually or in bundles to the cable tray at regular intervals. It is necessary for the conduit, bus ducts, and cable
trays to be attached to the trapeze bars sufficiently to resist the design horizontal seismic forces, both transverse (T) and longitudinal (L).
Brace a change of direction longer than 3.7 m (12’).
This specification does not allow the use of the 300,, (12’’) rule where the conduit
and electrical may be exempted from seismic restraint based on the length of the
support rods provided that the rods are not subjected to bending moments.
Install restraint cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment
or building structure. Tie back to structure at 45 degrees to the structure.
Longitudinal restraints for single conduit supports shall be attached rigidly to the
pipe, not to the pipe/conduit hanger.
For supports with multiple conduits (trapezes), secure conduit to trapeze member
with clamps approved for application.
Where conduit, bus ducts, cable trays sizes reduce below required dimensions
noted above in Section 3.2.F, the final restraint shall be installed at the transition
location.
Rod Stiffener Clamps are required where the hanger rod exceeds the maximum
length shown in the seismic calculation sheets. They are only required at restraint
locations.
Seismically Rated Beam Clamps are required where welding to or penetrations to
steel beams are not approved.
Adjust restraint cables so that they are not visibly slack. Cable not to support
weight during normal operation.
Seismic systems are to be compatible with requirements for anchoring and guiding of systems.
Drilled or power driven anchors or fasteners shall not be permitted for use with
seismic control measures.
Friction due to gravity does not constitute a seismic attachment.
Seismic restraint connections are not to be connected to the bottom chord of
steel joists or the bottom flange of steel beams.
Standard beam clamps can be used to support restrained components; they cannot be used to connect the seismic restraint to the structure – only for the hanger
rods.
Brace remaining electrical components to code requirements (OBC & NBC or TI809-04).
INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION
Notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials manufacturer prior to
installing any seismic restraint devices. The contractor shall seek the representative’s
guidance in any installation procedures with which he/she is unfamiliar.
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer mid-way through the listed project for an inspection all vibration and
seismic restraint devices already installed. A written report of any installation errors,
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
E.
improperly selected devices, or other fault in the system which could affect the performance of the system shall be documented and the contractor shall perform all steps
that are required from this written report to properly complete the vibration and seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Upon completion of the installation, arrange for the seismic design Engineer to visit the
site to verify the proper installation of all seismic restraint devices herein specified. A
written report citing any installation errors, improperly selected devices, or other fault in
the system which could affect the performance of the system should be generated by
the Engineer. The Engineer shall verify that isolators are adjusted, with spring’s perpendicular to bases or housing, adjustment bolts are tightened up on equipment
mountings, and hangers are not cocked. Upon completion of the Work, the Engineer
shall provide a sealed letter addressed to the local authorities having jurisdiction confirming that the Seismic Design and Installation is in general conformance with the design documents and the Ontario and National Building Codes.
The installing contractor shall take all steps required to properly complete the seismic
restraint work as per the specifications.
Perform the following tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 43
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by seismic Engineer.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
ADJUSTING
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
END OF SECTION 260548.16
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Underground-line warning tape and powders.
Warning labels and signs.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
6.
7.
8.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
Electrical Specifications
Page 44
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style,
mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
COORDINATION
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER & CONTROL RACEWAY, ARMOURED & METAL CLAD IDENTIFICATION
MATERIALS
A.
Minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each
raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1.
2.
C.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1.
2.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage and service type (lighting, equipment feed, etc.)
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."
Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated
with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear
adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit
diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 50mm (2’’) long, with diameter
sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 100mm (4’’) wide
black stripes on 900mm (3’) centers diagonally over orange background that extends
full length of raceway or duct and is 300mm (12’’) wide. Stop stripes at legends.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape for Armoured and Metal Clad Cables: Colored, heavy duty,
waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
I.
J.
K.
Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels for Armoured and Metal Clad Cables:
Preprinted, 0.08mm (3-mil) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive
that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield
over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield
overlaps the entire printed legend.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 50 by 50 by 1.3 mm (2 by 2 by 0.05’’) with stamped
legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.38mm (0.015’’) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
2.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 0.08mm
(3-mil) thick by 25 to 50mm (1 to 2’’) wide.
Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted 0.08mm (3-mil) thick
flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weatherand chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized
to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed
legend.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
Comply with OESC.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive
labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless
otherwise indicated.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
2.
3.
2.
A.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend,
and size required for application.
6.4mm (1/4’’) grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 180 by 250 mm (7 by 10’’).
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.4
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
1.
D.
Electrical Specifications
Page 45
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING – AREA IN FRONT OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 1m (40’’)”
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1.6mm (1/16’’) thick for
signs up to 129 sq. cm (20 sq. inches) and 3.2 mm (1/8’’) for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
A.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent
process. Minimum letter height shall be 10mm (3/8’’).
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 10mm (3/8’’).
Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent
process. Minimum letter height shall be 10mm (3/8’’).
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 10mm (3/8’’).
Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
Engraved Lamacoid Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. Black letters on a
white background. Minimum thickness 3mm (0.12’’) and letter height shall be 10mm
(3/8’’) .
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height
shall be 25mm (1’’).
CABLE TIES
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior
sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
A.
B.
Minimum Width: 5mm (3/16’’)
Tensile Strength at 23OC (73OF): 82.7 MPa (12,000 psi).
Temperature Range: -40 to + 85OC (-40 to +185OF)
Color: Black.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Electrical Specifications
Page 46
Minimum Width: 5mm (3/16’’)
Tensile Strength at 23OC (73OF): 48.2 MPa (7,000 psi).
UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Temperature Range: -46 to + 140OC (-50 to +284OF)
Color: Black.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior
or interior).
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel
machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
INSTALLATION
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using
materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
E.
F.
G.
H.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical
fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl
tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each colorcoding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of twocolor markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at
penetrations of walls and floors, at 15m (50’) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at
7.6M (25’) maximum intervals in congested areas.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
2.
I.
J.
3.2
A.
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and
stencil 100mm (4’’) wide black stripes on minimum 900mm (36’’) centers over orange
background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 300mm (12’’) wide or as
directed by authorities having jurisdiction. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED
HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 75mm (3’’) high black letters on 900mm (36’’) centers.
Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
2.
3.
C.
D.
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Underground-Line Warning Tape and/or Powder: During backfilling of trenches install
continuous underground-line warning tape and powders as required by OESC. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope exceeds 400mm (16’’) overall.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
1.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 47
Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 300mm (12’’) of
a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts,
exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Selfadhesive vinyl or Snap-around labels. Install labels at 15m (30’) maximum intervals.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and
Branch Circuits More Than 30V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied
in bands. Install labels 10m (30’) maximum intervals.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction
and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring
system legend and system voltage. System legends and colour coding shall be as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Emergency Power – use orange background and white lettering.
Power – prime.
Lighting - black.
Fire Alarm –red.
Public Address – white.
Security Systems – brown.
Building Automation Systems – green.
Building Control Systems – blue.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
9.
10.
E.
Exit and Emergency Lighting – orange.
UPS - yellow.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull
and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to
identify the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use
colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
b.
Color shall be factory applied.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
c.
d.
e.
f.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Phase A: Brown.
Phase B: Orange.
Phase C: Yellow.
Neutrals: White.
Ground/Bonding wires: Green
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for
a minimum distance of 150mm (6’’) from terminal points and in boxes
where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no
tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring
factory cable markings.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull
and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with
adhesive-backed phase tags and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded
conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction
boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or
cable designation, origin, and destination.
Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations
provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list
source.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,
control, and signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
L.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Colors for 600/347V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
F.
Electrical Specifications
Page 48
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with
system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape and
powder for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
M.
N.
Install underground-line warning tape and powders for both direct-buried cables
and cables in raceway.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the
direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by OESC unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment
in finished spaces.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Baked-enamel warning signs
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with OESC.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
O.
P.
Q.
Electrical Specifications
Page 49
Power transfer switches.
Controls with external control power connections.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction
signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment
operation.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a
red background with minimum 10mm (3/8’’) high letters for emergency instructions at
equipment used for power transfer, load shedding, etc.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation
label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment,
central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of
each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal,
monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated lamacoid label unless otherwise
indicated, provide a single line of text with 13mm (1/2’’) high letters on
38mm (1.5’’) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels
50mm (2’’) high.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated lamacoid label 100mm (4’’) high.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those
appropriate for viewing from the floor.
Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA rating of
the enclosure.
Label in English.
Equipment to Be Labeled with Lamacoid Nameplates:
a.
b.
c.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be [self-adhesive,
engraved] [engraved], laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Electrical Specifications
Page 50
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
Motor-control centers.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Contactors.
Battery packs.
Monitoring and control equipment.
END OF SECTION 260553
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
A.
B.
Time switches.
Photoelectric switches.
Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls.
Indoor occupancy sensors.
Outdoor motion sensors.
Lighting contactors.
Emergency shunt relays.
Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy
sensors, and manual light switches.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.
1.
2.
Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
TIME SWITCHES
Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display;
complying with CSA C22.2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, DPDT as noted on drawings.
Contact Rating: refer to drawings.
Programs: Two on-off set points per day on a 7 day, 24-hour schedule, allowing
different set points for each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that
overrides the weekly operation on holidays.
Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off
function of a program on selected channels where noted on drawings.
Astronomic Time: All channels.
Automatic daylight savings time changeover.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
7.
B.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A.
Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST as per drawings, dry contacts rated for
load as per drawings to operate connected load, relay, contactor coils, or
microprocessor input; complying with CSA C22.2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
B.
Contact Configuration: SPST, DPST, DPDT as noted on drawings.
Contact Rating: refer to drawings.
Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off
function of a program.
Astronomic time dial.
Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
Skip-a-day mode.
Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures,
minimum of 24 hours.
OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
1.
2.
2.3
Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and
time clock.
Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with CSA C22.2.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Electrical Specifications
Page 51
CSA Listed and marked for intended location and application.
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16 to 108 lux), with an adjustment for
turn-on and turn-off levels within that range[, and a directional lens in front of the
photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off].
Time Delay: 30 second minimum, to prevent false operation.
Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.
Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.
Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem
mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor
to the north sky exposure.
DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING SWITCHING CONTROLS
Ceiling-Mounted Switching Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate
power pack mounted on luminaire or ceiling as noted on the drawings, to detect
changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CSA Listed and marked for intended location and application.
Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 0 to 49OC (32 to 120OF).
Sensor and power pack specification – see drawing legend.
General Space Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc (108 to 2152
lux), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.
Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling.
Set-Point Adjustment: Equip with deadband adjustment of 25, 50, and 75 percent
above the "on" set point, or provide with separate adjustable "on" and "off" set
points.
Test Mode: User selectable, overriding programmed time delay to allow settings
check.
Control Load Status: User selectable to confirm that load wiring is correct.
Indicator: Two digital displays to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS
System Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts
the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.
1.
Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
A.
CSA Listed and marked for intended location and application.
Sensor Output: 0- to 10-V dc to operate electronic dimming ballasts. Sensor is
powered by controller unit.
Power Pack: Sensor has 24-V dc, 120 or 347V power source as noted on
drawings.
Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc (120 to 640 lux).
INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
General Requirements for Sensors: Wall or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor
occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CSA Listed and marked for intended location and application.
Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 0 to 49OC (32 to 120OF).
Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is
occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights
off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay. Sensor is
powered from the power pack.
Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120 or 347V ac as noted
on the drawings. Sensor has 24-V dc power source.
Mounting:
a.
b.
c.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Initial setup tool.
Tool for occupants to adjust the target levels by increasing the set point up
to 25 percent, or by minimizing the electric lighting level.
Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate
controller unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.
1.
2.
2.5
When no daylight is present (target level).
When significant daylight is present.
System programming is done with two hand-held, remote-control tools.
a.
b.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 52
Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
Relay: Externally mounted through a 13mm (0.5’’) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure.
Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind
hinged door.
Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and
normal operation of sensor.
Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.
Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn
lights off when selected lighting level is present.
PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and
movement.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
A.
A.
General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable
for mounting in a single gang switchbox.
General Description: Solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the lamp and
ballasts indicated.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
2.8
A.
B.
C.
CSA Listed and marked for intended location and application.
Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 0 to 49OC (32 to 120OF).
Switch Rating and Type: Refer to drawings for specification.
HIGH-BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORS
1.
2.
B.
Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 150mm (6’’) minimum movement of
any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 232 sq. cm.
(36 sq. in).
Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 93
sqm (1000 sqft) when mounted on a 2.44m (8’) high ceiling.
Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 27.4m (90’) when
mounted on a 3m (10’) high ceiling.
See drawing for specification type.
SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Electrical Specifications
Page 53
CSA Listed and marked for intended location and application.
Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power
when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is
adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.
Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24
hours, automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours
of continuous dimming.
Operating Ambient Conditions: interior conditions, 0 to 65OC (32 to 149OF).
Mounting: Threaded pipe.
Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
Detector Technology: PIR.
Power and dimming control from the lighting fixture ballast that has been
modified to include the dimming capacitor and MyzerPORT option.
Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for
mounting heights from 3.7 to 15.2 m (12 to 50 feet).
Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser
alignment tool for sensor positioning and power port connectors.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than
No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors
not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "LowVoltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 54
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
SENSOR INSTALLATION
Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of
areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written
instructions.
WIRING INSTALLATION
Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 16mm (0.5’’).
Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips
in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices
and perform tests and inspections.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative where required:
1.
2.
D.
E.
3.5
A.
Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors
at each sensor.
Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADJUSTING
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 55
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
A.
B.
For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector
range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.
For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's
operations.
Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
DEMONSTRATION
Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration
requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in
Section 260943.13 "Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23
"Relay-Based Lighting Controls."
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control
devices.
END OF SECTION 260923
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
B.
1.4
A.
B.
Distribution panelboards.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
Load centers.
Electronic-grade panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective
device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated.
Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
6.
7.
8.
1.5
A.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined
in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
2.
3.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
2.
A.
B.
1.8
A.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
Panelboard Schedules: install in panelboards after load balancing.
1.
1.7
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft
paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.
B.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device that allows adjustments.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install
temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to OESC.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete,
and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature
and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless
otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 56
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding -5OC (23OF) to +40OC (104OF)
Altitude: Not exceeding 2000m (6000’).
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 57
only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
2.
1.9
A.
B.
Notify Project Manager and Owner no fewer than 72 hours in advance of
proposed interruption of electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Project
Manager/Owner’s written permission.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and
other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance
requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements
are specified with concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
Fabricate and test panelboards to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Enclosures: Flush or surface mounted cabinets as noted in panel schedules on
drawings.
1.
Sprinkler-proof and rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,
match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard
front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure;
integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
Finishes:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 2.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately
after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat,
baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Back Boxes: Galvanized steel with same finish as panels and trim.
Trim and Door: baked enamel gray finish (2 coats of primer and finish
coats).
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent
protective cover].
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
Incoming Mains Location: refer to drawings.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
5.
6.
7.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.2
A.
Material: Tin-plated hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main Bus: rated for 50,000 A withstand capacity running full length of panelboard
Equipment Ground Bus: Copper and adequate for feeder and branch-circuit
equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.
Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors;
insulated from box.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and
ULC listed as suitable for nonlinear loads.
Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Electrical Specifications
Page 58
Material: Tin-plated hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extracapacity neutral bus.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards
or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective
devices.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with
each breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and
phase.
Mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit breakers as per panel
schedules
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with
integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL.
Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for
series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical
short-circuit current available at terminals and as noted in panel schedule.
Provide non-ferrous plates for metal sheathed cables, contactors, shunt-trip and feed
through lugs as required.
Breakers: to Section 262416.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to Specification Section 260548 Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as per panel schedule.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose
controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.
2.
2.4
A.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event.”
Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards,
complying with CSA and UL 1449 SPD Type 1 or Type 2 as noted in panel schedule.
1.
E.
F.
Electrical Specifications
Page 59
Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary
and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.
External Control-Power Source: 120V branch circuit or 24V control circuit as
noted on drawings.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
250V: NBLP type with breakers rated for 22kAIC unless noted otherwise in the panel
schedule. A symmetrical interrupting capacity at 120/240V unless otherwise noted on
drawings
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity
to meet available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or
field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared x t response.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through
ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A groundfault protection (6-mA trip).
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B groundfault protection (30-mA trip).
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699;
120/240-V, single-pole configuration.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.5
A.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 60
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor materials.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and highintensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted or Remote-mounted relay and
trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test
feature, and ground-fault indicator.
Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted, Universal mounted or
Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with
power monitoring and control system specified in Section 260913
"Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
Shunt Trip: 120 or 24V, as per drawing, trip coil energized from separate
circuit, set to trip at [55] [75] percent of rated voltage.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with
field-adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.
Auxiliary Contacts: One or two SPDT switches where noted on the
drawings with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker
contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when
circuit breaker trips.
Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation;
key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream
devices.
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to
operate as a single unit.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker
handle in on or off position.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on
position.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent
protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing
from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard
meters and switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or
rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 100mm (4’’) nominal
thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete." or Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 450mm (18’’) centers around full perimeter of
base.
For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.
Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the
panelboard.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Mount top of trim 2m (6.5’) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
G.
H.
Electrical Specifications
Page 61
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
Stub four 27mm (1’’) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space,
space designated to be ceiling space in the future or raised floor space or below slab
not on grade.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after
completing load balancing.
Install surface mounted panelboards on fire-rated plywood backboards. Where
practical, group panelboards on common backboard.
Connect loads to circuits as indicated.
Connect panelboard feeder contactor remote emergency shut-off push buttons as
indicated on plans.
Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral identified.
Provide surge suppression where indicated on panel schedule.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a
computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
D.
3.4
A.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
B.
2.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
ADJUSTING
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated (or as specified in
Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study” when included in
specification.
Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
3.
4.
A.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies
panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
1.
2.
3.6
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
C.
D.
Electrical Specifications
Page 62
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working
schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour
services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing,
transmitting, and receiving equipment.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load
readings before and after changes and submit test records.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a
panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this
minimum requirement.
PROTECTION
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 63
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
A.
DEFINITIONS
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Coordination:
1.
2.
1.4
A.
B.
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
Isolated-ground receptacles.
Tamper-resistant receptacles.
Weather-resistant receptacles.
Switches and wall-box dimmers.
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product when requested.
Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified when requested.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: CSA listed and marked for intended
location and application.
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 or 20A: 15A or 20 duplex receptacles shall be as
specified on drawings, grounding type rated for 125 Volt, CSA Type 5-15R or 5-20R
(Hubbell Cat. #DR150W for #DR200W), white finish, unless otherwise specified on
drawings. These shall have break-off line to allow for split wiring or 2 circuits.
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 or 20 A: 15A or 20
duplex receptacles shall be as specified on drawings, grounding type rated for 125
Volt, CSA Type 5-15R or 5-20R (Hubbell Cat. #IG2152 or #IG2162), white finish with
orange triangle, unless otherwise specified on drawings..
1.
Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected
only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent
electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle
construction and not dependent on removable parts.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
C.
D.
2.3
A.
Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 or 20 A: 15A or 20 duplex
receptacles shall be as specified on drawings, grounding type rated for 125 Volt, CSA
Type 5-15R or 5-20R (Hubbell Cat. #DR15WHIWRTR and #DR20WHIWRTR), white
finish, unless otherwise specified on drawings. These shall have break-off line to allow
for split wiring or 2 circuits .
Hospital Grade: Same as above Hubbell IG2182WA series.
GFCI RECEPTACLES
General Description:
1.
2.
3.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
B.
TOGGLE SWITCHES
Light switches single pole, 3-way and 4-way shall be voltage as specified on drawings,
premium specification grade, toggle type, equal to Hubbell #DS120OW, 20A, white
finish, unless otherwise specified on drawings. Use illuminated switches for mechanical
and electrical service rooms Hubbell DS120ILW. Corridor switches to be key-operated
unless noted otherwise on the drawings:
Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:
E.
2.5
A.
B.
2.6
A.
Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is
"off."
Key-Operated Switches, 120/347 V, 20 A:
1.
D.
Straight blade, non-feed through type.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C596.
Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no
longer provides proper GFCI protection.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 or 20 A: Ground fault receptacles
shall be as specified on drawings, grounding type rated for 15A or 20A, 125 Volt, CSA
Type 5-15R & 5-20R (Hubbell #GF15OWL and #GF20OWL), white finish, unless
otherwise specified on drawings. These shall have double wipe contacts and be
suitable for #8 AWG wiring.
Hospital Grade: Same as above, Hubbel GFR8200HOWL and GFR8300HOWL.
1.
C.
Electrical Specifications
Page 64
Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/347 V, 20 A;
for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches:
120/347 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factorysupplied key in lieu of switch handle.
WALL-BOX DIMMERS
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off
switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
Control: Refer to drawing for specifications.
WALL PLATES
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.7
A.
Material for Finished Spaces: stainless steel unless specified as nylon on the
drawings.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
Material for Damp Locations: Stainless steel with spring-loaded lift cover, and
listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R,
weather-resistant, thermoplastic with lockable cover.
FINISHES
Device Color:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 65
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise
indicated on drawings.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
TVSS Devices: Blue.
Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange or as specified above with orange triangle
on face.
Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
The drawings show approximate location of outlets, exact location shall be
co-ordinated on the site with other trades, architectural drawings, etc. Outlets
inaccurately located shall be re-adjusted or relocated at the Contractor's expense.
Mount devices as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Receptacles, telephone and alarm outlets 12" (305 mm) above finished floor, or
above raised floor unless otherwise noted.
Outlets over counter 42" (890 mm) above finished floor or as per architectural
drawings (co-ordinate on job with millwork.
Outlets in mechanical, electrical and telephone rooms 48" (1220 mm) above
floor.
Light switches 47" (1200 mm) above finished floor to top of device to barrier-free
standards.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over
device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding
against outside of boxes.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,
concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway
system, conductors, and cables.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross
a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors:
1.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or
terminated on devices.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded
wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
OESC without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
E.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.
H.
I.
3.2
A.
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that
were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until
the last possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 150mm
(6’’) in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap
solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around
terminal screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by
manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits,
splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to
hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
G.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign
matter.
Pig-tailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large
enough.
Device Installation:
1.
F.
Electrical Specifications
Page 66
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally
mounted receptacles to the left.
Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or
neutral blade at the top.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and
remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough
wall opening.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches
under single, multi-gang wall plates.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of
partitions and furnishings.
GFCI RECEPTACLES
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream
receptacles is not required.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot,
stamped, or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Electrical Specifications
Page 67
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is
unacceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely
mounted.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the
circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective
devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning
units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 262726
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
1.3
A.
Control circuits.
Motor-control centers.
Panelboards.
Switchboards.
Enclosed controllers.
Enclosed switches.
Spare-fuse cabinets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sparefuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been
adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with
adjusted ratings.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
A.
A.
For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse
rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature
adjustment calculations are based.
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, and ratings.
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit
in PDF format.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.5
Electrical Specifications
Page 68
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 5OC (40OF
or more than 38OC (100OF) apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment
factors to fuse ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
MANUFACTURERS
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single
source from single manufacturer.
CARTRIDGE FUSES
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with
voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.
Refer to single line drawings for type or use the following where no specification on the
drawing is provided:
1.
2.
3.
4.
600A and lower: fuses shall be CSA approved HRC type, voltage as required,
Form 1 Class "J" non-renewable for lighting and general loads without inrush.
Above 600A: fuses shall be CSA approved HRC type, voltage as required, Form
1 Class "L" non-renewable for lighting and general loads without inrush.
600A and lower: fuses shall be CSA approved HRC type, voltage as required,
Form 1 Class "J" non-renewable for time delay for motors, transformers and
loads with inrush.
Above 600A: fuses shall be CSA approved HRC type, voltage as required, Form
1 Class "L" non-renewable for time delay for motors, transformers and loads with
inrush.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
5.
6.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Electrical Specifications
Page 69
Other types as rated and noted on the drawings.
Fuses to be manufactured by English Electric Limited or Gould Schawmet.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: CSA Listed, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Comply with OESC and CAN/CSA 1422-02.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum
fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of
sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be
applied to fuse ratings.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FUSE APPLICATIONS
Provide switches with fuses where required and shown on the drawings.
Confirm fuse size with equipment shop drawings
Cartridge Fuses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
Motor Branch Circuits: time delay.
Other Branch Circuits: time delay or fast acting as noted on the drawings.
Control Transformer Circuits: time delay, control transformer duty.
Provide open-fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication.
INSTALLATION
Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated in the
field by Consultant or Owner.
IDENTIFICATION
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information
inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and
holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 70
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
DEFINITIONS
NC: Normally closed.
NO: Normally open.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
2.
A.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.
1.5
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Current and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
1.4
Fusible switches.
Non-fusible switches.
Receptacle switches.
Shunt trip switches.
Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Molded-case switches.
Enclosures.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches
and circuit breakers.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.7
A.
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of a NRTL.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent
protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from
single source from single manufacturer.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: CSA Listed and marked for
intended location and application.
Comply with OESC.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete,
and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature
and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless
otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
B.
2.
A.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding -5OC (23OF) to +40OC (104OF)
Altitude: Not exceeding 2000m (6000’).
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
1.8
Electrical Specifications
Page 71
Notify Project Manager and Owner no fewer than 72 hours in advance of
proposed interruption of electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Project
Manager/Owner’s written permission.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
Type HD, Heavy Duty, 240 or 600V ac: CSA, horsepower rated, with bolt pads to
accommodate specified fuses, with neutral bar where required, lockable handle in
“OFF” position with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
closed position.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Fuse holders shall be required to suit rating and type of fuses specified without
adaptors.
Withstand rating 6 times continuous current break at rated voltage.
Enclosure shall be CEMA 1 with drip shields except where weatherproof switches are
required, these shall be CEMA 3. ON-OFF switch position indication on cover.
All switches shall be of the same manufacturer.
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.
Sprinkler-proof.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
A.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, 240 or 600V ac: CSA, horsepower rated with neutral bar where
required, lockable handle in “OFF” position with capability to accept three padlocks,
and interlocked with cover in closed position.
Accessories:
2.
3.
4.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum
ground conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded
and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
1.
2.3
Electrical Specifications
Page 72
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum
ground conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded
and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
General Requirements: Comply with CSA, UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the
following field-adjustable settings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through
ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiterstyle fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on
opening of fuse compartment door.
Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole
configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B groundfault protection (30-mA trip).
Features and Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.4
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 73
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge lighting circuits.
Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered
type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and
time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit;
and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.
Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with
functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system,
specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
Alarm Switch: One NO and NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker
has tripped.
Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic ground-fault trip unit; for
interlocking ground-fault protection function.
Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
ENCLOSURES
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: CSA, NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250,
and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert type>.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 9.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 74
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
Comply with CSA and NECA 1.
IDENTIFICATION
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.3
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
B.
2.
3.
D.
3.4
A.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
C.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed
switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.
END OF SECTION 262816
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 75
SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Section:
1.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3
A.
B.
Full-voltage manual.
Full-voltage magnetic.
Reduced-voltage magnetic.
Multi-speed.
Section 262923 "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac,
adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable
torque loads in ranges up to 200 hp.
DEFINITIONS
CPT: Control power transformer.
MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
MCP: Motor circuit protector.
N.C.: Normally closed.
N.O.: Normally open.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types
and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,
sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller
enclosures.
1.
Show tabulations of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
1.4
A.
Each installed unit's type and details.
Factory-installed devices.
Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of
OCPDs in combination controllers by a NRTL acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs
in combination controllers.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate full-load currents.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
1.5
A.
Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running
overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
2.
A.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than -30OC (-22OF) to +40OC (104OF).
Altitude: Not exceeding 2000m (6000’).
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
1.8
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic
controller installed.
Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic
contactor installed.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.
2.
B.
Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed
components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and
MCP trip settings.
Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming
reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS
1.
1.7
Electrical Specifications
Page 76
Notify Project Manager and Owner no fewer than 72 hours in advance of
proposed interruption of electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Project
Manager/Owner’s written permission.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
Electrical Specifications
Page 77
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements
are specified with concrete.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.2
A.
GENERAL
Starters: CSA C22.2 No. 14, EEMAC E14-2, in CSA type enclosure and with
components, as specified herein or as indicated on Drawings.
All equipment to be sprinklerproof.
Surface mount unless noted otherwise.
“Start-Stop” pushbuttons.
Green Pilot light for “ON”.
Single or three phase to suit motor.
Trip indicating handle.
Manual reset from outside of the enclosure.
Configuration: Non-reversing, Reversing or Two speed to match motor.
Nameplates: to indicate configuration.
FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: push-button action; marked to show
whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
1.
Manufacturer’s model numbers:
 C.G.E. CR1061 series
 Square D Class 2510
2.
3.
B.
Overload heater.
Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; tripping characteristics;
heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;
external reset push button.
Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1.
Manufacturer’s model numbers:
 C.G.E. CR-206 series
 Square D Class 8536
2.
3.
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch and reset button.
Solenoid operated contactor: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient
suppressors.
a.
4.
5.
Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage
rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide;
assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load
wiring.
Control Circuits: 24 or 120V ac (as selected by the Controls Contractor); obtained
from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses] of sufficient capacity to
operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control
devices.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
6.
CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.
Melting Alloy Overload Relays:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Inverse-time-current characteristic.
Class 20 (Class 10 for submersible pumps) (Class 30 for high inertia loads)
tripping characteristic.
Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual
protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
Ambient Compensated Bimetallic Overload Relays:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
Inverse-time-current characteristic.
Class 20/Class 30 tripping characteristic.
Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual
protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
Ambient compensated.
Automatic resetting.
Solid-State Overload Relay:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9.
10.
C.
Electrical Specifications
Page 78
Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.
Sensors in each phase.
Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor
against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.
Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent
nuisance trip on starting.
Analog communication module.
Minimum one N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.
External overload reset push button.
Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic
controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1.
Manufacturer’s model numbers:
 C.G.E. CR-207 series
 Square D Class 8539
2.
3.
4.
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch and reset button.
For motors with thermistors, provide pre-wired control relay complete with pilot
light indicating sensing device is operating and a separately identified reset
button
Solenoid operated contactor: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient
suppressors.
a.
5.
6.
7.
Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage
rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
Fusible Disconnecting Means to Specification 262816 Enclosed Switches and
Circuit Breakers.
Auxiliary Contacts: Two N.O./N.C. arranged to activate before switch blades
open.
Non-fusible Disconnecting Means to Specification 262816 Enclosed Switches
and Circuit Breakers.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.3
A.
ENCLOSURES
Enclosed Controllers: CSA, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
A.
Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: Type 4X.
Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
Type 12.
Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: Type 7 or Type 9.
ACCESSORIES
General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory
installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oil-tight type.
a.
b.
2.
3.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Electrical Specifications
Page 79
Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test.
Selector Switches: Rotary.
Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours resettable.
Meters: Panel type, 65mm (2.5’’) minimum size with 90 or 120 degree scale and
plus or minus two percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide selector switches
with an off position.
N.C., N.O. and/or Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).
Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.
Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state
sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide
adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.
Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation
in Type 4 or Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces
subject to humidity and temperature swings.
Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 3R
(Type 4X or Type 12 where noted on the drawing) enclosures installed outdoors or in
unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and
subject to direct and extended sun exposure.
Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.
Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the line or load side of
overload relays as directed.
Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are
wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
Where starter and disconnect are grouped, utilize combination type starter.
Ensure correct fuses and overload devices elements installed.
Co-ordinate with Division 15 to ensure proper size starters.
Co-ordinate with Division 15 and Owner designated control contractor for control
wiring.
Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on
lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide
freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in
Section 262813 "Fuses."
Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate
full-load amperes after motors have been installed.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motordriven equipment.
Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the line or load side of overload
relays. If connected to the load side of overload relays, adjust overload heater sizes to
accommodate the reduced motor full-load currents.
Comply with NECA 1.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
1.
2.
3.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with
requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where
applicable.
1.
2.
3.5
Electrical Specifications
Page 80
Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control
devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.
Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and
automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and highpressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1.
Inspect and test starter operation as per starter manufacturer's instructions.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
C.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.7
A.
B.
Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment
installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component,
connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of
motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify
Consultant before starting the motor(s).
Check that sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starters,
equipment, control devices, operate as indicated.
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed
controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overloadrelay pickup and trip ranges.
Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are
connected to the load side of the overload relays.
Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop
sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.
PROTECTION
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized
and placed into service.
Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior
to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 262913
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 81
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
Emergency lighting units.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.
4.
B.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.4
A.
Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
Ballast, including BF.
Energy-efficiency data.
Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule
when requested. Each Sample shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,
including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multi-pole
lighting relays and contactors.
DEFINITIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Exit signs.
Lighting fixture supports.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Electrical Specifications
Page 82
Lamps and ballasts, installed.
Cords and plugs.
Pendant support system.
Installation instructions.
Verify catalogue reference numbers with the description and co-ordinate with the
installation conditions, with particular regard to ceiling construction details, type and
finish, before ordering luminaires.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lighting fixtures.
Suspended ceiling components.
Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 30mm (12’’)
of the plane of the luminaires.
Ceiling-mounted projectors.
Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be
attached.
Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
C.
1.5
A.
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with
power and control connections when requested.
3.
A.
1.9
A.
Lamps: 10 percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
2.
1.8
Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers'
codes.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1.
1.7
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Smoke and fire detectors.
Occupancy sensors.
Access panels.
Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting
fixtures.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures,
from manufacturer.
1.
1.6
Electrical Specifications
Page 83
Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in
which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or
replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated
warranty for the remaining nine years.
Warranty Period for Fluorescent Lamps and Ballasts: 5 years as per
manufacturer’s warranty for certain combined lamps and ballasts.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 84
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
MANUFACTURERS
Contractor shall include in his Tender the fixture(s) that are specified. If an alternate
manufacturer is named, it is mandatory that the fixture be equivalent in all respects, i.e.
same lens, equivalent frame, performance, paint finish, ballast, construction quality,
etc. Alternate manufacturers or alternate fixtures types must be offered as an alternate
only to the base bid, with a Separate Price stated in the Tender. Low bidder will be
determined on the basis of the specified items not on "alternate savings".
Fixture manufacturer shall be responsible for obtaining CSA approval prior to
installation of fixtures and shall bare all associated costs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to
prevent warping and sagging.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage
under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools.
Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from
falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.
Diffusers and Globes:
1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
b.
2.
E.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with CSA and OESC. Include recommended lamps
and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service
personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1.
Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
F.
G.
Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise
indicated.
UV stabilized.
"USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,
triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or
coated) for HID luminaires.
Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
Verify catalogue reference numbers with the description and co-ordinate with the
installation conditions, with particular regard to ceiling construction details, type and
finish, before ordering luminaires.
Provide fixtures and lamps as indicated on the fixture schedule and/or as specified
under this section. These must and shall be complete with all necessary plaster
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Electrical Specifications
Page 85
frames, hangers, lamps, louvres, diffusers, canopies, supports, etc. Provide lens
supports on all four sides.
2.3
A.
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
C.
Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.
Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5, T5HO & T8 Lamps: Comply with
ANSI C82.11 and the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
E.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sylvania Quicktronic High Efficiency 28W T8, universal voltage, PROStart
Parallel Operation model QHE 2x32T8/UNV PSN, 0.88 Ballast Factor, Power
Factor >0.98.
Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements
and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or
rewiring in the field.
Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1.
F.
Comply with CSA, UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.
Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.
Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bilevel control is indicated.
Sound Rating: Class A.
Internal thermal protection.
Non-PCB type.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or
better.
Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.88 or higher.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and
shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more
lamps fail.
Temperatures -20OF (-29OC) and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use
with indicated lamp types.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures (connected to PC2): Electronic
type.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.
Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control
system and lamp type indicated.
Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the
ballast, controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.
Quicktronic High Efficiency Prosense model QTP 2x32T8/UNV DIM-TC, 120277volts.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.4
A.
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with CSA, UL 935 and
with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be
designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.5
A.
Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless
otherwise indicated:
9.
10.
11.
12.
A.
B.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sound Rating: Class A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or
better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.
BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.6
Electrical Specifications
Page 86
Integral with luminaire unless otherwise noted.
Pulse Start type.
Minimum Starting Temperature: -30OC (-20OF) for single-lamp ballasts.
Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 54OC (130OF).
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
Sound Rating: Class A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or
better.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.
Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
EXIT SIGNS
General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with OBC and CSA for sign colors,
visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
Internally Lighted Signs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Power source: 120VAC, 240VAC or 347VAC, and 12 or 24 VDC (from battery
pack) as noted in luminaire schedule
Power supply assembly to be low loss, low noise high power factor transformer
type encapsulated ballast for 347V units.
Lamps for AC or DC Operation: LEDs, 100,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
Power consumption: 1 watt per face.
Housing: extruded aluminum minimum 1.3 mm thick with satin white enamel
finish unless otherwise noted in luminaire schedule.
Face and back plates: extruded aluminum 2mm (.78’’).
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.7
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 87
Running man: height as per Code requirements on one common face plate.
Face plate to remain captive for re-lamping.
Wall, end to wall and ceiling mounting as indicated.
Single and double face with arrows indicating exit directions as indicated.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
General Requirements for Emerge ncy Lighting Units: Self-contained u nits complying
with CAN/CSA C22.1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Supply voltage: 120V AC, 240V AC or 347V AC as noted in luminaire schedule.
Operating life: 30 or 120 minutes as noted in luminaire schedule.
Output voltage: 12 or 24V DC as noted in luminaire schedule.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid- state type with sealed transfer relay, multi-rate,
voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, shor
t circuit
protected, modular construction.
Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects
from battery when voltage approaches deep -discharge level. When normal
voltage is restored, relay disconn ects lamps from batt ery, and b attery is
automatically recharged and floated on charger.
Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, o perates at 80% battery output
voltage.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit h ousing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates nor mal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charg ing at end of discharge cycle, solid state, life
expectancy 100,000 hours minimum, for ‘AC Power ON’ and ‘High Charge’
Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects la mp heads or fixture s
when specified in the luminaire schedule.
Integral Time-Delay Rel ay: Holds u nit on for fixed interval of 5 minutes when
power is restored after an outage.
Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit
initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by fact ory-installed infrared
receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of lo ss of its no rmal power supply,
providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.
Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at r equired intervals. Test f ailure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
Lamp heads: integra l on unit and remote adjustable mounting, swiv el type,
adjustable lens, c/w h igh intensity quartz-halog en, 12W, 2 0W, 55W or 75W as
per luminaire schedule.
Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and complete with knockouts
for conduit.
Finish: white baked enamel.
Warranty: 10 year for battery.
Auxiliary equipment:
18.
19.
20.
21.
3 minute time delay relay.
AC input and DC output terminal blocks inside cabinet.
Hardwired connection for AC.
Self-diagnostic and testing circuitry additional remote alarm contacts.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.8
A.
B.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Fluorescent lamps shall be 32 Wa tt, T8, 4100 OK CCT, 85 CRI, 60,000 hour, Octron
800XP XL SS Ecologic 3 extended performance by Osram-Sylvania.
Compact Fluorescent L amps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100K,
average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start u nless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
2.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Electrical Specifications
Page 88
18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
Single-Stem Hangers: 13mm (0.5’’) steel tubing with swi vel ball fittings and ceilin g
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 13mm (0.5’’) steel tubes with single canopy designed to
mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-co ated steel, 12 gage (2.68
mm).
Wires for H umid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 3 04, annealed
stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
Rod Hangers: 5-mm (3/16’’) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans for exact location of luminaires.
Lighting fixtures:
1.
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
Temporary Lighting: If it is nece ssary, and approved by General
Contractor and
Consultant, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the
minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently compl ete,
remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps,
and reinstall.
Co-ordinate the mounting and location of luminaires with other trades to avoid conflicts.
Junction boxes in suspended ceiling space shall be accessible through the fixtures or
by removable ceiling.
Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.
1.
2.
3.
Install ceiling support system rods or wires,
independent of the ceilin g
suspension devices, for each f ixture. Locate n ot more than 150mm (6’’) from
lighting fixture corners.
Support Clips: Fasten t o lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members a t or near
each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or ce nter in acou stical panel, and support fixtures independently with at
least two 20mm (3/4’’) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
4.
G.
4.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
Install emergency lighting in accordance with CSA C22.1, latest edition.
Size wire as required to maintain allowable voltage drop.
Direct remote heads down towards floor in direction of exit pathway.
Provide 20A,1P “lock-on” type breaker feeding b attery unit and exit sign s with a
separate circuit.
Exit Signs:
1.
2.
J.
K.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 1.2m (4’), brace to limit swinging.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.
Emergency Lighting Systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Install at lea st one inde pendent support rod or weldless ‘single jack’ br ight zinc
plated steely safety chain from stru cture to a tab on lighting fixture. Chain or rod
shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Electrical Specifications
Page 89
Install exit lights as indicated, to requirements of OBC latest amendments.
Mount exit luminaire independent of T-bar ceiling. Caddy clips and wood bracing
not acceptable.
Exit lighting wiring to be in separate conduit system.
Size wire as required to maintain allowable voltage drop.
Connect emergency lamp sockets to emergency circuits from emergency lighting
battery unit is indicated.
Permanently tag each fixture box with circuit numbers (commercial power and
emergency power circuits).
Connect strip lights under cabinets after installation of cabinets .
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
Dispose of existing fixtures as show n on drawings. Include for disposal of
PCB
containing ballasts to approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
IDENTIFICATION
Install labels with pane l and circuit numbers on concea led junction and outlet boxe s.
Comply with requirements for identif ication specified in Sect ion 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
Permanently tag each fixture box with circuit number.
Permanently tag from battery number each remote and exit within outlet box.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interr upt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
Remote Emergency Fixtures:
1.
Run diagnostic circuitry and test all remote lamps.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
C.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 90
After all remote lamps are connected, test battery unit for full 30 or 1 20 minute
operating life (noted in luminaire schedule) and provide test report confirming that
battery charge was sufficient for full lamp load for duration of noted operating life.
Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed accordin
requirements of OBC and CSA.
g to their listing and the
STARTUP SERVICE
Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to o perate properly, prior t o
occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to
be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.
ADJUSTING
Occupancy Adjustments: When req uested within 12 month s of da te of Substantial
Completion, provide on -site assistance in adju sting aimable luminaires to suit act ual
occupied conditions. Provide up to 2 visits to Project during other-than-normal
occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.
1.
Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Consultant.
END OF SECTION 265100
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.
Section 265100 "Interior Lighting" f or exterior luminaires normally mo unted on
exterior surfaces of buildings.
DEFINITIONS
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of
lighting unit designation. Include data on fe atures, accessories, finishes, a nd the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective
projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.
Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
Photometric data based on laboratory tests of ea ch luminaire type, complete with
indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.
Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
6.
1.4
A.
Electrical Specifications
Page 91
Means of a ttaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is
suitable for components involved.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
Luminaires shall be CSA listed and labeled for installation in wet locations and out door
applications by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Luminaire Finish: Manu facturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested luminaire before shipping.
BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit o peration without
reduction of average lamp life. Include the
following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor
type, pulse start.
Minimum Starting Temperature: -22OF (-30OC).
Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104OF (40OC).
Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and
current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
HID LAMPS
Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000K.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
Install lamps in each luminaire.
Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
B.
Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for
the application and approved by manufacturer.
CORROSION PREVENTION
Steel Conduits: Comply with Sect ion 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Systems." In concrete f oundations, wrap conduit with 0.2 54mm (0.010’’) thick, pipewrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lig hting units after installing
luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1.
Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
END OF SECTION 265600
End of Division 26
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Communications Specifications
Page 1
INDEX FOR DIVISION 27
Section
270000
270001
270528
271500
275116
275313
Title
Page
Index
1
General
Provisions
2
Pathways
for Communication Systems
Communications
Horizontal Cabling
Public
Address Systems
7
Clock
Systems
12
Appendix
Toronto District Catholic School Board
Structured
Cabling System Guidelines
END OF INDEX
March 3, 2014
ESI# 865
2
6
81
Pages
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Communications Specifications
Page 2
SECTION 270001 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
General
1.1
1.2
Comply with the drawings, all s pecification sections including Division 00, 01, 02, 26, 27
and 28, and all documents referred to therein.
The work of these Divisions - Electrical and Communications is divided into Divisions and
Subsections.



1.3
1.4
Division 26 – Electrical Systems
Division 27 – Communications Systems, and
Division 28 – Electrical Safety & Security.
Subsections are in order, but may not be numbered consecutively. Refer to the Index at
each Division and page numbers.
Refer specifically to Division 26, Section 260001 for General Conditions applying to this
Division.
End of Section 270001
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
A.
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits,
wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosu res, cabinets, handholes, and
faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plan s, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other , using input from in stallers of items
involved:
1.
2.
B.
Metal conduits and fittings.
Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
Surface pathways.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural fe atures in paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PATHWAY APPLICATION
Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.
Exposed and Subject t o Severe Physical Da mage: GRC. Pathway locations
include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
C.
2.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Loading dock.
Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, f orklifts, and pallet-handling
units.
Mechanical rooms.
Gymnasiums
Concealed in Ceilings: EMT or cables supported with j-hooks as noted hereafter.
Concealed in Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosure s: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4
stainless steel in institutional an d commercial kitchens and damp or wet
locations.
Minimum Pathway Size: 21mm (3/4’’) trade size.
Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.
1.
D.
E.
Communications Specifications
Page 3
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Con duit: Use threaded rigid steel cond uit fittings
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings unless specifically noted.
Install surface pathways only in service rooms or where indicated on Drawings.
INSTALLATION
Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for inst allation requirements except
where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricte r. Comply with NECA 102
for aluminum pathwa ys. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways
allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
Keep pathways at least 150mm (6’’) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.
Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electr ical
Systems" for hangers and supports.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
Install no more than the equivalent of two
90-degree bends in any pathway run.
Support within 300mm (12’’) of changes in direction. Utilize long ra
dius ells for all
optical-fiber cables.
Conceal conduit and E MT within finished walls, ceilings, a nd floors un less otherwise
indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
Support conduit within 300mm (12’’) of enclosures to which attached.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
Use EMT or GRC for pathways.
Use a nylo n conduit bushing or insulated f itting to terminate stub-ups not
terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
Threaded Conduit Joint s, Exposed to Wet, Da mp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:
Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before ma
king up join ts.
Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coat ed pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with lo cknuts on inside and outside
of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.
Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts.
Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
Do not rely on locknut s to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosu res. Remove
coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit
to enclosu re to assur e a
continuous ground path.
Cut conduit perpendicu lar to the length. For conduits of
50mm (2’’) trade size and
larger, use roll cutter o r a guide t o ensure cut is straigh t and perpe ndicular to the
length.
Install pull wires in empty pathwa ys. Use polypropylene o r monofilament plastic line
with not less than 90kg (200-lb) tensile strength . Leave at l east 600mm (24’’) of slack
at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade
alongside pathways in use.
Surface Pathways:
1.
2.
3.
R.
2.
3.
T.
Install surface pathway for surface t elecommunications outlet boxes only where
indicated on Drawings.
Install surface pathway with a minimum 50mm (2’’) radius control at bend points.
Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 1.2m (4’) a nd with no less than t wo supports per straight pathway
section. Support surface pathway according to ma
nufacturer's written
instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
Pathways for Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal, rigid and flexibl e, as
follows:
1.
S.
Communications Specifications
Page 4
21mm (3/4’’) Trade Size and Smal ler: Install p athways in maximum lengths of
15m (50’).
27mm (1’’) Trade Size and Larger: Install path ways in maximum lengths of 23m
(75’).
Install with a ma ximum of two 90-d egree bends or equivalent for each length of
pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull
or junction boxes or terminations at distribu
tion frames or cabinet s where
necessary to comply with these requirements.
Install pathway sealing fittings at a ccessible locations and fill them with listed sea ling
compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank
cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway
sealing fittings according to manufacturer’s recommendation.
Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessib le locations. Loca te seals so no
fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal
the interior of all pathways at the following points:
1.
2.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, su ch as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces.
Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
U.
V.
Comply with manufacturer's writte n instructions for solven t welding P VC conduit and
fittings.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
2.
Install in ea ch run of aboveground RNC that i s located where enviro nmental
temperature change may exceed 3 0OF (17OC), and that has straight-r un length
that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of abovegro und RMC[ and EMT]
conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed
100OF (55OC) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).
Install type and quantity of fitting s that accommodate temperature cha nge listed
for each of the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
W.
Communications Specifications
Page 5
Outdoor Locations N ot Exposed to Direct Sunlight:
125OF (70OC)
temperature change.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight : 155OF (86OC) temperature
change.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation:
125OF (70OC) temperature change.
Attics: 135OF (75OC) temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and cont raction for at least 0.00041 inch
per foot of length of straight run per OF (0.06 mm per met er of length of straight
run per OC) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide
expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight
run per OF (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per OC) of temperature
change for metal conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting
selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific
location at t ime of installation. Insta ll conduit supports to allow for expansion
movement.
Mount boxes at heights indicated o n Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to barrier-free requirements. Install boxes with height
measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated such as over counter – verify height
with millwork.
X.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for
box in center of cell of
masonry block, and in stall box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface
to
provide a flat surface f or a rain-tight connect ion between box and cover plate or
supported equipment and box.
Y.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposit e sides of w alls so they are not in the
same vertical channel.
Z.
Support boxes of thre e gangs or more fro m more than one side by spanning two
framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure.
Do not support
boxes by conduits.
BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
CC. Set nonmetallic floor b oxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor
surface.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
SLEEVE AND
PENETRATIONS
SLEEVE-SEAL
Communications Specifications
Page 6
INSTALLATION
FOR
COMMUNICATIONS
Install sleeves and slee ve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Slee ve Seals f or
Communications Pathways and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
PROTECTION
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich pain
t recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC coating s or paint finishes with matching tou chup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 270528
SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
PROJECT SUMMARY
The Toronto Catholic District Sch ool Board i s in the pro cess of making an addition
comprised of two kindergarten rooms, corridors, washrooms and storage areas. The
objective of this Division is to provid e data and telephone communication services to
service the addition including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Section 270528 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits,
wireways, surface raceways, bo xes, enclosures, cabinets, and faceplat
e
adapters serving electrical systems.
Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,
surface raceways, boxes, enclo sures, cabinets, and faceplate adapters serving
communications systems.
Toronto District Catholic School Board “Structured Cabling System
Guidelines”, Version 2.33 for data and telephone systems.
UTP cabling.
Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.
Telecommunications outlet/connectors.
Cabling system identification products.
General Requirements:
1.
This Division shall pro vide all req uired equipment to terminate cabling from
outlets in a ddition to e xisting rack. Quantity of new data outlets is 1 5 plus 2
wireless access points as noted on the plans.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
Communications Specifications
Page 7
Provide patch cords, j acks, faceplates, etc., and all testing and certification
required to make an operating system as outlined in TCDSB Cabling Guidelines
V2.33.
Provide patch panel in existing rack to accommodate additional data outlets.
END OF SECTION 271500
SECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
DEFINITIONS
Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker
zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit selectio n between paths
for speaker alternative program signals.
Zone: Separate group of loudspeakers and a ssociated supply wiring that may be
arranged for selective switching between different channels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
Shop Drawings: Power, signal, and control wiring.
1.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Power amplifiers.
Loudspeakers.
In-house Telephone Handsets
Devices.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceilingmounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access
panels, and special moldings are shown and coordinated with each other, using input
from installers of the items involved.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit device shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Source Limitations: Ob tain public address system from single source from sin gle
manufacturer.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: CSA listed and marked for intended
location and application.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
System Functions:
1.
Selectively connect any zone to any available signal channel.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.5
A.
B.
Compatibility of Compo nents: Coordinate component feat ures to for m an integrated
system. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified
functions.
Equipment shall be modular, using so lid-state components, and fully rated for
continuous duty unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on
input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
Weather-Resistant Equipment: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for duty
outdoors or in damp locations.
POWER AMPLIFIERS
Mounting: rack mounted to suit specified enclosure.
Output Power: 70-V ba lanced line. 80 percent of the sum of watta
ge settings of
connected for each station and speaker connected in all-call mode of operation, plus a
25 percent allowance for future stations.
Total Harmonic Distortion: Less th an 3 percent at rated power output from 5
0 to
12,000 Hz.
Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 80 dB, at rated output.
Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 20 to 12,000 Hz.
Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.
Controls: On-off, input levels, and low-cut filter.
Input Sensitivity: Matched to prea mplifier and to provide full-rated ou tput with so undpressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on speaker microphone o r
handset transmitter.
IN-HOUSE PHONE HANDSET
In-house telephone systems: to mat ch existing Nortel Norstar Meridian M7208 (Pho ne
NT8B30) or approved equal, ivory finish . Provide module in existing rack
to
accommodate new zones.
Adapters shall accept voice sign als from telephone extension dia ling access and
automatically provide amplifier input and program override for preselected zones.
3.
A.
"All-call" feature shall connect the all-call sou nd signal simultaneously to all
zones regardless of zone or channel switch settings.
Telephone paging adapter shall allow paging by dialing a n extension from any
local telephone instrument and speaking into the telephone.
Produce a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all s peakers,
overriding signals currently being distributed.
Reproduce high-quality sound th at is free of noise and distortion at all
loudspeakers at all times during e quipment operation including stan dby mode
with inputs off; output free of non-uniform coverage of amplified sound.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
2.6
Communications Specifications
Page 8
Minimum Frequency Response: Flat, 200 to 2500 Hz.
Impedance Matching: Adapter matches telephone line to pub lic address
equipment input.
Rack or cabinet mounted as specified.
LOUDSPEAKERS
Speakers: McBride series 8224 (recess mounted wall type for new classrooms, surface
mounted where show on existing walls, and recessed
ceiling mounted type for
corridors), pre-assembled “call-in” speaker complete with 8’’ dual cone speaker with
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Communications Specifications
Page 9
magnet, 12.5’’ square steel baffle ( MC25A), 24 or 70 Volt to match existing, 4 Wa
transformer and suitable back box or Rauland or GE Edwards equivalent.
2.7
A.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Return air plenum rated, jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multi-pair, un-tinned solid
copper.
1.
2.
3.
2.8
A.
tt
Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 0.8mm (1/32’’) thick.
Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not le ss than 08mm (1/32’’) thick, over
shield with filled inter stices. Shield No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-coppe r strands
formed into a braid or approved equivalent foil. Shielding coverage on conductors
is not less than 60 percent.
Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
PATHWAYS
Conduit and Boxes: Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications
Systems. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
1.
Outlet boxes shall be not less than 50mm (2’’) wide, 75mm (3’’) high, and 65mm
(2.5’’) deep.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Mount system components with fastening methods and devices designe d to resist t he
seismic forces indicated in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
WIRING METHODS
Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways in wa lls, unfinished spaces and inaccessible
ceilings. Plenum rated cables may be installe d in ceiling plenums supported with JHooks on 1.5m (5’) centres. Install, size, and space J-Hooks to comply with TIA/EIA568-B.
1.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
A.
B.
Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specifie d in Section 260533
"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
Comply with requirements in Section
270528 "Pathways for Communications
Systems." for installation of conduits and wireways.
Provide pull box es at a m aximum of 30m (100’) of conduit and a m aximum of 180
degrees worth of bends between pull boxes.
Pull boxes to be 8 time s the size of inside dia meter size of conduit entering it and be
complete with screw type cover (not hinged)..
Conduit system shall contain no LB’s (only pull boxes permitted as intermediate pull
points). Only sweep or 90 degree elbows may be utilise d. The mini mum radius of
curvature shall be 10 times the conduit internal diameter.
Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
Comply with NECA 1.
General Cable Installation Requirements:
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
2.
3.
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make
terminations only at outlets and terminals.
Splices, Taps, and T erminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outle t boxes; terminal cabin ets; and eq uipment enclosures.
Cables may not be spliced.
Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760mm (30’’) and not more
than 150mm (6’’) from cabinets,
boxes, fitti ngs, outlets, racks, frames, and
terminals.
Bundle, lace, and train conducto
rs to terminal points without e
xceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. In stall lacing bars and distributio n
spools.
Do not install bruised, kinked, score d, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice
cable between termination, tap, or junction poin ts. Remove and discard cable if
damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to roo m temperature before dereeling.
Heat lamps shall not be used.
Open-Cable Installation:
1.
D.
Communications Specifications
Page 10
Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications
spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
Suspend speaker cable not in a wireway or pat hway a minimum of 200mm (8’’)
above ceiling by cable supports not more than 1.5m (5’) apart.
Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, lin e-level, speaker-level, and
power wiring runs. In stall in separate pathways or, where exposed or in
same
enclosure, separate con ductors at least 300mm (12’’) apart for speaker microphones
and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other communication
equipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM
Coordinate layout and installation of system components and sus pension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or i s supported by them, i ncluding light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
Match input and output impedances and signa l levels at signal interf aces. Provide
matching networks where required.
Identification of Condu ctors and Cables: Color-code cond uctors and apply wire and
cable marking tape to designat e wires and cables so they identify media
in
coordination with system wiring diagrams.
Equipment Cabinets and Racks:
1.
2.
3.
Group items of same function tog ether, either vertically or side by side, and
arrange controls symmetrically. Mount monitor panel above the amplifiers.
Arrange all inputs, ou tputs, interconnections, and test points so they are
accessible at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable
from rack without disturbing other items or connections.
Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front of rack is
occupied by panels.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
3.7
A.
B.
Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor. Install
in central equipment cabinet. Arrange to provide a constant input to power amplifiers.
Wall-Mounted Outlets: Flush mounted.
Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicat ed, size speaker circuit conductors from
racks to loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No. 18 AWG and conductors from
microphone receptacles to amplifiers not smaller than No. 22 AWG.
Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connection s: Make init ial connections using t ap
settings indicated on Drawings.
Install all devices in control panel as per detail on drawing where shown in
classrooms.
Connect wiring according to Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" and
Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."
GROUNDING
Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
Install grounding electrodes as specified in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bon ding
for Communications Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Engage manufacturer to start-up, inspect, test, and adjust component s, assemblies,
and equipment installations, including connections.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
3.8
A.
3.9
A.
Communications Specifications
Page 11
Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.
After installing public a ddress system and after electrical circu itry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Operational Test: Perf orm tests t hat include originating program and page
messages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and othe r inputs.
Verify proper routing a nd volume levels and t hat system is free of n oise and
distortion.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker- line
matching transformers.
Public address system will be considered
defective if it does not pass tests a
nd
inspections.
ADJUSTING
Occupancy Adjustments: When req uested within 12 month s of da te of Substantial
Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visit s to Proje ct during oth er-than-normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
DEMONSTRATION
Train Owner's maintenance perso nnel to adjust, operate , and maint ain the public
address system and eq uipment; allow for a minimum of 4 hours training over two
separate site visits. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 275116
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
Communications Specifications
Page 12
SECTION 275313 - CLOCK SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
A.
Secondary indicating clocks.
System wire and cable.
DEFINITIONS
NIST: The National Institute of Science and Technology.
PC: Personal computer.
UTC: Universal time coordinated. The precisely measured time at zero degr
longitude; a worldwide standard for time synchronization.
ees
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of prod uct indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and prof iles, and finishes (including
available colors) for e ach product indicated and describe features and operating
sequences, both automatic and manual, for the following:
1.
2.
Indicating clocks.
Equipment enclosures and back boxes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SECONDARY INDICATING CLOCKS
Analog Clock: Equipped with a sweep second h and. Movement shall be driven by selfstarting, permanently lubricated, sealed synchronous motor equipped with a correcting
solenoid actuator, or be a microprocessor-based, second impulse unit, compatible with
the master clock. Refer to electrical drawing legend for clock type (wired or battery).
1.
2.
Wired Clock: Rauland Analog Clock, model TCCKAN12, 300mm (12’’) diameter,
CSA certified, black ca se, semi-recess mounted, 12 or 2 4V power (t o match
existing system – verify on site) co mplete with control con nection from existing
Master Clock system or Dukane or GE equivalent. Clock to automatically sense
correction codes sent by Master Clock.
Connections for Power and Correction:
a.
Wired synchronous connection to
power and correction.
1)
b.
c.
3.
the maste r clock for both operating
Time-Base Backup: Internal capacitor shall back up internal time
base to ma intain timekeeping during power o utages of up to 12
hours' duration.
Correction by RS485, Ethernet, or similar data line with operating power
supplied over a separate connection.
Power Connection for Secondary Indicating Clocks: Plug connector.
Display Visibility: Hour and minute numerals r eadable at 10m (30’) i n normal
ambient light.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
Provision for Modular Panel Installa tion: Equip designated clock for pa nel mounting.
Mount semi-recessed with arrangement and trim as in dicated on electrical detail
drawings. Coordinate wiring with other modular panel components.
Secondary Indicating Clock Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.2
A.
C.
D.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
Low voltage connected to central system or battery p
owered only as per
electrical drawings.
Clock Type: Analog.
Face Configuration: Single.
Mounting: Surface or semi-recessed within classroom control panel
for new
walls.
Nominal Dimensions: 300mm (12’’) diameter.
Casing Finish: Black.
Dial Face Color: Black.
Analog Clock Crystal: Clear acrylic.
Face Color: White.
Seconds Display: Yes.
PROGRAM SIGNAL DEVICES
Bells: Heavy-duty, mod ular, vibrating type with the follo
measured at 3m (10’):
1.
2.
B.
Communications Specifications
Page 13
wing sound-output ratings
150mm (6’’) Bell: 90 dB at 1m.
Edwards Adaptabel, 33 2 series (AC power) or 333 serie s (DC power), 100mm
(4’’) diameter single stroke bell, voltage to mat ch existing (verify on site), grey
finish complete with recessed back box for new walls and surface mounted back
box where mounted to existing concrete block walls
Mounting Arrangement for Signal Devices: Designed for attachment with screws on the
mounting plate of a flush-mounted back box unless otherwise indicated.
Enclosures for Flush-Mounting Bells and Horns: Enclosur e, mounting plate, and grille
assembly shall be furnished by device manufac turer to match features of the device to
be mounted. Enclosure shall be recessed in wall, completely enclosing the device, with
grille mounting over the open side of the enclosure and flush with the wall.
Connection Provision for Signal-Indicating Devices: Plug connector.
CLOCK CIRCUIT POWER BOOSTER
Description: Transformer power supply, mounted in steel cabinet with hinged door, and
having fuse-protected input and output circuits.
BACK BOXES FOR SECONDARY INDICATING CLOCKS AND PROGRAM DEVICES
Description: Box and cover-plate assembly shall be furnish ed by device manufacturer
and be suitable for device to be mounted. Back boxes shall be equipped with
knockouts and hanger straps or mounting ada pters arranged for flush mounting the
device unless otherwise indicated.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Conductors: Jacketed, plenum-rated, twisted pair and twisted multi-pair, un-tinned solid
copper. Sizes as recommended by system manufacturer, but not smaller than No. 22
AWG. Voltage drop for signal, control, and clock correction circuits shall not exceed 10
percent under peak load conditions.
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
120V AC and Class 1 Signal and Co ntrol Circuits: Stranded, single conductors of size
and type recommended by system manufacturer. Materials and install
ation
requirements are specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Po wer
Conductors and Cables."
Class 2 and Class 3 Signal and Control Circuits: Single conductor or twisted-pair cable,
unshielded, unless manufacturer recommends shielded cable.
Data Circuits: Category 6 minimum, unshielded, twisted-pair
cable, unless
manufacturer recommends shielded cable.
Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 0.8mm (1/32’’) thick.
Plenum Cable: CSA listed and labeled for plenum installation.
Conductor Color-Coding: Uniformly identified and coordinated with wiring diagrams.
Shielding: For speaker-microphone leads and at other lo cations recommended by
manufacturer; No. 34 AWG tinned, soft-copper strands formed in to a braid or
equivalent foil.
1.
2.6
A.
B.
Communications Specifications
Page 14
Minimum Shielding Coverage on Conductors: 60 percent.
PATHWAYS
Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Same as required for
electrical branch circu its specified in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 50W x 75H x 2.5D mm (2x3x2.5’’).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Mount system components with fastening methods and devices designe d to resist t he
seismic forces indicated in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
Install all devices in control panel as per detail on drawing where shown in classrooms.
WIRING METHODS
Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways in wa lls, unfinished spaces and inaccessible
ceilings. Plenum rated cables may be installe d in ceiling plenums supported with JHooks on 1.5m (5’) centres. Install, size, and space J-Hooks to comply with TIA/EIA568-B.
1.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specifie d in Section 260533
"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and
outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Use plug connectors for connections to clocks and signal devices.
Ground clocks, programming equipment, and conductor an d cable shields to eliminate
shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup,
cross talk, and other impairments.
IDENTIFICATION
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
ENSO Systems Inc. #865
St. Elizabeth C.S. – Full Day Kindergarten Addition
B.
3.5
A.
Color-code wires, and apply wire and cable marking tape to design ate wires and
cables so they are uniformly identified and coordinated with wiring diagrams throughout
the system.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
Communications Specifications
Page 15
Perform operational-system tests to verify compliance with the Specifications and
make adjustments to b ring system into compliance. Include operation of all
modes of clock correction and all programming and manually programmed signal
and relay operating functions.
Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and
terminals are identified.
ADJUSTING
Occupancy Adjustments: When req uested within 12 month s of da te of Substantial
Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visit s to Proje ct during oth er-than-normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
DEMONSTRATION
Train Owner's maintenance perso nnel to adjust, operate, and maint
program-control system components.
END OF SECTION 275313
End of Division 27
ain clock-and-
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
GUIDELINES
For
Toronto Catholic District School Board
80 Sheppard Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario
Document Version 2.33
Issued –13 June 2011
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
This document has been developed to create cabling infrastructure management standards for
the design of voice, wireless, and data systems for the Toronto Catholic District School Board.
This document is to be used in conjunction with industry standards. The ANSI/TIA/EIA
standards as reflected by the BICSI Manuals (specified later in this document) are to be followed
by the design engineer and installation contractors. The goal of this document is to adapt the
industry standards to meet the needs of the Toronto Catholic District School Board technology
requirements.
This document can be used by engineers when designing Structured Cabling Systems for the
Toronto Catholic District School Board.
1
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
Table of Contents
Confidentiality Statement ............................................................................................. 6
1.0
1.01 Intent ........................................................................................................................... 6
1.02 Definitions.................................................................................................................... 6
1.03 General Definitions ...................................................................................................... 6
1.04 Codes and Standards .................................................................................................. 8
1.05 Installation Standards ................................................................................................ 10
1.06 Labour ....................................................................................................................... 10
2.0 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 12
2.01 Project Design Overview ............................................................................................ 12
2.02
Design Considerations .............................................................................................. 13
2.03 MTR/TR Location....................................................................................................... 13
2.04 Main Telecommunications Room (MTR) – ................................................................. 13
2.05
Telecommunications Room (TR) ............................................................................... 14
2.06 Distribution Panels ..................................................................................................... 15
2.07 Distribution Pathway System - ................................................................................... 15
2.08
Cabling Distribution Design Requirements................................................................. 15
2.09
Workstation Outlets Locations ................................................................................... 15
2.10
Basic Wireless Access Point Design Guidelines ........................................................ 16
2.11 Provisions for Portable Classrooms............................................................................ 16
2.12 Design Drawings........................................................................................................ 16
2.13 System Documentation ............................................................................................... 17
3.0
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PRODUCTS ............................................................................ 19
3.01 Cable Trays General .................................................................................................. 19
3.02 Cable Tray Types....................................................................................................... 19
3.03 Surface Raceway (Retrofit Only, All systems) ............................................................ 19
3.04 Outlet Boxes .............................................................................................................. 20
3.05
Utility Poles (Retrofit Only) ........................................................................................ 20
4.0
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION....................................................................................... 22
4.01 Pathways / Raceways ................................................................................................ 22
4.02
Cable Tray ................................................................................................................ 23
4.03 Outlet Boxes .............................................................................................................. 23
4.04 Utility Poles (Retrofit Only) ......................................................................................... 24
4.05 Electrical Penetrations ............................................................................................... 24
4.06 Cutting, Patching, and Painting .................................................................................. 24
4.07 Firestopping ............................................................................................................... 24
4.08 Surface Raceway....................................................................................................... 24
5.0
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PRODUCTS.................................................................. 26
5.01
5.02
5.03
5.04
5.05
Racks and Cabinets ................................................................................................... 26
Vertical Cable Management ....................................................................................... 26
Cabinet Vertical Cable Management .......................................................................... 26
Vertical Power Bar ..................................................................................................... 27
Fibre Optic Cross Connect Panels ............................................................................. 27
2
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
5.06 Fibre Optic Connectors .............................................................................................. 27
5.07 Fibre Optic Cables ..................................................................................................... 27
5.08 Telephone Backbone Cable and Terminations ........................................................... 28
5.09 Modular Patch Panels and Wire Management ............................................................ 28
5.10 Horizontal Cables ...................................................................................................... 28
5.11 Workstation Outlets ................................................................................................... 28
5.12 Patch and Workstation Cables ................................................................................... 28
6.0
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM INSTALLATION ............................................................ 30
6.01
Conduit and Cable Distribution System ..................................................................... 31
6.02 Backboards, Rack, and Cabinets ............................................................................... 32
6.03 Rack/Cabinet Entry .................................................................................................... 33
6.04 Telephone Backbone Cable and Terminations ........................................................... 33
6.05
Patch Panels............................................................................................................. 33
6.06
Connectors and Terminations ................................................................................... 33
6.07 Telecommunications Outlets ...................................................................................... 34
6.08 Wireless Access Points .............................................................................................. 34
6.09
Portables .................................................................................................................. 35
7.0
Grounding and Bonding System .................................................................................... 37
7.01 General ..................................................................................................................... 37
7.02 TBB Sizing ................................................................................................................. 38
7.03 Copper Code Cable Sizes .......................................................................................... 38
7.04 Installation ................................................................................................................. 38
7.05 Special Instructions .................................................................................................... 39
8.0
Identification .................................................................................................................. 41
8.01 Labelling .................................................................................................................... 41
8.02 Identification .............................................................................................................. 41
9.0
Documentation and Testing Requirements..................................................................... 44
9.01 Acceptable Field Test Equipment (Tester).................................................................. 44
9.02 Copper Cabling Testing Procedures........................................................................... 44
9.03 Fibre Optic Testing Procedures: ................................................................................. 45
9.04 Test Result Documentation ........................................................................................ 46
9.05 As-Built Documentation ............................................................................................. 46
10.0
Acceptance .................................................................................................................. 48
10.01
10.02
10.03
10.04
10.05
11.0
On-Site Field Observations ........................................................................................ 48
Above the Ceiling Pathway Inspection ....................................................................... 48
Testing Verification .................................................................................................... 48
Substantial Completion .............................................................................................. 48
Final Acceptance ...................................................................................................... 48
Appendices................................................................................................................ 50
11.01
11.02
11.03
11.04
11.05
Appendix A – Drawing List ......................................................................................... 50
Appendix B –Forms ................................................................................................... 73
Appendix C – Elementary School Design Standards for Rooms Data Sheet ............... 75
Appendix D – Secondary School Design Standards for Rooms Data Sheet ................ 76
Appendix E – Portable Design Standards ................................................................... 77
3
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
Revision History
Date
13 July, 2010
Author
David Klein
21 September, 2010
David Klein
14 June 2011
Bill Vanderlans
4
Description
Section 11.01 – Appendix A –
Network Diagrams.
• Updated versions of
diagrams
Section 8.0 – Identification
• Clarification of wireless
identification for sites with
existing identification
systems
Section 8.02 – Identification
• Clarification regarding
labelling convention
identifying hub room.
Section 11.05 – Appendix E
Portable Design Standards.
• Appendix E added
Section 6.09 – Portables
•
added .5
Section 11.01 – Appendix A –
Network Diagrams.
• Added Drawing
Numbers T-20 and T21
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
Section I – General
5
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
1.0
.1
.2
1.01
.1
.2
.3
1.02
.1
Confidentiality Statement
The material provided here is proprietary to the Toronto Catholic District School Board
(herein after referred to as the Owner or TCDSB and their agents.
The documents shall remain property of the Owner. The document shall not be
reproduced in whole or in part without the written consent of the Owner. The Owner
shall not be held responsible or liable for any use of these documents without
permission.
Intent
The TCDSB will establish guidelines for a structured cabling system for each facility
owned by the TCDSB, including elementary schools, secondary schools and
administrative offices.
The schools are broken down into three categories, new builds, expansions and retrofits
The guidelines will establish best practices for the installation of data, voice, and
wireless access point (WAP) cabling.
Definitions
The components of a telecommunications system shall be defined as follows:
Horizontal Cabling
Backbone Cabling
Entrance Facilities
(EF)
Main
Telecommunications
Room (MTR)
Telecommunications
Rooms (TR)
Work Area (WA)
Telecommunications
outlet (TO)
Wireless Access
Point (WAP)
Administration
1.03
The cabling between the Telecommunications Room and the Work Area
The cabling between the Telecommunications Room and the Equipment
Room
An entrance to the building for both public and private network service
cables.
An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications
equipment. Also referred to as the Equipment room.
An enclosed space where the horizontal cable terminates and crossconnects to the equipment or backbone cabling.
Location of the telecommunications outlet
End point of the structured cabling system where the horizontal cable
terminates.
A wireless access point (WAP) is a device that allows wireless
communication devices to connect to a wireless network using 802.11x
standards. The WAP usually connects to a router, and can relay data
between the wireless devices (such as computers or printers) and wired
devices on the network.
The method of Labelling, identification and documentation of the
structured cabling system.
General Definitions
Administration
The method for labelling, documentation and usage needed to
implement moves, additions and changes of the
Communications infrastructure.
Backboard
A wood panel used for mounting connecting hardware and
equipment.
The radius that cable can bend before the risk of damage or
decrease in transmission performance.
Bend Radius
6
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
Bonding
The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically
conductive path that will assure electrical continuity, the
capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.
Cable Tray
A ladder, trough, spline, basket style, solid bottom or channel
raceway system intended for the support of Communications
cable.
The buildings and grounds of a complex, such as a College.
Campus
Conduit
Cross-Connection
A rigid or flexible metallic or non-metallic raceway of circular
cross-section through which cables can be pulled.
A connection scheme between cabling runs, subsystems, and
equipment using patch cords or jumpers that attach to
connecting hardware on each end.
Earth Ground
An electrical connection to earth obtained by a grounding
electrode system.
Electromagnetic
Interference
Fire-stop
The interference in signal transmission or reception resulting
from the coupling of electrical or magnetic fields.
A material, device, or assembly of parts in a fire rated wall or
floor, to prevent passage of flame, smoke or gases through
the rated barrier.
A conducting connection, intentional or accidental, between a
circuit (or equipment) and the earth (or to come conducting
body that acts in place of the earth).
Consists of cabling that extends between and includes the
horizontal cross-connect and the Communications outlet.
A cross-connect of horizontal cabling to other cabling, e.g.,
horizontal, backbone, equipment.
Ground
Horizontal Cabling
Horizontal Crossconnect
Innerduct
A corrugate plastic tube installed within an metallic conduit
or used to protect cabling within the Telecommunications
Room
Intermediate Cross- Across-connect between the main cross-connect and the
connect
horizontal cross-connect in backbone cabling.
TO
The telecommunications outlet in the work area.
Open Office Cabling The cabling that distributes from the Communications room to
the open office area utilizing a consolidation point or multiuser Communications outlet.
Pathway
A facility for the placement of Communications cable.
Penetration
Opening made in fire-rated barrier (architectural structures or
assemblies).
Pull Strength
The maximum pulling force that can be safely applied to a
cable without incurring damage.
.1
.2
Raceway
Any enclosed channel designed expressly for holding wires or
cables.
UTP
Work Area
Unshielded Twisted Pair
A building space where the occupants interact with
Communications terminal equipment.
Wherever the terms “documents “are used it shall mean the guidelines and drawings
that form part of this document.
Wherever the term is used “install” or variations of the term “install” are used in the
7
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
.3
.4
1.04
.1
documentation it shall mean to install and connect complete.
Wherever the term is used “supply” or variations of the term “Supply” are used in this
documentation it shall mean to supply only.
Wherever the term “work” is used in the documentation it shall mean necessary
equipment, materials and labour to provide a complete and functioning structured
cabling system as detailed in this guideline documentation.
Codes and Standards
The equipment, material and installation shall conform to the following version of the
applicable Codes, Standards (including technical service bulletins and addenda) and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.1
Commercial Building Telecommunications
Standard
Part 1: General Requirements
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2-1
Addendum 1 – Transmission Performance Specifications
for 4-pair 100Ω Category 6 Cabling
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.3
Optical Fibre Cabling Components Standard
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.3-1
Optical Fibre Cabling Components Standard – Addendum
1
Additional Transmission Performance requirements for
50/125 µm Optical Fibre Cables
TIA/EIA 569-A
Commercial Building Standard For Telecommunications
Pathways And Spaces.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-606-A
Administration Standard For The Telecommunications
Infrastructure Of Commercial Buildings
ANSI/TIA/EIA—J-STD-607
Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) And Bonding
Requirements For Telecommunications.
CSA C22.1
Canadian Electric Code Part 1 Ontario Hydro Electrical
Safety Code
CSA C22.2 No. 214
Communications Cables.
ISO/IEC IS 11801A
Generic Cabling For Customer Premises.
CENELEC EN 50173
Performance
Schemes.
IEC 603-7, PART 7
Detailed Specification For Connectors, 8-Way, Including
Fixed And Free Connectors With Common Mating
Features.
FIPS PUB 174
Commercial
8
Requirements
Building
For
Generic
Telecommunications
Cabling
Cabling
Wiring
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
Standard. Federal Information Standard Publication.
UL 444 and 13
Adopted Test And Follow-Up Service Requirements For
the Optional Qualification Of 100 Ω Twisted-Pair (Cables).
IEC 807-8
Rectangular Connectors For Frequencies Below 3 MHz,
Part 8: Detailed Specification For Connectors, FourSignal Contacts And Earthing Contacts For Cable
Screens, First Edition.
NEMA WC 63
Performance Standard For Field Testing Of Unshielded
Twisted-Pair Cabling System.
CSA C22.2 No. 232-M
Fibre optic Cables.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-492BAAA
Detail Specifications For Class Iva Dispersion-Unshifted
Singlemode Optical Waveguide Fibres Used In
Communication Systems.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-455
Test Procedures For Fibre optics, Cables And Transistors.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-598
Colour Coding Of Fibre optic Cables.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-604-3
FOCIS 3 Fibre optic Connector Intermateability Standard.
ANSI/ICEA S-83-596
Fibre optic Premises Distribution Cable.
ANSI/ICEA S-83-640
Fibre optic Outside Plant Communications Cable.
ANSI Z136.2
American Standards For The Safe Operation Of Fibre
optic Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diode And
LED Sources.
ANSI/EIA/TIA-492AAAA
Detailed Specification For 62.5µm Core Diameter /
125µm Cladding Diameter Class 1a Multimode, GradedIndex Optical Waveguide fibres.
ANSI X3.230
Information Technology – Fibre Channel – Physical and
signalling Interface.
IEEE 802.3z (Gigabit Ethernet)
Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layer,
Repeater and Management Parameters for 1000 Mb/s
Operation
IEEE 802.ae (10 Gigabit Ethernet)
Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layer,
Repeater and Management Parameters for 10 Gb/s
Operation
ISO/IEC 11801 2nd Edition
Generic Cabling for Customer Premises
9
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
1.05
.1
1.06
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Installation Standards
Install cabling in accordance with the most recent edition of BICSI publications:
BICSI
Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
BICSI
Cabling Installation Manual
Labour
The Telecommunications Cabling Contractor shall use only tradesmen who are fully
trained, qualified and experienced on the installation, termination and testing of a
Certified Communications Cabling system. The installer must be a certified and
approved installer of the specified cabling system.
The Project Manager and Project Forman who start the project must remain on the
project until its completion. Changes to the contractors’ project team may only occur
with the prior consent of owner.
At least one member of the contractors project team must hold a current RCDD
accreditation, or be a BICSI registered installation technician, and will be responsible for
quality control during the course of the project
A copy of the RCDD or BICSI accreditation shall be submitted with the project manual
for the project records.
The Telecommunications Cabling Contractor may not assign or sub-contract any work
without the prior written consent of the Owner or his designated representative. A list of
sub-contractors must be submitted with the tender response.
10
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
Section 2 - Project Design
11
Toronto Catholic District
School Board
2.0 Overview
2.01
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
Project Design Overview
This standard is drawn from the ANSI/TIA/EIA Structured Wiring Standards and designed to
support the standards of the Toronto Catholic District School Board. Projects will vary
depending on whether the project is new or retrofit design and construction.
The base facilities required are to include communications equipment rooms (ER),
Telecommunications Rooms (TR) and Pathways for the distribution of the Structured Cabling
System (SCS).
Designated locations for workstation outlets should accommodate room rearrangements and
future alternate uses whenever possible. The workstation outlets should be located so that they
are far away from the main teaching boards, windows, egress and water sources (including
condensation from louvers and equipment.
Every teaching area shall receive sufficient workstation outlets to allow for a minimum of four
cables all other areas shall be provided with a minimum of two cables per location. Offices
require multiple locations to allow for multiple furniture arrangements (2 locations minimum).
Unless fully enclosed in conduit, all communications wire shall be PLENUM rated Category 6
UTP #24 AWG, or better.
All workstation outlets and patch panels shall use ANSI/TIA/EIA T568A 8-pin modular jacks (RJ45) and be generic in design.
All cabling shall be installed in a star topology, originating in the TR and terminating at the
workstation outlet. All conductors shall be terminated at both ends.
Electrical wiring shall not be bundled in the same pathway as the communications wiring unless
the pathway contains partitions for power and communications wiring approved for this purpose.
Combination power and data outlet boxes (typically used in floor installations) shall contain no
cross over wiring.
Fibre optic cabling is to be used between buildings for Data distribution due to its transmission